Unisab II Ver 202.04 - Engineering Manual - 0178-511 - ENG

Engineering manual - UNISAB II - 2.
04
Compressor type: Refrigerant:
Shop no:
Password:
Software version:
Engineering Manual
UNISAB II Control
Computerized Control System
for refrigerating compressors
Version 2.04
0178-511 - ENG 1/230

Rev. 2005.03
Engineering manual - UNISAB II - 2.04
Preface
This engineering manual covers reciprocating as This document is produced by:
well as screw compressors, unless otherwise stat- Sabroe Refrigeration
ed. This manual offers a detailed description of Chr. X’s Vej 201
the UNISAB II control system including function, DK-8270 Højbjerg
application, service and trouble shooting. Danmark
In version 2.04, the title of this manual has been Copyright © 2004 Sabroe Refrigeration
changed from Instruction manual to Engineering
manual.
In the space below you can enter the name and address of your local Sabroe representative:
This document must not be copied without the Be aware of the version number of this manual.
written permission of Sabroe Refrigeration and The version number is printed at the bottom of the
the contents must not be imparted to a third party preceeding page. It is important that this number
nor be used for any unauthorised purpose. Con- is identical to the UNISAB II version number ap-
travention will be prosecuted. pearing for a few seconds in the second line of the
This manual is intended for operating and service display when turning on power. It is, however,
personnel. possible to use a manual with higher version
number than UNISAB II. In such cases use the
Please read this manual carefully so that you fully section List of Versions to view the differences.
understand the UNISAB II control system and Never use a manual with lower version number
know how to operate it correctly. Damage occur- than UNISAB II.
ring as a result of incorrect operation is not cov-
ered by Sabroe Refrigeration‘s guarantee.
2/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
WWarning!
If it is necessary to service UNISAB II control system, the power supply to the compressor motor must
be switched off at the main switch to prevent the compressor from starting up accidentally.
The UNISAB II box contains live parts, which makes it absolutely necessary to comply with the safety
regulations on site.
Failure to do so may cause damage to equipment and affect personal safety. Even though the power
supply to UNISAB II is switched off, some of the terminals may still be live.
Only authorized personnel is permitted to service UNISAB II. If UNISAB II is connected on a network,
always be aware that the compressor can be started from REMOTE. This cannot be avoided solely
by making choices on the UNISAB II display.
Emergency stop
Activate the emergency stop by a light pressure and deactivate it by turning it clockwise. The emer-
gency stop cuts right into the power circuit of the compressor motor guard. Activation of the emergency
stop during operation will lead to immediate unloading of the motor guard while there is still power on
UNISAB II. In this way it will always be possible to read the state of the compressor.
Whenever the emergency stop is activated during operation, the alarm text COMPR. MOTOR ERROR
will be read on the display. Before compressor restart is possible, deactivate the alarm by means of
the R key and release the emergency stop. PLEASE OBSERVE: If UNISAB II is set on REMOTE or
AUTO, the compressor will restart automatically.
Technical Data
Power supply: Nominal VAC Tolerance Hz
24 +10/-15% 45 - 65
115 +10/-15% 45 - 65
230 +10/-15% 45 - 65
Consumption: 50 VA
Ambient temperature: 0-55° C (during operation)
Humidity: 20-90% relative humidity (not condensing)
Tightness: IP 54
0178-511 - ENG 3/230

Rev. 2005.03
4/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
Contents
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Emergency stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Description of UNISAB II control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Operating UNISAB II control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Selecting a picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Display in Bar or °C/R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
The user's own picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Changing of set values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Application of password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Changing of password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Resetting of password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Procedure for changing of set values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Changing a value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Changing a function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Factory settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
SETUP I CONFIG I CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
SETUP I CONFIG I COMPRESSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
SETUP I CONFIG I OIL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
SETUP I CONFIG I ECONOMIZER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
SETUP I CONFIG I MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
SETUP I CONFIG I MULTISAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
SETUP I CONFIG I COP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
SETUP I CONFIG I COMMUNICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
SETUPI CONFIG I DIG. IN VIA PROFIBUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
SETUP I CONFIG I MEASURING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
SETUP I CONFIG I UNIT/PLANT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
SETUP I CONFIG I FACTORY RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Alarms and Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Analog alarms and warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Suction gas superheat, alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Auxiliary input signal (4-20 mA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Other alarms and warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Oil system error (screw compressors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Capacity error (screw compressors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
PMS error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
0178-511 - ENG 5/230

Rev. 2005.03
No starting permission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Compressor motor error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Compressor motor overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Discharge pressure, overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
High motor temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Oil pump error (screw compressors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Oil pump error (SAB 80) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Full flow pump error (screw compressors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Cooling fan error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Oil rectifier error (screw compressors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Wrong starting number in sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Error in diagnosis - EEPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Limiting suction pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Limiting discharge pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Limiting brine temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Limiting hot water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Limiting discharge temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
No communication to Chiller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Chiller, alarm from Chiller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Watch the oil pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Vi position error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Evolution, alarm from PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Evolution, warning from PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Evolution, no communication to PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Low lubricating pressure monitoring (screw compressor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
High oil differential pressure
(SMC Mk4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
1. TIMERS - I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
2. TIMER SETUP - I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
3. SERVICE COUNTER - I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
4. DATE - TIME - I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
5. OIL CHARGING - I
(screw compressor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
6. MOTOR FAN I (Frequency controlled screw compressor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Timer description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Screw compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Reciprocating compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
7. P BAND FACTOR - I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Stop delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Special timers in connection with MULTISAB
8. TRANSFER - I Reciprocating compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
9. TAKE-OVER - I Reciprocating compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
MULTISAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
1. MULTISAB STATE - I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
2. ALL COMPRESSORS - I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
6/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
3. PARALLEL CONTR. - I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Compressor regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Regulators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
PID regulation (outer loop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
P regulation (inner loop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Regulation of Vi slide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Setting the regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Set points on regulators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Universal regulator (Ext. input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Set point control with current input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Suction pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Brine temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Disch. pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Hotwater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Capacity control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Climatic Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Adjusting slide speed (screw compressors with hydraulic slides) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Capacity slide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Volume ratio slide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Variable Zero position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Corrected capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Automatic setting of new zero point (SAB 202) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Manual setting of new zero point (all types of screw compressors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Built-in spacer block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
The alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Zero pos. picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Electrical slide control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Part load and full load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Calculated Vi position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Change to full load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Change to part load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Position indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Slide brake control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Capacity alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Limiting functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Standard limiters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Special limiters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Display indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Compressor control and surveillance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

SAB 202, SAB 163H/128H Mk3 with oil pump & VMY Mk3 with full flow pump . . . . . . . . . 113
SAB 128HR and 163HR with oil pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
SAB 283, SAB 330 and SAB 355 with oil pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
SAB 80 with fitted (mechanical) oil pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
GSV/RWF with oil pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
0178-511 - ENG 7/230

Rev. 2005.03
SV 24/26 with oil pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

FV 24/26 with oil pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
FV 19 with oil pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
VMY Mk 3
without full flow pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
VMY Mk 2 and 2.5 with built-in oil pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
SAB 110/128/163 Mk 2
without oil pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
SAB 128/163 Mk 2 Booster with oil pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
SAB 163 Mk 1 with oil pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
External starting permission - immediate stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
External starting permission -
normal stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Oil charging, manual (screw compressors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Motor current measuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Motor power measuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
COP set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Thermistor connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Aux. output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Capacity down blocked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Power management system (PMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Cold store function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
HP on TWO-STAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Oil return (reciprocating compressors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Start unloading system for TCMO 28 compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Additional steps on SMC compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Oil heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Definition of refrigerant R000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Pressure transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Brine temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Calibration of motor frequency signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Motor current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Hydraulic slide systems
(certain screw compressors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Adjusting capacity measuring system with turning transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Adjusting long-stroke capacity rod for SAB 110, SAB 128, SAB 163, SAB 202, SAB 81, SAB 83,
SAB 85, SAB 87, SAB 89 and SAB 330 (capacity and Vi) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Adjusting long-stroke capacity rod for SAB 283 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Adjusting short-stroke capacity rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Electrical slide systems
(certain screw compressors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Factory setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Trouble shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Diagnosis pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
1) Diagnosis I Insp. old alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
8/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
2) Diagnosis I Misc. functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

3) Diagnosis I Software version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
4) Diagnosis I Digital inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
5) Diagnosis I Digital outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
6) Diagnosis I Analog inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
7) Diagnosis I Analog outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
8) Diagnosis I No of alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
9) Diagnosis I Superuser keyword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
10) Diagnosis I Serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
11) Diagnosis I Examine memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
12) Diagnosis J New password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
13) Diagnosis I Power on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
14) Diagnosis I Zero capacity pos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
15) Diagnosis I COP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Printed circuit board, light diodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Trouble shooting diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Replacement of door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Replacement of CPU print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Replacement of CPU print and EEPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Replacement of relay print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Replacement of EPROM (program) UNISAB II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Replacement of serial EEPROM (diagnosis) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Replacement of battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Installation of data communication cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
MULTISAB regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
System setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Regulation Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Start and system numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

- pref. master = COMPR#. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Start and system numbers - pref. master = START# . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Example of regulation - screw compressors only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Regulating parameters (for BRINE regulator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Loading sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Unloading sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Operating sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Regulating parameters (for SUCTION PRESSURE regulator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
0178-511 - ENG 9/230

Rev. 2005.03
Loading sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Unloading sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Regulating parameters (for SUCTION PRESSURE regulator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
State of transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
State of take-over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Unloading sequence - sequence B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Trouble shooting
The plant cannot start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
The plant does not run in sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
List of versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Spare parts for UNISAB II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Supplementary material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
10/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
1. Description of UNISAB II control

The purpose of the UNISAB II control system is to Other possibilities:
monitor, protect, control and regulate reciprocat- • UNISAB II can be configured to run as a
ing and screw compressors. Both the control box chiller controller.
and the electrical components have been con-
nected from the factory. Thus, only a few connec- • By inserting an optional communication
tions are necessary to link the components to the print, UNISAB II can be configured to com-
electrical installations on site. municate with
UNISAB II is programmed according to the type of a PLC, the configuration by the name EVO-
compressor it is going to controls. See section LUTION
Configuration. one or more Quantum compressor control-
UNISAB II contains different ways of controllers also manufactured by
ling/regulating compressor capacity according to Sabroe Refrigeration.
pressure levels or temperatures. Compressor ca- The above points are described in separate man-
pacity can be regulated both manually and auto- uals, only the configuration is included in this man-
matically. ual.
Furthermore, a number of limiting functions have UNISAB II is operated by means of a front panel
been incorporated. In periods of overloading as shown in the following drawing. The front panel
these limiting functions will intervene and limit is well-arranged with only a few keys and a distinct
compressor capacity until the situation has re- display.
turned to normal. Consequently, the number of The subsequent description refers to the numbers
undesirable operational stops will be reduced as in the drawing. On delivery UNISAB II is preset
well as the need for supervision. with a number of factory values and is thus ready
Compressors fitted with UNISAB II CONTROL for operation. Therefore, only a few adjustments
can be linked via the built-in communication sys- are necessary to adapt the UNISAB II system to
tem, MULTISAB. In this way compressors can its actual use. For this purpose, use the enclosed
work in a common refrigerating system, thus opti- leaflet Quick Reference.
mizing the operation of the entire compressor UNISAB II is constructed not to lose its preset or
plant. changed values in case of a temporary power fail-
The communication system makes it possible ure. UNISAB II is fitted with a battery, which is
also to connect UNISAB II with a PLC or PC cen- used by the built-in timer so that time and date are
tral monitoring, control and data logging system. always correct even though current has been dis-
UNISAB II can be linked to and communicate with connected. The hour counter and any stored
old SABROE control units such as PROSAB II alarm values will thus maintain the correct time.
and UNISAB S/R/RT/RTH.
0178-511 - ENG 11/230

Rev. 2005.03
Fig. 1.1 UNISAB II front panel
10 9 8 7 3 4 2 5 6 1 11 13 12 14 15
Suct.temp. -25°C
I Disch.temp. 38°C Set
Oil press. 4.3 bar
Ready 0%
R O
UNISAB II
12/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
Operating UNISAB II control Fig. 1.3 Drawing of fuses and their positions
Start-up
On delivery all electrical components in the com-
pressor are connected to UNISAB II. On site it is 1 2 3
only necessary to add the correct supply voltage 3A
from the local installations. The electric wiring UNISAB II

must be carried out according to the wiring dia-
grams for UNISAB II at the end of this manual.
Note in particular
a. that no outside voltage must be applied to the
digital inputs of UNISAB II.
b. that the code plug for the supply voltage must

be correct compared to the local supply volt- Before any voltage is applied to UNISAB II, the
age. (see Fig. 1.2) emergency stop switch will be activated.
Fig. 1.2 Drawing of plugs and their positions When voltage is applied to UNISAB II, the follow-
ing Main picture will appear in the display, and
UNISAB II will be ready for operation.
SUCT.PRESS 0,0 BAR
DISCH.PRES 0,0 BAR
UNISAB II MOTOR CURR 0A
STOPPED 0%
UNISAB II has been programmed with values for

warning limits, alarm limits, set points, etc. This
makes it possible to start up the compressor im-
mediately.
However, some of the values must always be
adapted to the actual operating situation. For this
purpose use the enclosed leaflet Quick Refer-
230 VAC 115 VAC ence. It is also recommended to read this manual
Also check that the 3 A fuse is in good working carefully to acquire a thorough knowledge of how
condition. to operate UNISAB II.
UNISAB II is operated exclusively by means of the

front panel keys. Reading of operating conditions
as well as changing of limiting values and set
0178-511 - ENG 13/230

Rev. 2005.03
points is carried out via the display. The display Front panel
contains a number of different pictures.
The UNISAB II front panel is divided into two sec-
The control panel is usually closed and locked tions:
with a screw at each end of the panel. The control section, pos. 2 to 10, by means of
By turning the screws half a turn the control panel which the compressor is controlled.
is loosened and can be lifted to an open position, The recording section, pos. 11 to 15, by means
Here, it is fastened to the cabinet. See Fig. 1.4. of which menu pictures are selected and values
Fig. 1.4 Opening the cabinet changed.
Control section:
Pos. 2 Green lamp indicating whether the
compressor is running. At start-up
UNISAB II this lamp will flash until UNISAB II
has received feedback from the mo-
tor starter. At the same time the text
"STARTING" (lamp flashes) and
"OPERATING" (lamp light steady)
UNISAB II
can be seen in the bottom line of an
operating picture.
Pos. 3 Yellow lamp indicating whether the
state of operation is automatic or
In this way it is still easy to operate the control manual. Yellow light = manual op-
panel. At the same time easy access to the cabi- eration.
net interior is obtained. Pos. 4 Red lamp indicating warning or
When UNISAB II is open, it is still fully opera- alarm.
tional. Slow flashes = warning;
Quick flashes = alarm.
Display Pos. 5 A Compressor start at manual

operation by pressing the key once.
Pos. 1 Has a constant background illumina-
Works only if yellow lamp pos. 3 is lit.
tion and displays 4 lines each with 20
characters. The contrast has been Pos. 6 B Compressor stop at manual oper-
factory set, but can be adjusted if re- ation by pressing the key once.
quired. See subsection Contrast Works only if yellow lamp pos. 3 is lit.
(display) in section Languages. Pos. 7 C A change between manual
Pressure levels, temperatures, set (yellow lamp on) and automatic
points as well as warning and alarm (yellow lamp off) takes place by
limits can be read in the display. pressing the key once.
Please note that if manual was se-
lected from the CONTROL menu, it
14/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
is not possible to change to automat- As to the encoding of a password,

ic. See section Control Mode. see section Changing Set Values.
Pos. 8 D Key used to acknowledge alarms. Pos. 12 H Used for moving left in the menu
Pos. 9 E Loading of capacity during manual system. Used for selecting pictures
operation. On screw compressors or a digit when changing a value.
the slide moves towards higher ca- Pos. 13 I Used for moving right in the menu
pacity as long as the key is held system. Used for selecting pictures
down. On reciprocating compressors or a digit when changing a value.
a new capacity stage is loaded every Pos. 14 J Used for moving upwards in a pic-
time the key is pressed. ture in order to point at a certain val-
Pos. 10 F Unloading of capacity during man- ue, or when changing to a higher val-
ual operation. On screw compres- ue.
sors the slide moves towards lower Pos. 15 K Used for moving downwards in a
capacity as long as the key is held picture in order to point at a certain
down. On reciprocating compressors value, or when changing to a lower
one capacity stage is unloaded every value.
time the key is pressed.
Recording section Menu structure
Pos. 11 The G key has several functions.
UNISAB II includes a number of different pictures
When pressing the G key, a change on compressor operation, set values, configu-
will be made between Bar (PSI) and ration, etc. These pictures are built up in a menu
°C/R (°F/R) for saturated vapours system in which a certain picture can be selected
when the display shows a suction or by means of the arrow keys.
discharge pressure. Fig. 1.5 to Fig. 1.7 show the structure and the
Changing the set values can only be number of pictures in the menu systems for:
carried out by using the password - Screw compressors
shown on page 1 in the engineering - Single-stage reciprocating compressors
- Two-stage reciprocating compressors.
manual for the UNISAB II in ques-
tion.
0178-511 - ENG 15/230

Rev. 2005.03
Fig. 1.5
UNISAB II I PARAMETER SETTING
- Ver. 2.02/2.03/2.04 HIGH ALARM
HIGH WARN.
°C/R
°C/R
Menu Tree Suction LOW WARN. °C/R
SUCT.PRES. °C/R LOW ALARM °C/R
Screw Compressor SUCT.TEMP. °C ACTUAL SP. °C/R
SUCT.SUPERH. °C SETPOINT 1 °C/R
RUNNING 100% SETPOINT 2 °C/R
NEUTRALZONE °C/R
PROP.BAND °C/R
T.INT. SEC
T.DIFF. SEC
Discharge P.PART %
I.PART %
DISCH.PRES. °C/R D.PART %
DISCH.TEMP.DI °C REG.OUTPUT %
SCH.SUPERH. °C
RUNNING 100%
Oil
Multisab state
OIL PRES. BAR
DIFF.PRES. BAR START NO.
OIL TEMP. °C SYSTEM NO.
RUNNING 100% SYS.CONTROLLER
Motor
MOTOR CURR 0A All compressors
MOTOR POWER 0 kW
MOTOR FREQ 0 RPM COMPR. # 01 MANUAL
Main picture Main menu READY 0% SYSTEM # 01
START # 01 J
RUNNING 100%
SUCT.PRES. °C/R SUCTION BRINE
DISCH.PRES. °C/R DISCHARGE ALARM Brine
MOTOR CURR A OIL WARNING
RUNNING 100% MOTOR SETUP BRINE TEMP. °C
Timers
SUCT.BRINE °C/R START START SEC
EXT.INPUT STOP START SEC
RUNNING 100% START DELAY SEC
STOP DELAY SEC
Alarms Control
NO ALARMS Service-timers
COMPRESSOR CTRL.
ON TIME HOUR
SINCE START
MANUAL
Warnings Multisab Date-time

NO WARNINGS MULTISAB HOUR
MIN
K
MULTISAB STATE SEC
ALL COMPRESSORS DAY
PARALLEL CONTR.
Dig. input
Setup Timers D.INPUT
D.INPUT
CONTROL CALIBRATE TIMERS D.INPUT
MULTISAB CAPACITY TIMERS D.INPUT
TIMERS CONFIG TIMER SETUP
DIAGNOSIS LANGUAGE SERVICE TIMERS Dig. output
D.OUTPUT
D.OUTPUT
Capacity Diagnosis D.OUTPUT
CAPACITY 0% DIAGNOSIS D.OUTPUT
CAP POS 0% INSPECT OLD ALARMS Analog. input
VI POSITION 0% MISC.FUNCTIONS
READY 0% PRES. INP 1
SOFTWARE VERSION
PT 100 INP 1
Calibrate EXT.
CALIBRATE
PRESS TRANSDUCER 4-20 MA input
BRINE TEMP. 4 MA
CAPACITY 20 MA
CAPACITY SETPOINT
Config.
CONFIG Auxiliary output
CONTROL
COMPRESSOR AUXILIARY OUTPUT
OIL SYSTEM ACTIVE WHEN
AT MAX.CAP
Language
CONTRAST
LANGUSGE GB
H
16/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
Fig. 1.6
I PARAMETER SETTING
Suction HIGH ALARM °C/R
HIGH WARN. °C/R
SUCT.PRES. °C/R LOW WARN. °C/R
SUCT. TEMP. °C LOW ALARM °C/R
SUCT.SUPERH. °C ACTUAL SP. °C/R
RUNNING 100%
UNISAB II - Ver. 2.02/2.03/2.04 SETPOINT 1
SETPOINT 2
°C/R
°C/R
NEUTRALZONE °C/R
Menu Tree PROP.BANDD °C/R
Single-stage Discharge
Reciprocating Compressor DISCH.PRES. °C/R
°C
DISCH. TEMP.
DISC.SUPERH. °C
RUNNING 100% Multisab state
START NO.
SYSTEM NO.
Oil SYS. CONTROLLER
SUCT.PRES. BAR
OIL PRES. BAR
OIL TEMP. °C All compressors
RUNNING 100%
COMPR. # 01 MANUAL
Motor SYSTEM # 01
MOTOR CURR 0A START # 01
MOTOR POWER 0 kW RUNNING 100%
MOTOR FREQ 0 RPM
Main picture Main menu

READY 0%
Timers J
SUCT.PRES. °C/R SUCTION BRINE START START SEC
DISCH.PRES. °C/R DISCHARGE ALARM STOP START SEC
Brine START DELAY SEC
MOTOR CURR A OIL WARNING
RUNNING 100% MOTOR SETUP STOP DELAY SEC
BRINE TEMP. °C
SUCT.PRES. °C/R
EXT.INPUT Service timers
RUNNING 100%
ON TIME HOUR
SINCE START
Alarms Control
COMPRESSOR CTRL.
NO ALARMS
Datetime
HOUR
MANUAL MIN
SEC
DAY
Warnings Multisab K
MULTISAB
NO WARNINGS
Dig. input
MULTISAB STATE
ALL COMPRESSORS D. INPUT
PARALLEL CONTR. D. INPUT
D. INPUT
D. INPUT
Setup Timers
CONTROL CALIBRATE TIMERS Dig. output
MULTISAB CAPACITY TIMERS
TIMER SETUP D. OUTPUT
TIMERS CONFIG D. OUTPUT
DIAGNOSIS LANGUAGE SERVICE TIMERS
D. OUTPUT
D. OUTPUT
Capacity Analog input
Diagnosis
CAPACITY 0%
NOT USED 0% DIAGNOSIS PRES. INP 1
NOT USED 0% PT 100 INP 1
INSPECT OLD ALARMS
READY 0% MISC. FUNCTIONS EXT.
SOFTWARE VERSION
4-20 MA input
Calibrate 4 MA
CALIBRATE 20 MA
PRESS TRANSDUCER CAPACITY SETPOINT
BRINE TEMP.
CAPACITY
Auxiliary output
Config. AUXILIARY OUTPUT
ACTIVATE WHEN
CONFIG. AT MAX.CAP
CONTROL
COMPRESSOR
OIL SYSTEM
Language
CONTRAST
H LANGUAGE GB
0178-511 - ENG 17/230

Rev. 2005.03
Fig. 1.7
I PARAMETER SETTING
Suction
-
UNISAB II Ver. 2.02/2.03/2.04 SUCT.PRES.
SUCT.TEMP.
°C/R
°C
HIGH ALARM
HIGH WARN.
°C/R
°C/R
LOW WARN. °C/R
Menu Tree SUCT.SUPERH. °C LOW ALARM °C/R
RUNNING 100% ACTUAL SP.
Two-stage reciprocating SETPOINT 1
°C/R
°C/R
compressor SETPOINT 2
NEUTRALZONE
°C/R
°C/R
Discharge PROP.BAND °C/R
DISCH.PRES. °C/R
DISCH.TEMP. °C
DISCH.SUPERH. °C
RUNNING 100%
Multisab state
Oil
START NO.
SUCT.PRES. BAR SYSTEM NO.
OIL PRES. BAR SYS. CONTROLLER
OIL TEMP. °C
RUNNING 100%
J
Motor All compressors
MOTOR CURR 0A COMPR. # 01 MANUAL
MOTOR POWER 0 kW SYSTEM # 01
MOTOR FREQ 0 RPM START # 01
READY 0% RUNNING 100%
Main picture Main menu
SUCH.PRES. °C/R SUCTION INTERMED Timers
DISCH.PRES. °C/R DISCHARGE ALARM Intermed.
MOTOR CURR A OIL WARNING START START SEC
RUNNING 100% MOTOR SETUP INTERM.PRES. °C/R STOP START SEC
INTERM.TEMP. °C/R START DELAY SEC
EXT.INPUT STOP DELAY SEC
RUNNING 100%
Service timers
Alarms Control ON TIME HOUR
NO ALARMS
COMPR.CTRL MODE
SINCE START
K
MANUAL Date-time
HOUR
MIN
Warnings Multisab SEC
DAY
NO WARNINGS MULTISAB
ALL COMPRESSORS
PARALLEL CONTRS Dig. input
D.INPUT
D.INPUT
Setup Timers D.INPUT
D.INPUT
CONTROL CALIBRATE TIMERS
MULTISAB CAPACITY TIMERS
TIMERS CONFIG. TIMER SETUP Dig. output
DIAGNOSIS LANGUAGE SERVICE TIMERS
D.OUTPUT
D.OUTPUT
D.OUTPUT
Capacity Diagnosis D.OUTPUT
DIAGNOSIS
CAPACITY 0% 4-20 MA input
NOT USED 0% INSPECT OLD ARLAMS
NOT USED 0% MISC. FUNCTIONS PRES. INP 1
READY 0% SOFTWARE VERSION PT 100 INR 1
EXT.
Calibrate
CALIBRATE 4-20 MA input
PRES. TRANSDUCER 4 MA
BRINE TEMP. 20 MA
CAPACITY
SUCT. PRES.
Config. Auxiliary output
CONFIG. AUXILIARY OUTPUT
CONTROL ACTIVATE WHWN
COMPRESSOR AT MAX. CAP
OIL SYSTEM
Language
CONTRAST
H LANGUAGE GB
18/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
In the menu tree the selection of pictures is carried Press I

out by means of the arrow keys in the recording HIGH ALARM XX
panel. HIGH WARNING XX
LOW WARNING XX
The H and I keys make it possible to move to the
LOW ALARM XX
left or the right in the menu tree by pressing the
keys .
The J and K keys make it possible to move up ACTUAL SP XX
and down in the menu picture by moving the dark SETPOINT 1 XX
cursor from line to line. SETPOINT 2 XX

NEUTRAL ZONE XX
PROP. BAND XX
Selecting a picture T.INT. XX
On delivery UNISAB II will display the following T.DIFF. XX

P.PART XX
Main picture when voltage is applied.
I.PART XX
SUCT.PRESS 0.0 BAR D.PART XX
DISCH.PRES 0.0 BAR
REG. OUTPUT XX
MOTOR CURR 0A
BLOCKED 0% Note: The items from NEUTRAL ZONE and
downwards are only shown when the suction
It is always possible to return to this picture by
pressure unit of measure is °C/R. See below for in-
pressing the H key.
formation on how to change the unit.
To see Set point 1 for suction pressure regula-
Press K until the cursor is at the desired line, SET
tor, do as follows:
POINT 1, which is read.
With the Main picture in the display, press I
Press H until the Main picture appears.
SUCTION BRINE
DISCHARGE ALARM To see the set value for the timer START-DELAY,
OIL WARNING do as follows:
MOTOR SETUP
With the main picture in the display, press I
SUCTION BRINE
Press I
DISCHARGE ALARM
SUCT.PRESS XX
OIL WARNING
SUCT.TEMP XX
MOTOR SETUP
SUCH.SUPERH. XX
BLOCKED X Press K until the cursor is at SETUP.
Press I
CONTROL CALIBRATE
MULTISAB CAPACITY
TIMERS CONFIG
DIAGNOSES LANGUAGE
Press K until the cursor is at TIMERS.
0178-511 - ENG 19/230

Rev. 2005.03
Press I POS.NO
TIMERS 30 CAP. NEGATIVE XX
TIMERS 31 START UNLOAD XX
TIMERS SETUP 32 LOW SUCT. PRESS. XX
SERVICE TIMERS 33 LUBR.PRESS. XX

DATE-TIME 34 Vi-PAUSE XX
OIL CHARGING
This example applies to screw compressors.
MOTOR FAN
Press K until the cursor is at the desired timer
P.BAND FACTOR
TRANSFER
START-DELAY.
TAKE-OVER Press H until the Main picture appears.
Press K until the cursor is at TIMERS SETUP.

Display in Bar or °C/R
Press I
Refrigerant pressure levels as eg suction pres-
POS.NO
sure, discharge pressure or intermediate pressure
1 START START XX
can be displayed in either Bar or °C/R. It is possi-
2 STOP START XX
3 START DELAY XX
ble to switch between these two units when the
4 STOP DELAY XX cursor is at the relevant value by briefly pressing
5 SUCTION RAMP XX the G key.
6 SLIDE MAX. XX
To see suction pressure in °C/R, first select the
7 PRELUB XX
picture with SUCT. PRESS. With the cursor on
8 OIL FLOW XX
SUCT. PRESS, briefly press G and the unit dis-
9 FLOW DELAY XX
10 NO OIL FLOW XX
played will change from Bar to °C/R or vice versa.
11 LUBRIC.TIME XX Pressure levels displayed in °C/R are dew point
12 DIF.PRES. OK XX values.
13 OIL PRES LO XX
14 OIL PRES HI XX
15 OIL TEMP. LOW XX
The user's own picture
16 OIL TEMP. HIGH XX As it appears from the menu tree, there is a whole
17 SUPERH. LOW XX
range of operating pictures in UNISAB II. Howev-
18 SUPERH. HIGH XX
er, if no suitable combination of measuring values
19 DISCH. OVERL. XX
20 CURR OVERLD. XX
can be found in the same picture, a new picture
21 MOTOR START XX can be constructed.
22 PMS FEEDBACK XX Thus, it is possible to compose a standard picture
23 FULL FLW M. XX
appearing in the display.
24 OIL PUMP M. XX
25 RECT. START XX If the Main picture is required to include eg OIL
26 RECT DELAY XX PRESS instead of SUCT. PRESS, proceed as fol-
27 RECT DISABL XX lows:
28 START HP XX
29 NO CHILLER XX
20/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
Press H until the Main picture appears. Press I and again I until
SUCT.PRESS 0,0 BAR SUCT.PRESS XX
DISCH.PRES 0,0 BAR SUCT.TEMP XX
MOTOR CURR 0A SUCT.SUPERH XX
BLOCKED 0% BLOCKED X
Press I and next K until the cursor reaches OIL. By a quick pressure on G it is possible to switch
SUCTION BRINE between Bar and °C/R.
DISCHARGE ALARM
Press G , until the cursor covers the entire line.
OIL WARNING
SUCT. PRESS and value are moved to line 3 in
MOTOR SETUP
the main picture and DISCH.PRES in line 1 has
Press I disappeared from the picture:
OIL PRESS XX MOTOR CURR XX
DIFF.PRESS XX OIL PRESS XX
OIL TEMP XX SUCT.PRESS XX
READY X READY X
Press and keep G until the cursor covers the

Changing of set values
whole line. OIL PRESS and value are moved to
line 3 in the main picture and SUCT. PRESS, line The set values in UNISAB II can be changed by
1, has disappeared from the main picture. means of the keys G H I K J
Press H until the Main picture appears.
DISC. PRESS XX Password
MOTOR CURR XX To safeguard against unwanted changes of the
OIL TEMP XX set values, a password must be used before the
READY X
change can take place.
Before changing the main picture, it is recom- When a password has been entered, the system
mended to plan how to compose the picture and will be open for 60 minutes. During this period it is
in which sequence the values should appear. possible to change the system values before it
Please note that the new value is entered into line closes again.
3 and that the value in line 1 disappears. If the system is required to close earlier, press H
If SUCT. PRESS is to appear again in the main until the main picture appears. By pressing H
picture, proceed as follows: once more the system will close.
Press H until the Main picture appears. Passwords are required for changing CONFIG,
DISC. PRESS XX TIMERS, ALARMS, WARNINGS as well as REG-
MOTOR CURR XX ULATING PARAMETERS.
OIL TEMP XX
READY X
0178-511 - ENG 21/230

Rev. 2005.03
Application of password chosen. The password can be set anywhere be-

When the set value to be changed appears in the tween 0001 and 9999.
display and has been marked by the cursor, press
NEW PASSWORD
G for approx. 2 seconds till the following picture
+09999
appears:
RESET PASSWORD
PASSWORD
1 2 3 4
SET TO ACCEPT / QUIT
Important!
Using the H I and K J keys, enter the correct It is essential to remember the changed password
password. as any changes of the set values will require the
application of the personal password. The stand-
Press G and the password will be open for 60
ard password, of which it is possible to be in-
minutes for changing of values.
formed by contacting Sabroe Refrigeration, is no
longer applicable.
Changing of password
On delivery the UNISAB II password is set for a Resetting of password
standard four-figure password. All In case the password has been changed to a per-
Sabroe Refrigeration companies and agents are sonal password and this is no longer known, it is
able to inform of this standard password. possible to get a special password by contacting
It is possible to change this standard password to Sabroe Refrigeration. This password must be
a personal password. used to reset the personal password to
Sabroe Refrigeration's standard password.
Please note that not more than one password can
be used at a time. The password is reset to the standard password in
the menu: SETUP I DIAGNOSIS I NEW PASS-
Change the password in menu:
WORD
SETUP I DIAGNOSIS I NEW
PASSWORD
NEW PASSWORD
NEW PASSWORD RESET PASSWORD

NO
RESET PASSWORD
With the cursor on RESET PASSWORD, press
the G key, then enter the special password. See
With the cursor on NEW PASSWORD, press the
section Application of password.
G key and enter the current password, cf section
Application of password. It is now possible to reset the personal password
to the standard password by changing NO into
It is now possible to enter a personal password by
YES by pressing the G key followed by the H
changing the current (shown) password to the one
key.
22/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
Procedure for changing of set values • Using the arrow keys H I K J, enter the
There are two types of changes: new value, eg - 0.5 BAR.
• Changing of values • Press G - the cursor moves to LOW

(alarms, set points, etc.) ALARM, and enter the new value.
HIGH ALARM XX
• Changing of functions
HIGH WARNING XX
(compressor type, regulators, etc.) LOW WARNING XX
LOW ALARM -0,5 BAR
Changing a value
• It is now possible to change other values
To change the alarm value for
during the 60 minutes the password is open.
LOW SUCTION PRESSURE, do as follows:
• From the main picture, press I until this pic- Changing a function
ture appears:
Example 1
SUCT.PRESS XX
SUCT.TEMP XX
To change the state of operation from AUTO to
SUCT.SUPERH XX REMOTE, proceed as follows:
READY X • From the Main picture, press I once.
• Select Bar or °C/R by a quick pressure on • With the K key, move the cursor to
G. SETUP.
SUCTION
• Press I until the following picture appear:
HIGH ALARM XX
HIGH WARNING XX
SETUP
LOW WARNING XX
LOW ALARM X • Press I once.
ACTUAL SP XX CONTROL
ETC
• With the K key move the cursor to LOW

ALARM.
• Press I once.
• Press G . Enter password if not already
COMPRESSOR CONTROL
open (see section Application of password) AUTO
• The cursor is now moved to the first digit,
eg 0 as shown in the picture. The signs "+"
• Press G and the cursor moves to the next
or "-" may be seen in front of the digit.
line.
HIGH ALARM XX
HIGH WARNING XX
LOW WARNING XX COMPRESSOR CONTROL
LOW ALARM -0,3 BAR AUTO
0178-511 - ENG 23/230

Rev. 2005.03
• Using the K J keys, change between • Press G to confirm. In the same way other
STOPPED-MANUAL-AUTO-REMOTE. functions may be changed by using the cur-
• Press G to confirm. sor to point them out.
Example 2
Factory settings
If required to change the regulating function to
BRINE regulation, do as follows: On delivery UNISAB II is programmed with facto-
• From the Main picture, press I once. ry settings for all values such as: Alarms, Warn-
ings, Timers, Set points. These values are stated
• With K, move the cursor to SETUP.
in tables for reciprocating and screw compressors
• Press I once more respectively.
CONTROL
See tables 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 in section Alarms and
warnings, tables 7 and 8 in section Timers and ta-
CONFIG
bles 9A, 9B and 9C in section Compressor regu-
• With K, move the cursor to CONFIG. lation.
• Press I once more Although other values may have been entered af-
CONFIG
ter delivery, it is always possible to return to the
CONTROL factory settings in the following way:
COMPRESSOR For safety reasons, first make sure the compres-
OIL SYSTEM sor is stopped.
• Press I once more. From the main picture, press I once.

CONTROL ON SUCTION With K, move the cursor to SETUP.
AUTO START YES Press I once to the picture CONTROL.
AUTO STOP YES Press I once more to COMPRESSOR CON-
COLD STORE NO TROL.
Press G to move the cursor to the second line.
• Press G for approx. 2 seconds and enter Press J until STOPPED appears.
the password, if necessary. The cursor Press G to confirm.
moves to the text at the right side of the line.
Carry out factory reset:
CONTROL ON SUCTION Press H to CONTROL and K to CONFIG. and I
to CONTROL. With K move the cursor to FACTO-
RY RESET. Press I to Factory Reset menu.
• With the J K keys, it is now possible to
change between: Press G and the cursor moves to the right. Enter
SUCTION - BRINE - DISCHARGE - HOT password if not open. Select YES by means of J .
WATER - EXT. COOL - EXT. HEAT. Select G to confirm.
Press H and FACTORY RESET is carried out.
UNISAB II is now restored to its Factory setting.
24/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
Languages 2. Press the following keys, one time each, and in

When selecting the menu LANGUAGE, the fol- the following order: I, J, I J and I (see
lowing picture will appear: Fig. 1.5),
CONTRAST 50 3. Keep G pressed for 5 seconds.

LANGUAGE GB
4. Press J and/or K. The contrast of the display
should now change gradually, possibly to the oth-
Contrast (display)
er extreme. However, it should be possible to se-
The contrast setting of the display takes place au-
lect a reasonable value (40 or the like). See also
tomatically, but it is still possible to make a manual
section Procedure for changing of set values.
adjustment.
Languages
The contrast of the display is adjusted in the main
Like any other function setting (see section Proce-
menu or any other menu in the following way:
dure for changing set values), the language can
Press the alarm button and K = darker contrast
be changed to any of the following, even when the
(lower contrast value) or the alarm button and J =
compressor is running:
lighter contrast (higher contrast).
GB = English
The value is changed just like any other parame-
FIN = Finnish
ter and has an adjusting area from 20-80.
F = French
The value 20 gives a dark display. E = Spanish
The value 80 gives a light display. DK = Danish
Changes can be made during compressor opera- D = German
tion. The contrast setting for the best display lies CZ = Czech
usually between 30 and 50. S = Swedish
The contrast can be adjusted from any menu pic- RUS = Russian
ture by using the keys D and J or K. PL = Polish
P = Portuguese
Important!
NL = Dutch
A setting within the minimum (20) or maximum
I = Italian
(80) area may cause a dimming of the display text.
N = Norwegian
However, it is usually still possible to read the text
by means of a heavy illumination and by viewing H = Hungarian
from an angle of approx. 20 degrees. Should this GR = Greek
not be possible - ie the display is impossible to TR = Turkish
read - carry out a "blind operation" as follows:
When UNISAB II is switched on for the first time or
1. Make sure you are in the Main picture, if neces-
when a program RESET has been performed, the
sary by switching the UNISAB II off/on. set language will be English (GB).
0178-511 - ENG 25/230

Rev. 2005.03
26/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
2. Configuration
2. Configuration
UNISAB II can be configured to a number of differ- Changes in the points that will lead to the above
ent functions depending on compressor type, re- situation are marked with ** in the following con-
frigerant, etc. Some of the settings have already figuration table.
been made by the factory, but it will always be The configuration points are common for 1) recip-
necessary to make some final settings before rocating and 2) screw compressors and their use
start-up. is marked in the list.
The immediate configuration can always be The configuration points have been divided into
checked during operation, BUT if one or more sub-menus available from the menu SETUP I
configuration points have to be changed, always CONFIG.
STOP the compressor and activate the emergen-
CONFIG
cy stop while making the changes. CONTROL
COMPRESSOR
After changing the configuration, the first pressure OIL SYSTEM
on H will in some cases display the following pic- ECONOMIZER
MOTOR
ture: MULTISAB
COP
CONFIGURATION COMMUNICATIONS
CHANGED DIG.IN VIA PROFIBUS
RESTARTING MEASURING UNIT
- PLEASE WAIT UNIT/PLANT
FACTORY RESET
Wait a few seconds - the main picture will appear
and UNISAB II will be reconfigured. At this stage In case of a screw compressor, the sub-menus
the picture may be dark as the contrast is being are composed as follows:
adjusted. This is quite normal. RELEASE the
emergency stop.
0178-511 - ENG 27/230

Rev. 2005.03
2. Configuration
SETUP I CONFIG I CONTROL SETUP I CONFIG I MULTISAB

3 CONTROL ON SUCTION 11 PREF. MASTER COMPR#
5 AUTO START YES 15 COMMON EVAP/COND N/N
6 AUTO STOP YES 16 HP ON TWO STAGE NO
21 COLD STORE NO 31 TAKE OVER NO
22 CLIMA COMP NO
55 PID YES/NO
SETUP I CONFIG I COP
30 COP ACTIVE NO
SETUP I CONFIG I COMPRESSOR 36 FLOW FACTOR .20 l/pls
1 TYPE SMC106E 37 LIQ. SUBCOOL 3.0 C
20 SWEPT VOLUM 400m3/h
9 BOOSTER NO
4 VOLUME RATIO MAN
SETUP I CONFIG I
12 ECONOMIZER NO
27 MECH. ZERO NO
COMMUNICATIONS
28 MANUAL ZERO 0.0% 38 DANBUSS YES
34 VI MODE 70.0% 10 COMPR. NO 1
23 ADD. UNLOAD NO 24 BAUD RATE 19200

29 PORT 1 EVOL. FX2N
39 NODE NO 0
SETUP I CONFIG I OIL SYSTEM 40 BAUD RATE 9600
7 PRELUBRICATION NO 41 PORT 2 QUANTUM
8 FULL FLOW PUMP NO 42 NODE NO 77
18 OIL COOLING NONE 43 BAUD RATE 1200
17 WATER COOLED NO 50 PROFIBUS YES
25 OIL RECTIFIER NO 51 NODE NO 3
52 BAUD RATE 12M
SETUP I CONFIG I ECONOMIZER 57 GSD FILE NO. 08AA
13 ECO. LO. CAP 0.0%

14 ECO. HI. SUCT. TEMP 0.0 C/R SETUPI CONFIG I DIG. IN VIA
PROFIBUS
58 DIG. INPUT 1 NO
59 DIG. INPUT 2 NO
SETUP I CONFIG I MOTOR 60 DIG. INPUT 3 NO

61 DIG. INPUT 4 NO
19 RANGE MOTOR CUR. 1200 A
62 DIG. INPUT 5 NO
47 RANGE MOTOR kW 1000 kW
63 DIG. INPUT 6 NO
35 MOTOR SIZE 500 kW
64 DIG. INPUT 7 NO
46 ROTATUNE YES
65 DIG. INPUT 8 NO
48 MIN FREQ 1000 RPM
66 DIG. INPUT 9 NO
49 MAX FREQ 6000 RPM
67 DIG. INPUT 10 NO
68 DIG. INPUT 11 NO
28/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
2. Configuration
SETUP I CONFIG I MEASURING • Select the picture SETUP, move the cursor
UNIT to CONFIG. and press I once.
26 PRESS/TEMP BAR/C • Move the cursor with K and J to the rele-
45 PRESS -1/9-1/25 vant sub-menu and press I.
44 MOTOR SIGNAL kW
53 MOTOR INPUT 4-20 mA
• Move the cursor with K to the function that
54 CAP/FREQ CAP.POS is going to be changed.
56 LOW SUCTION PRESS. YES/NO • Press G and enter password if not already
open.
SETUP I CONFIG I UNIT/PLANT • Use the H I and J K keys to enter the
2 REFRIGERANT R22 new configuration.
32 CHILLER NO
• Press G to confirm.
• With J or K move the cursor to the next
value to be changed.
SETUP I CONFIG I FACTORY RESET • When finished changing the values, use H
33 FACTORY RESET NO to quit the sub-menu and thereby to activate
the possible changes, which will make
UNISAB II restart.
The following table gives a description of each
Carry out configuration as follows: configuration point as well as possible choices
with reference to the position numbers in the pre-
vious pictures.
0178-511 - ENG 29/230

Rev. 2005.03
2. Configuration
CONFIGURATION
No. Function for Possible choices
*1* TYPE 1) Reciprocating and 2) Screw
*2* REFRIGERANT 1)2) R717; R22; R502; R23; R404a;

R134A; R507; R410A; R407C; R744; R1270, R290, R000
3 CONTROL ON 1)2) Suction; Brine; Discharge;

Hot water; Ext.cool; Ext.heat.
4 VOLUME RATIO 2) Man; Auto
5 AUTO START 1)2) Yes; No
6 AUTO STOP 1)2) Yes; No
7 PRELUB. 2) Yes; No
8 FULL FLOW PUMP 2) Yes; No
9 BOOSTER 2) Yes; No
*10* COMPR.NO. 1)2) 1 to 14
11 PREF. MASTER 1)2) Compressor; Start
12 ECONOMIZER 2) Yes; No
13 ECO LO CAP 2) 0% to 100%
14 ECO HI SUCT 2) -100°C/R to 100 °C/R
15 COMM. EVAP/CONDENS 1)2) N/N; N/Y; Y/N; Y/Y
16 HP ON TWO STAGE 1)2) Yes; No
17 WATER COOLED 1) Yes; No
18 OIL COOLING 1)2) No; Normal; HLI/BLI; Thermo pump;

3-way valve; AKV
19 RANGE M.CURR 1)2) 0 Amp to 2500 Amp
20 SWEPT VOLUME 1)2) 0 m3/h to 12000 m3/h
21 COLD STORE 1)2) Yes; No
22 CLIMA CONTROL 1) Yes; No
23 UNLOADING 1) Normal; total; additional steps
*24* BAUD RATE 1)2) 1200 Baud to 19200 Baud
25 OIL RECTIFIER 2) Yes; No
*26* PRESS/TEMP 1)2) BAR / °C; PSI / ° F; KPA /°C
27 MECHANICAL ZERO 2) Yes; No
28 MANUAL ZERO 2) 0% to 40%
*29* PORT 1 1) 2) NONE; EVOLUTION A1S; EVOLUTION FX2N
30 COP ACTIVE 1) 2) Yes; No
30/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
2. Configuration
CONFIGURATION
No. Function for Possible choices
31 TAKE OVER 1) Yes; No
32 CHILLER 1) 2) Yes; No
*33* FACTORY RESET 1)2) Yes; No
34 VI MODE 2) 70% to 97%
35 MOTOR SIZE 1)2) 0 to 2500 kW
36 FLOW FACTOR 1)2) 0.01 to 10 litres per pulse
37 LIQ. SUBCOOL 1)2) 0° C to 99.9° C
38 DANBUSS 1)2) Yes (not changeable)
39 NODE NO (Port 1) 1)2) 0 (not changeable)
40 BAUD RATE (Port 1) 1)2) 1200 baud to 38400 baud
41 PORT 2 1)2) NONE or QUANTUM
42 NODE NO (Port 2) 1)2) 1 to 99
43 BAUD RATE (Port 2) 1)2) 1200 (not changeable)
44 MOTOR SIGNAL 1)2) kW or Amp
45 PRESSURE 1)2) -1/9 - -1/25; -1/25 - -1/59
46 ROTATUNE 1)2) Yes; No
47 RANGE MOTOR (kW) POWER 0-2500 kW
48 MINIMUM FREQUENCY 700 to 2000 revolutions
49 MAXIMUM FREQUENCY 1100 to 12000 revolutions
50 PROFIBUS Yes; No
51 NODE NO 1 to 254
52 BAUD RATE 12 mbit (not changeable)
53 MOTOR INPUT 0-1 amp / 4-20 mA
54 CAP/FREQ Cap. pos./Freq.
55 PID Yes; No
56 LOW SUCTION PRESS. Yes; No
57 GSD FILE NO. 08AA
58-68 DIG. INPUT 1-11 Yes; No
0178-511 - ENG 31/230

Rev. 2005.03
2. Configuration
Pos. 1: TYPE VMY 447 M

NOT-DEF SAB 202 S
SMC 104 S/L SAB 202 L
SMC 104 E SAB 128H MK3
SMC 106 S/L SAB 163H MK3
SMC 106 E SAB 330S
SMC 186 SAB 330 L
SMC 108 S/L SAB 330E
SMC 108 E SAB 80
SMC 188 FV 17/19
SMC 112 S/L *SV 17/19
SMC 112 E FV 24/26
SMC 116 S/L SV 24/26
SMC 116 E S 50
CMO 24 S 70
CMO 26 S 93
CMO 28 SAB 128 HR
TSMC 108 S/L SAB 163 HR
TSMC 108 E GST 13 - 16 - 20
TSMC 188 GST 25 - 31 - 41
TSMC 116 S/L GSV 50 L
TSMC 116 E GSV 64 L
TCMO 28 GSV 84 L
TCMO 28 NEW GSV 111 L
HPC 104 S GSV 147 L
HPC 106 S GSV 185 L
HPC 108 S GSV 224 L
HPO 24 RWF 270 L
HPO 26 GSV 263 L
HPO 28 GSV 331 L
SAB 110 S GSV 339 L
SAB 110 L RWF 480 L
SAB 128HMK1 GSV 412 L → 0153 L
SAB 128HMK2 GSV 412 L → 0154 L
SAB 163HMK1 GSV 562 L → 0222 K
SAB 163BMK1 GSV 562 L 0222 K →
SAB 163HMK2 GSV 715 L → 0109 XL
VMY MK2 GSV 715 L 0110 XL →
VMY 347 H GSV 900 L
VMY 347 M GSV 50 H
VMY 447 H GSV 64 H
32/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
2. Configuration
GSV 84 H R407C
GSV 111 H R744
GSV 147 H R 1270
GSV 185 H R 290
GSV 224 H R000
RWF 270 H For R407C (and all other refrigerants) the convert-
GSV 263 H ed pressure is always shown as dew point values.
GSV 331 H
GSV 339 H Before the user-defined refrigerant R000 is cho-
RWF 480 H sen, the refrigerant curve must be entered in pic-
GSV 412 H → 0153 L ture SETUP I CALIBRATION I DEF. REFRIG-
GSV 412 H → 0154 L ERANT R000. See also section Compressor con-
GSV 562 H → 0222 K trol and surveillance, Define refrigerant R000.
GSV 562 H 0222 K → Pos. 3: CONTROL ON:
GSV 715 H → 0109 XL SUCTION
GSV 715 H 0110 XL → BRINE
GSV 900 H DISCHARGE
GSB 84 - GSB 465 HOT WATER
SAB 283 L EXT. COOL
SAB 283 E EXT. HEAT
SAB 355 L
SUCTION: Pressure is measured by the built-in
SAB 110 SR/LR
pressure transducer on the compres-
Note: Please note that the screw compressors sor suction side.
SV 17/19 and GSB 84 - GSB 465 are not yet sup- Set point is set in the picture
ported. SUCT.PRESS I PARAMETER.
Note: Choose GVS/RWF L for compressors with BRINE: Temperature is measured by an ex-
“low volume range” (1.7 - 3.0) and GSV/RWF H tra Pt 100 sensor in the water output
for compressors with “high volume range” (2.2 - of the evaporator.
5.0). See compressor name plate for indication of Set point is set in the picture BRINE
volume range. TEMP. I PARAMETER.
Pos. 2: REFRIGERANT DISCHARGE:
NOT-DEF. Pressure is measured by the built-in
R717 pressure transducer on the compres-
R22 sor discharge side.
R502 Set point is set in the picture
R23 DISCH.PRES I PARAMETER.
R404A HOT WATER:
R134A Temperature is measured by an ex-
R507 tra Pt 100 sensor in the water output
R410A of the condenser. Set point is set in
0178-511 - ENG 33/230

Rev. 2005.03
2. Configuration
the picture BRINE I BRINE TEMP. Pos. 5: AUTO START

I PARAMETERS. NO
EXT.COOL: At this stage it is possible to connect YES
an external 4-20 mA transducer as If YES is selected, compressor will start by itself in
cooling function, ie at a rising signal AUTO/REMOTE depending on what is required.
the compressor will load capacity. Regulation is now automatic.
Furthermore, select EXTERNAL IN-
If NO is selected, start compressor manually
PUT SIGNAL in picture SETUP I
even though in AUTO/REMOTE. However, dur-
CALIB I 4-20 mA input. The points
ing operation compressor regulates automatically.
4 mA as well as 20 mA must be set
as the max (20 mA) and min (4 mA) Pos. 6 :AUTO STOP
values of the sensor. NO
YES
Select BRINE I EXT. INPUT I PA-
RAMETER and enter regulator set If YES is selected, compressor will stop automati-
point, neutral zone and prop.band. cally at minimum capacity by decreasing demand.
See also section Regulators. If NO is selected, compressor must be stopped

manually even if AUTO or REMOTE has been se-
EXT.HEAT: At this stage it is possible to connect
lected in COMPRESSOR CTRL. MODE.
an external 4-20 mA transducer as
heating function, ie at a falling signal Pos. 7: PRELUBRICATION (screw compr.)
the compressor will load capacity. NO
YES
Select EXTERNAL INPUT SIGNAL
in picture SETUP I CALIB I 4-20 a. Select YES for SAB Mk1, SAB Mk3,
mA input. The points 4 mA as well as SAB 202, SAB 250, SAB 330, SAB HR, VMY
20 mA must be set as the max (20 Mk3, VMY Mk2, FV 19, SV 24/26 and FV
mA) and min (4 mA) values of the 24/26.
sensor. Prelubrication time is set in picture TIMERS
I TIMER SETUP.
Select BRINE I EXT. INPUT I PA-
RAMETER and enter regulator set b. Select NO for all other screw compressors.
point, neutral zone and prop.band. When the compressor has received starting sig-
See also section Regulators nal, prelubrication will start. When prelubrication
Pos. 4: VOLUME RATIO (screw compr.) is completed, the compressor will start. See also
section Timer Setup, which includes time settings.
MANUAL/AUTO
If AUTO is selected, compressor must be fitted Pos. 8: FULL FLOW PUMP (screw compr.)
with solenoid valves, etc for automatic regulation NO
of Vi slide. YES
Select YES for VMY Mk3 compressor provided it
is fitted with FULL FLOW PUMP.
Select NO for all other compressor types.
34/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
2. Configuration
Use pump for prelubrication before start-up and to regulator in a MULTISAB system, independent of
maintain minimum oil pressure during operation. the starting sequence.
At the same time remember to set set points 1 and START#: If START# is selected, the compressor
2, which determine at which pressure levels the which has the lowest starting number and which is
pump is going to start and stop. Select picture OIL in REMOTE (MULTISAB) will be the regulator.
PRESS I PARAMETER.
Pos. 12: ECONOMIZER (screw compr.)
NO
XX YES
LOW WARNING XX
If the compressor is connected to an economizer,
SET POINT 1 XX
this function must be selected. Thus the econo-
SET POINT 1 XX
mizer is connected/disconnected according to the
SET POINT 1 is the pressure at which the pump compressor operation. The connection is impor-
will start; SELECT 5.5 Bar. tant as regards the regulation of the compressor
SET POINT 2 is the pressure at which the pump volume ratio.
will stop; SELECT 7.0 Bar. Pos. 13: ECO LO CAP (screw compr.)
For more details, see Compressor control and
0 to 100%
surveillance.
If the immediate slide position is higher than the
Pos. 9: BOOSTER (screw compr.) set value, connect the economizer. If the slide po-
NO sition is 20% below this value, disconnect the
YES economizer again.
YES means that the oil pump will run continuously Pos. 14: ECO HI SUCT (screw compr.)
during compressor operation. The capacity slide -100 to +100°C/R
can thus be moved at low pressure conditions.
With ECO operation it is possible to enter a suc-
Note: Both SAB Mk3, SAB HR, SAB 202, VMY
tion pressure value in °C/R. If the suction pressure
Mk3, SV/FV and GSV/SGC compressors are fit-
of the economizer is above this value, the sole-
ted with differential pressure controlled oil pumps noid valves connected in the economizer system
(see table 1) and consequently do not use this
will be closed. Hysteresis of 2°C/R.
configuration point.
By a combined ECO and HLI operation the set
Pos.10: COMPR. NO. 1 to 14 value must not be above -20°C/R.
This no must be entered into UNISAB II. The com-
Pos. 15: COMMON EVAP/COND
pressor has now been "named".
Two compressors must under no circum- N/N
stances have the same number. N/Y
Y/N
Pos. 11: PREF. MASTER Y/Y
START#
This point can be configured to the following four
COMPR#
values:
COMPR#: If COMPR# is selected, the compres-
sor with the lowest no (pos 10) will always be the
0178-511 - ENG 35/230

Rev. 2005.03
2. Configuration
N/N - separate evaporator and condenser for Pos. 17: WATER COOLED (recip.compr.)
each compressor. NO
N/Y - separate evaporator for each compressor, YES
but common condenser.
Water cooling output is activated by a rising dis-
Y/N - common evaporator, but separate condens-
charge pipe temperature. The set point for this
er for each compressor.
value is set in picture DISCH. TEMP I PARAM-
Y/Y - common evaporator and condenser for each
ETER, SET POINT 1. The set point has fixed hys-
plant (ie compressors with a MULTISAB system
teresis of 5K.
no).
Ex.: Sp 1 = 100°C:
On plants with a common evaporator the suction
Cooling starts at 100°C and stops at (100-5) =
pressure limiter cannot start the next compressor
95°C.
in the sequence. This is only possible if a separate
evaporator has been configured. Water cooling output is closed at compressor stop
according to adjustable time delay. In picture TIM-
On plants with a common condenser the dis-
ERS I TIMER SETUP adjust time delay OIL
charge limiter cannot start the next compressor in
COOL ON.
the sequence. This is only possible on plants with
separate condensers. Intermediate pressure liquid injection (two-
stage reciprocating compressors)
Pos. 16: HP ON TWO STAGE
The intermediate pressure liquid injection for
NO TSMC/TCMO compressors is active whenever
YES the compressor is configured to TCMO or TSMC.
Usually NO is chosen The solenoid valve for intermediate pressure liq-
In special cases on a two-stage plant YES can be uid injection is activated when the compressor has
selected for HP compressors. The compressors started and the discharge pipe temperature gets
can thus be forced to start by means of the input too high.
"External starting permission". The set point for this value is entered in picture:
Please note that the compressor does not stop DISCH.TEMP I PARAMETER, SET POINT 2.
before the starting permission has been removed The set point has fixed hysteresis of 5°K.
even though there is no cooling requirement. See Ex.: Sp2 = 90°C. Cooling starts at 90°C and stops
detailed description in section Compressor control at (90-5) = 85°C.
and surveillance, HP on TWO-STAGE
Adjusting range: -20°C-+150°C.
Factory value: 100°C.
The regulator controls the solenoid valve through
the liquid injection digital output.
36/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
2. Configuration
Pos. 18: Oil cooling - setting

No. Type of regulator Minimum Maximum Factory Unit
setting
RECIPROCATING COMPRESSORS
2 Set point 1/oil temp. +35 +75 +55 °C

Difference 5 (fixed) °C
Oil cooling
Set point 2/oil temp. 0 +75 +35 °C

Oil heating
Set point 1/disch.pipe -20 +150 +100 °C

temp. Difference 5 (fixed) °C
Water cooling
Set point 2/disch.pipe -20 +150 +100 °C

temp. Difference 5 (fixed)
Interm.pressure
liquid injection
SCREW COMPRESSORS
2 Set point 1/oiltemp. +35 +75 +50 °C

Oil cooling,
normal
3 Set point 1/disch. pipe -20 +150 +40 °C

temp. Difference 2 (fixed) °C
HLI/BLI cooling
5 Set point 1/oil temp. +35 +75 +50 °C

Neutral zone 0 100 4 °C
Prop.band 0 100 5 °C
Oil cooling
Three-way valve
6 Set point 1/pressure pipe -20 +150 40 °C

temp.
Neutral zone 0 10 0 °C
Prop. Band 1 100 10 °C
AKV (HLI) oil cooling
0178-511 - ENG 37/230

Rev. 2005.03
2. Configuration
Pos. 18: OIL COOLING 5) THREE-WAY

1) NONE Used for controlling three-way motor valve
for oil cooling, which is regulated according
2) NORMAL (Screw and recip. compr.)
to oil temperature. The set point for this
3) HLI/BLI (Screw compressors) value is set in picture OIL TEMP I PARAM-
4) TH.PUMP (Thermo pump, reciprocating ETER. SET POINT, NEUTRAL ZONE and
compr.) PROPORTIONAL BAND can now be set.
This regulator is usually not used. However,
5) THREE-WAY (Screw compressor)
it can be used provided that a valve with mo-
6) AKV (Screw compressor) tor drive is fitted.
1) NONE 6) AKV
Oil cooling disconnected. Direct regulation of HLI cooling by pulse
2) NORMAL with modulated AKV valve and solenoid
Oil cooling output is activated by rising oil valve. The solenoid valve is activated when
temperature. oil cooling is required and it remains active
The set point for this value is set in picture until the compressor stops. Within a period
OIL TEMP I PARAMETER I SETPOINT of 6 seconds, the AKV valve modulates ac-
1. The set point has fixed hysteresis of 5K. cording to the regulator output signal.
Ex.: Set point 1 = 40°C: The HLI-AKV cooling outlet is activated by
Cooling starts at 40°C and stops at (40-5) = 35°C. rising discharge pipe temperature.
Oil cooling output is closed at compressor stop ac- The set point for discharge pipe temperature is
cording to adjustable time delay. In picture TIM- adjusted in the parameter picture DISCH.TEMP
ERS I TIMER SETUP adjust time delay OIL I PARAMETER, SET POINT 1.
COOL ON. In the same picture NEUTRAL ZONE and PRO-
3) HLI/BLI PORTIONAL BAND can be adjusted.
Oil cooling output is activated by rising dis- Example:
charge temperature. Set point 1= 60°C
The set point for this value is set in picture Neutral Zone= 4°C
DISCH.TEMP I PARAMETER, SET Proportional Band= 5°C
POINT 1. The set point has a fixed hystere-
The regulator keeps the discharge pipe tempera-
sis of 2K.
ture between 58°C and 62°C.
Ex.: Set point 1 = 40°C:
Cooling starts at 40°C and stops at (40-2) = 38°C. Pos.19: RANGE M. CURR 0 to 2500A
This value can be read on the current transformer
4) TH.PUMP
at the compressor motor guard (not on the com-
Output for activating thermo pump takes
pressor motor) so that the 0-1 Amp. signal is read
place at compressor start-up. No regulation
correctly on UNISAB II as the current absorbed by
is connected to this function.
the motor.
38/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
2. Configuration
Enter current in picture MOTOR I MOTOR An extra 4 - 20 mA temperature transducer must

CURR I PARAMETER. Any indication errors can be connected.
be eliminated from the reading on the display by For detailed description see section Climatic con-
multiplying the measuring range with a correcting trol.
factor:
Pos. 23: UNLOADING (reciprocating compr.)
Measured current NORMAL
Correction =
Display reading TOTAL
ADDITIONAL STEPS
before entering the current in the UNISAB II dis-
Select TOTAL for SMC compressors mounted
play.
with an extra solenoid valve for total unloading.
See also pos. 53.
Select ADDITIONAL STEPS for SMC/HPC and
Pos. 20: SWEPT VOLUME CMO/HPO compressors mounted with extra sole-
0 to 12000 m3/h noid valve for additional steps. SMC 112 and 116
The compressor swept volume must be entered in have two solenoid valves, one is mounted on dig-
plants which only consist of: ital output no. 1 (similar to other compressors with
ADDITIONAL STEPS) and the other (valve B) is
• Screw compressors
mounted on digital output no. 18.
• Screw and reciprocating compressors in the
Select NORMAL for other reciprocating compres-
same system.
sors and always for TCMO and TSMC.
On plants consisting solely of reciprocating com-
When selecting TOTAL the compressor still acti-
pressors the above is not relevant.
vates the first capacity steps during start up but
Read the swept volume on the compressor name during operation (MAN/AUTO/REMOTE) it can
plate. run down to 0% capacity. In order to avoid too
Pos. 21: COLD STORE high oil temperature in this operating mode there
is a 300 second time limit and when this expires
NO
the compressor stops.
YES
If this function is chosen, it will affect the way the Pos. 24: BAUD RATE
MULTISAB system starts and regulates the com- 1200
pressors in a common system. See detailed de- 2400
scription under the function Cold store. 4800
9600
Pos. 22: CLIMATE CONTROL 19200
NO
In this position the speed at which several
YES
UNISAB II units communicate with each other can
If the compressor is used for water/brine cooling be set.
or for heating water, the flow temperature can be
The new UNISAB II allows a communication
raised or lowered, depending on the outside tem-
speed of up to 19,200 baud.
perature.
0178-511 - ENG 39/230

Rev. 2005.03
2. Configuration
This only applies to UNISAB II versions manufac- Pos. 28: MANUAL ZERO
tured from May 1998 supplied with revision G re- 0 to 40%
lay prints (relay no 7 will in such cases be mount-
For screw compressors without automatic zero
ed in the socket).
point setting, it is possible manually to set a "zero
For older UNISAB II units, the maximum is 9600 point" below which the compressor capacity slide
baud. is not allowed to fall while the compressor is oper-
Usually always select the highest baud rate that ating.
all units on the network can use. In case the compressor has a built-in spacer
If UNISAB II is connected with UNISAB I and/or block as well as automatic Vi regulation, MAN-
PROSAB II, adjust speed to 1200 baud. UAL ZERO is used for reducing the travel of the
capacity slide by the entered percentage. Thus
Pos. 25: OIL RECTIFIER corrected capacity is calculated and shown cor-
NO rectly.
YES
The value [0-40%] to be entered in MANUAL
The oil rectifying function is used on brine plants ZERO must be of the following size:
in marine execution. In case this function is select-
ed, check also the timers Oil Rectifying Start, Oil Length of spacer block 4 x 100
Manual zero [%]
Max. movement of capacity slide 2
Rectifying Delay and Oil Rectifying Blocked.
Pos. 26: PRESS/TEMP
See the following table.
BAR/°C
PSI/°F For SAB 202, which has automatic zero point set-
KPA/°C ting, the value 0% must be kept in FACT. setting.
Pressure levels and temperatures can be dis- See also pos. 27 MECHANICAL ZERO.
played in either SI units: Bar, kPa and °C or US Pos. 29: PORT 1
units: PSI and °F. Note that the use of PORT 1 requires UNISAB II
Pos. 27: MECHANICAL ZERO to be fitted with the add-on printed circuit board
NO UNICOM IF.
YES NONE
Only in case the compressor has a built-in spacer EVOLUTION A1S
block as well as automatic Vi regulation, ME- EVOLUTION FX2N
CHANICAL ZERO must be set for YES. In this Select EVOLUTION A1S or EVOLUTION FX2N if
way the travel of the capacity slide is automatically UNISAB II is to be used as an EVOLUTION con-
reduced by the percentage (0-40%) entered in trol, ie an extended (PLCY) control in which
MANUAL ZERO. Thus corrected capacity is cal- UNISAB II is integrated with a PLC control.
culated and shown correctly - see the following ta-
Select NONE if UNISAB II is to be used as an EV-
ble.
OLUTION control.
40/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
2. Configuration
Pos. 30: COP ACTIVE Pos. 33: FACTORY SETTING

Note that the use of COP ACTIVE requires NO
UNISAB II to be fitted with the add-on printed cir- YES
cuit board UNICOM IF. With this function it is possible to restore the orig-
NO inal values as determined ex factory.
YES See section Factory settings.
Select YES if UNISAB II is fitted with a function for Current configuration as well as calibration values
COP measuring (Coefficient Of Performance, ie for pressure transducers and brine temperatures
cooling efficiency of compressor). COP measur- will remain unchanged.
ing requires an extra card for flow measuring as
well as a motor efficiency measuring device, cf Pos. 34: VI MODE
UNISAB II COP Manual. 70 to 97%
Select NO if UNISAB II is not used for COP meas- This point is only relevant for screw compressors
uring. with electrical slide control. See section Electrical
slide control.
Pos. 31: TAKE OVER (reciprocating
compressors) Pos. 35: MOTOR SIZE
NO 0 to 2500 kW or Amp
YES This selection is identical to MOTOR SIZE found
Select YES if UNISAB II is configured as a recip- in menu CALIBRATE I CALIBRATE COP. See
rocating compressor, operates in a combined section COP setting.
plant of reciprocating and screw compressors and Pos. 36: FLOW FACTOR
the function MULTISAB TAKE OVER/TRANS- 0.01 to 10 l/pls
FER is required.
This selection is identical to FLOW FACTOR
Pos. 32: CHILLER found in menu CALIBRATE I CALIBRATE COP.
NO See section COP setting.
YES1) Chiller
Pos. 37: LIQ. SUBCOOL
2) Evolution
0 to 99.9 °C
Select YES if UNISAB II is used as part of a chiller
This selection is identical to LIQ. SUBCOOL found
unit control, ie UNISAB II and a UNISAB II chiller
in menu CALIBRATE I CALIBRATE COP. See
control are connected via a communication cable.
section COP setting.
See UNISAB II-Chiller Manual.
Pos. 38: DANBUSS
Always select NO if UNISAB II is not connected to
YES (not changeable)
a UNISAB II chiller
Functions as header of the menu Communication.
Shows that the succeeding COMPR. NO and
BAUD RATE refer to the main communication
port, which always runs the Danbuss protocol.
0178-511 - ENG 41/230

Rev. 2005.03
2. Configuration
Pos. 39: NODE NO ( Port 1) Pos. 44: MOTOR SIGNAL

0 (not changeable) kW or Amp
When the optional communication port 1 is not When not using UNICOM IF print, the measured
used or used for EVOLUTION (see Pos. 29), the signal can be either an ampere or a kW signal.
NODE NO is fixed and cannot therefore be In case of Amp signal input, use terminals 35-36
changed. for 0 - 1 Amp AC.
Pos. 40: BAUD RATE ( Port 1) In case of kW signal input, use terminals 35-40 for
1200 to 38400 baud 4-20 mA DC.
Selection of communication speed for the optional However, it is also possible to use the 4-20 mA
communication port 1 (see Pos. 29). terminals 35-40 for reading Ampere. In this case
Pos. 41: PORT 2 choose 4-20 mA in configuration point pos. 53.
Note that the use of PORT 2 requires UNISAB II Pos. 45: PRESS
to be fitted with the add-on printed circuit board - 1/9- 1/25
UNICOM IF. -1/25-1/59
NONE or QUANTUM Shows the pressure range for pressure transmit-
Select QUANTUM if UNISAB II is to work together ters mounted on compressor. Usually -1/9 -1/25 is
with one or more Quantum compressor control- selected for ordinary compressor operation (de-
lers (also manufactured by Sabroe Refrigeration) fault) and - 1/25 -1/59 for heat pump operation or
and/or with one or more Grammatic 2502 com- operation with R744 (CO2).
pressor controllers. See also QUANTUM manual Pos. 46: ROTATUNE
S90-010-M and S90-010-O.
YES
Select NONE, if Port 2 is not used.
NO
Pos. 42: NODE NO (Port 2) Select YES if UNISAB II is fitted on a compressor
1 to 99 with frequency converter.
If UNISAB II is to communicate with QUANTUM Select NO for all other compressors.
(Pos. 41), select a node number which is not iden-
Note: This function will be active from EPROM
tical to any of the Quantum node numbers.
version 2.01 ROTA and later versions.
Pos. 43: BAUD RATE (Port 2)
For further information, please see ROTA Appen-
1200 (not changeable)
dix to UNISAB II manual. This appendix describes
Selection of communication speed for the optional the use of frequency converters together with
communication port 2 (see Pos. 41). As Quantum UNISAB II.
requires 1200 baud fixed, the speed cannot be
Pos. 47: RANGE MOTOR (kW) 0-2500 kW
changed.
POWER
Enter the value corresponding to 20mA input. For
use of Vacon converter, this value is read on the
frequency converter name plate and multiplied by
two so that the 4-20 mA signal is read correctly in
42/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
2. Configuration
UNISAB II as the motor power. Enter the motor scribes the use of frequency converters together
nominal power in the picture MOTOR I MOTOR with UNISAB II.
SIZE I PARAMETER. For SAB HR compressors, enter the value in rpm
Pos. 48: MINIMUM FREQUENCY corresponding to maximum frequency in the fre-
700 to 2000 revolutions quency converter.
The minimum number of revolutions which can be Pos. 50: PROFIBUS

shown on the UNISAB II display when the analog NO
output signal is 4 mA from the UNICOM IF add-on YES
printed circuit board to the frequency converter.
The frequency converter must of course be con- Select YES if UNISAB II is fitted with UNICOM IF
figured correctly, ie in minimum permissible fre- add-on printed circuit board and is to communi-
quency. See the converter user manual and list of cate with a PLC via PROFIBUS communication.
settings for details. See moreover ROTA Appen- Select NO if the above is not the case.
dix to UNISAB II manual. This appendix describes
Pos. 51: NODE NO
the use of frequency converters together with
1 to 254
UNISAB II.
If UNISAB II is to communicate with Mitsubishi
For SAB HR compressors, enter the value in rpm
PLC (Pos. 50), select node number which is differ-
corresponding to minimum frequency in the fre-
ent from the node numbers of the PLC control.
quency converter.
Pos. 52: BAUD RATE
Pos. 49: MAXIMUM FREQUENCY
12 mbit (cannot be changed)
1100 to 12000 revolutions
Pos. 53: MOTOR INPUT
The maximum number of revolutions which can
0 - 1 amp / 4 - 20 mA
be shown on the UNISAB II display when the an-
alog output signal is 20 mA from the UNICOM IF Select 0-1 amp when the measured motor current
add-on printed circuit board to the frequency con- is supplied from a current transformer with am-
verter. The frequency converter must of course be pere ratio xxx/1 amp connected to the terminals
configured correctly, ie in maximum permissible 35-36.
frequency. See the converter user manual and list Select 4-20 mA when the measured motor current
of settings for details. See moreover ROTA Ap- is supplied from a 4-20 mA transmitter, for in-
pendix to UNISAB II manual. This appendix de- stance a frequency converter or other equipment.
0178-511 - ENG 43/230

Rev. 2005.03
2. Configuration
Pos. 54: CAPACITY/FREQUENCY It can be an advantage for superior systems not to

Cap.Pos. receive a low suction pressure alarm as
Frequency UNISAB II resets this automatically.
Select Cap.Pos. if the terminal input for capacity Pos. 57: GSD FILE NO.
(terminal row 29-30-31) is connected to a capacity 08AA (Tiny protocol
slide transmitter. 095D (Extended protocol)
Select Frequency if the terminal input for capacity When YES has been selected in connection with
(terminal row 29-30-31) is connected to a frequen- Pos. 50: PROFIBUS, PROFIBUS can be applied
cy converter so that changes in the motor frequen- in two different ways. If 08AA is selected, the
cy are shown as changes in the capacity. transmission of signals between UNISAB II and
Pos. 55: PID the PLC is limited to 16 Integers. This involves 26
possible signals from the UNISAB II to the PLC
YES
and 14 possible signals from PLC to UNISAB II.
NO
If 095D is selected, all available parametres and
Select PID YES for special applications where a signals can be transmitted between UNISAB II
change in the cooling requirement must be met by and PLC. Please note that the GSD file in the PLC
a fast change in capacity. must have the same GSD file number as config-
Select PID NO for normal refrigeration plants. ured in UNISAB II. See the manual UNISAB
Profibus communication v1.0 for further infor-
Pos. 56: LOW SUCTION PRESSURE
mation.
YES
NO Pos. 58-68: DIG. INPUT 1-11
YES
Select YES to activate alarm relay at low suction
NO
pressure alarm.
When Pos. 50: PROFIBUS has been selected, it
Select NO not to activate alarm relay at low suc-
is possible to select whether the digital inputs are
tion pressure alarm.
to recieve control signals from the terminals in the
relay print (NO = default) or from the PROFIBUS
communication (YES).
44/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
2. Configuration
Table 2.1
Screw compressor Max. movement Evaporating Length of Mechanical Manual
type of capacity slide temp. spacer block zero zero
1 2 R717/R22 4 5 6
mm 3 mm (pos 27) (pos 28)
SAB 110SM
84.5 < -20°C 22 NO 0%
SAB 110SF
SAB 110 LM
96 > -20°C NONE NO FACT 0%
SAB 110 LF
SAB 128 HM Mk2
< -20°C 31.5 NO 0%
SAB 128 HF Mk2
126
SAB 128 HM Mk3
> -20°C NONE NO FACT 0%
SAB 128 HF Mk3
SAB 163 M Mk1, Man Vi
SAB 163 F Mk1, Man Vi < -20°C 38.5 NO 0%
SAB 163 HM Mk2, Man Vi
160
SAB 163 HF Mk2, Man Vi
SAB 163 HM Mk3, Man Vi > -20°C NONE NO FACT 0%
SAB 163 HF Mk3, Man Vi
SAB 163 HM Mk2, Aut Vi
< -20°C 38.5 YES 24 %
SAB 163 HF Mk2, Aut Vi
160
SAB 163 HM Mk3, Aut Vi
> -20°C NONE NO FACT 0%
SAB 163 HF Mk3, Aut Vi
SAB 202 SM, Man Vi
SAB 202 SF, Man Vi ** *
245 ALL NONE
SAB 202 SM, Aut Vi NO FACT 0%
SAB 202 SF, Aut Vi
SAB 202 LM, Man Vi
SAB 202 LF, Man Vi ** *
317 ALL NONE
SAB 202 LM, Aut Vi NO FACT 0%
SAB 202 LF, Aut Vi
SAB 283 L 314
Not Not Not Not
SAB 283 E 391
relevant relevant relevant relevant
SAB 355 L 350
SAB 330 S 262
Not Not Not Not
SAB 330 L 371
relevant relevant relevant relevant
SAB 330 E 480
* If another value than the factory set value of 0% is inserted, the automatic zero setting is eliminated.
Therefore, only insert a value different from 0% after having contacted Sabroe Refrigeration.
** If another value than NO is inserted, the automatic zero setting is eliminated.
Therefore, only insert a value different from No after having contacted Sabroe Refrigeration.
0178-511 - ENG 45/230

Rev. 2005.03
2. Configuration
46/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
3. Alarms and Warnings
Analog alarms and warnings In case an alarm limit is exceeded, the compres-
ALARM and WARNING limits can be set sepa- sor will stop immediately. The red light diode
rately as described in section Changing the set above the D key will start to flash quickly. In the
values. picture ALARM the reason for the alarm can be
read, and at the same time the alarm relay will
UNISAB II does not check whether ALARM and change its position.
WARNING limits have been interchanged by a
mistake (eg if warning limit for high discharge The alarm relay works by connecting the
pressure is set higher than the alarm limit). Con- alarm/common switch during alarm and by dis-
sequently, during adjustments check that the connecting it once the alarm is reset.
settings are correct. The picture ALARM also shows the exact time of
If a warning limit is exceeded, the red light diode the alarm. See also under Diagnosis.
above the D key will begin to flash slowly, and The alarm is reset by pressing the D key, and the
the warning relay will be activated. The reason for warning and alarm relays will return to their nor-
the warning can be seen in the picture WARNING, mal position. However, if the alarm value is still
which also shows whether there are several si- outside the limit, the red light diode will continue to
multaneous warnings. flash. When the situation has returned to normal,
Note that in case of warning, a limiter might be ac- the D key must be pressed once more,
tive as described in section Limiting functions. The set values for high and low alarms as well as
When the warning disappears, it is automatically the factory values are stated in the following ta-
removed from the picture WARNING and the re- bles 1-5. These are followed by explanatory
lay returns to its normal position. notes.
0178-511 - ENG 47/230

Rev. 2005.03
Table 1
Screw compressors
Measured and calculated pressure levels
Measuring Min. Max. Factory Note
Suction pressure High alarm - - -

(bar) High warning 1.5 9.0 5.0 3+4+5
Low warning -1.0 6.0 1.5 3+4+5
Low alarm -1.0 6.0 1.0 3+4+5
Discharge pressure High alarm 4.0 24.0 16.0 1+6

(bar) High warning 3.0 22.0 15.0 1+6
Low warning - - -
Low alarm -1.0 -1.0 -1.0 1+5
Oil pressure (bar) Low warning 1.5 6.0 4.0 2+7

Calculated value Low alarm 1.0 5.0 2.5 2+7
SAB Mk 1 compressors

SAB Mk 2 compressors

SAB Mk 3, Mk 4 compres-
sors Set point 1 0.0 10.0 2.5 21
SAB 202, 283, 330, 355 Set point 2 0.0 10.0 4.0 21
FV 19, SV 24/26, FV 24/26
Oil pressure (bar) Low warning 1.5 6.0 2.0 2+9+17

Calculated value Low alarm 1.0 5.0 1.5 2+9+17
VMY Mk 2-2.5 compressor

VMY Mk 3 compressors Set point 1 0.0 10.0 5.5 22
Set point 2 0.0 10.0 7.0 22

SAB 80 Set point 1 0.0 10.0 0.5 20
Set point 2 0.0 20.0 16.0 20
Diff. pressure High alarm 0.0 1.5 1.0 2+11

across oil filter (bar) Low warning 0.0 1.3 0.7 2+11
Calculated value
All types but SAB 80
Diff. pressure High alarm 0.0 2.5 1.6 2+11+19

across oil filter (bar) High warning 0.0 2.2 1.4 2+11+19
Calculated value
SAB80
48/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
Table 2
Screw compressors
Measured and calculated temperatures
Discharge temp. High alarm 60.0 130.0 100.0 1+6

(°C) High warning 50.0 120,0 90.0 1+6
Low warning -65.0 -65.0 -65.0
Low alarm - - -
Oil temperature High alarm 40.0 80.0 65.0 2+7

(°C) High warning 30.0 70.0 60.0 2+7
Low warning 10.0 50.0 25.0 2+7
Low alarm 0.0 40.0 20.0 2+7
Brine temperature High alarm -60.0 100,0 60.0 1+6

(°C) High warning -60.0 100.0 50.0 1+6
Low warning -100.0 100.0 4.0 1+6
Low alarm -100.0 100.0 2.0 1+6
Suction gas superheat High alarm 6.0 120.0 110.0 2+7+12

(°C) High warning 5.0 120.0 100.0 2+7+12
Low warning 0.0 40.0 2.0 2+7+10
Disch. gas superheat Low warning 5.0 40.0 10.0 2+7+10

(°C) Low alarm 0.0 40.0 0.0 2+7+10
Calculated value
4-20 m Auxiliary input signal

Auxiliary input High alarm -999.9 999.9 0.0 3+18

(4-20 mA) High warning -999.9 999.9 0.0 3+18
Low warning -999.9 999.9 0.0 3+18
Low alarm -999.9 999.9 0.0 3+18
0178-511 - ENG 49/230

Rev. 2005.03
Table 3
Reciprocating compressors
Measured and calculated pressure levels

(bar) High warning 1.5 9.0 5.0 3+4+5
Low warning -1.0 6.0 2.5 3+4+5
Low alarm -1.0 6.0 1.5 3+4+5

(bar) High warning 3.0 22.0 15.0 1+6
Low warning - - -
Low alarm -1.0 -1.0 -1.0 1+5
Intermediate pressure High alarm 4.0 24.0 7.0 1+6

(bar) High warning 3.0 22.0 6.0 1+6
For two-stage Low warning -1.0 10.0 -1.0 1+6+16
compressors only Low alarm -1.0 10.0 -1.0 1+6+16
Oil pressure (bar) High alarm 5.0 7.0 6.0 2+5+16

High warning 5.0 7.0 5.5 2+5
Low warning 0.5 5.0 4.0 2+5+14
50/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
Table 4
Discharge temp. High alarm 60.0 155.0 125.0 1+6
(°C) High warning 50.0 155.0 120.0 1+6
Low warning -65.0 -65.0 -65.0
Low alarm - - -
Oil temperature High alarm 40.0 105.0 80.0 2
(°C) High warning 30.0 105.0 75.0 2
Low warning 0.0 50.0 30.0 2+7
Low alarm 0.0 40.0 25.0 2+7
Brine temperature High alarm -60.0 100.0 60.0 1+6
(°C) High warning -60.0 100.0 50.0 1+6
Low warning -100.0 100.0 4.0 1+6
Low alarm -100.0 100.0 2.0 1+6
Intermediate gas High alarm 50.0 155.0 100.0 2+7
temperature (°C) High warning 50.0 120.0 95.0 2+7
For two-stage Low warning -20.0 50.0 4.0 2+7
compressors only Low alarm -20.0 50.0 2.0 2+7
Suction gas superheat High alarm 6.0 120.0 110.0 2+7
(°C) High warning 5.0 120.0 100.0 2+7
Low warning 0.0 40.0 4.0 2+7+13
(°C) Low alarm 0.0 40.0 0.0 2+7+10
Calculated value


(4-20 mA) High warning -999.9 999.9 0.0 3+18
Low warning -999.9 999.9 0.0 3+18
Low alarm -999.9 999.9 0.0 3+18
0178-511 - ENG 51/230

Rev. 2005.03
Table 5
Reciprocating compressors HPO/HPC
Measured and calculated pressure levels and temperatures

(bar) High warning 1.5 25.0 10.0 3+4+5
Low warning -1.0 25.0 3.5 3+4+5
Low alarm -1.0 25.0 2.5 3+4+5

(bar) High warning 3.0 40.0 33.0 1+6
Low warning - - -
Low alarm -1.0 -1.0 -1.0 1+5
Oil pressure High alarm 5.0 7.0 6.0 2+7

(bar) High warning 5.0 7.0 5.5 2+7
Low warning 0.5 5.0 4.0
Calculated value Low alarm 0.5 5.0 3.5
High diff. pressure- High alarm - - 26.0 1+15

Pc - Pe (bar) High warning - - 25.2
Calculated value
Discharge temperature High alarm 60.0 170.0 160.0 1+6

(°C) High warning 50.0 170.0 155.0 1+6
Low warning -65.0 -65.0 -65.0
Low alarm - - -
Oil temperature High alarm 40.0 105.0 95.0 2

(°C) High warning 30.0 105.0 90.0 2
Low warning 0.0 70.0 55.0 2+7
Low alarm 0.0 70.0 50.0 2+7
Water temperature High alarm -20 100.0 75.0 1+6

(°C) High warning -20 100.0 70.0 1+6
Low warning -20 100.0 4.0 1+6
Low alarm -20 100.0 2.0 1+6
Suction gas superheat High alarm 6.0 120.0 110.0 2+7

(°C) High warning 5.0 120.0 100.0 2+7
Low warning 0.0 40.0 4.0 2+10+13

(°C) Low alarm 0.0 40.0 0.0 2+7+10
Calculated value


(4-20 mA) High warning -999.9 999.9 0.0 3+18
Low warning -999.9 999.9 0.0 3+18
Low alarm -999.9 999.9 0.0 3+18
52/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
Notes:
Note 1 The alarm cannot be switched off un- Note 17 For VMY Mk 2-2.5, calculate the fol-
til the problem has been solved. lowing (see Fig. 3.1): Oil pressure =
Note 2 The alarm can be switched off imme- Oil pressure 3 (after oil filter) - Dis-
diately (RESET key). charge pressure 2. For all other
compressor types (except for SAB
Note 3 The alarm is switched off automati- 80, see Note 20), calculate the fol-
cally. lowing: Oil pressure = Oil pressure 3
Note 4 The safety limits can be entered in (after oil filter) - Suction pressure 1 .
bar or °C/R. Note 18 The limits are not active until AUX.
Note 5 Alarm monitoring active when digital INPUT SIGNAL has been selected in
output "compressor starting signal" the menu CALIBRATION 4-20 mA.
has been selected. Note 19 For SAB 80 the differential pressure
Note 6 Alarm monitoring always active - ex- across the oil filter is calculated as
cept when "BLOCKED" has been se- follows (see Fig. 3.1): Oil filter diff.
lected in picture COMPRESSOR pressure = Discharge pressure 2 -
CTRL MODE. Oil pressure 4 (after oil filter).
Note 7 Alarm monitoring 300 sec delayed The shown oil filter pressure will thus
after compressor start. be 0.1 to 0.7 bar higher than the ac-
Note 8 Alarm monitoring 180 sec delayed tual pressure loss across the filter
after compressor start. due to the pressure loss across the
oil separator and the oil cooler.
Note 9 Alarm monitoring 45 sec delayed af-
ter compressor start. The maximum allowed pressure
drop across the oil filter is 1.2 bar.
Note 10 A setting of 0.0 impedes monitoring.
Consequently, the warning limit
Note 11 Delay of 300 sec, regardless of when should be set between 0.8 and 1.4
limits are exceeded. bar or lower. The alarm limit should
Note 12 The compressor must have been be set between 1.1 and 1.7 bar or
above 5% capacity. Below 5% ca- lower.
pacity monitoring is impeded. Note 20: Set points 1 and 2 are used for alarm
Note 13 Alarm monitoring 15 sec delayed af- monitoring of the mechanical oil
ter compressor start. pump, cf description of the alarm un-
der "Oil pump error" in section Other
Note 14 Delay of 60 sec, regardless of when
Alarms. For SAB 80, the oil pressure
limits are exceeded.
is calculated as follows (see
Note 15 Only applies to HPO and HPC com- Fig. 3.1): Oil pressure = Oil pressure
pressors. 3 (after pump) - Suction pressure 1.
Note 16 Alarm monitoring 20 sec delayed af-
ter compressor start.
0178-511 - ENG 53/230

Rev. 2005.03
Note 21: The set points are used for control- Note 22: The set points are used for control-
ling the oil pump. When the pressure ling the full flow pump. When the
falls below set point 1, the oil pump pressure falls below set point 1, the
will start. When the pressure ex- full flow pump will start. When the
ceeds set point 2 for 60 seconds, the pressure exceeds set point 2 for 60
oil pump will stop. seconds, the full flow pump will stop.
Fig. 3.1
SAB 80
Oil
Oil filter separator
Oil pump Compressor
Oil cooler
Others
Oil
Oil filter separator
Oil pump
Compressor
Oil cooler
Suction pressure Discharge pressure
Oil pressure Oil pressure 2

(before compressor) (between pump and filter)
54/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
Suction gas superheat, alarm 20%; or that the slide - in connection with auto-
The superheat alarm is an alarm which in many matic setting of variable zero point - cannot reach
cases will protect the compressor against liquid the position corresponding to calculated or adjust-
strokes. However, there are many aspects which ed zero point (ie positive read capacity) before the
may affect superheating for which reason this expiry of the timer "cap.negative".
alarm must not be considered as full protection 1) If the compressor is set on "MAN" or "AU-
against liquid strokes. TO" and in operation, and the slide does not
If the superheat falls below the set value, the com- react to the regulating signal within 30 mins,
pressor will stop on the relay. However, on R717 a warning will be issued. The compressor
pump circulation plants with a short distance be- does not stop.
tween liquid separator and compressor, the suc- 2) If the compressor is set on "REMOTE" and
tion gas superheat may drop below 0 K during in operation, and the slide does not react to
normal operation. the regulating signal within 30 mins, an
In such cases adjust LOW ALARM to 0, thus alarm will be issued. The compressor will
making it inactive. stop.
3) If the compressor is REMOTE CONTROL-
Auxiliary input signal (4-20 mA) LED by a PC/PLC-system, a warning will
be issued as well. The monitoring is possi-
The alarm and warning limits are activated when
ble by means of a 4-20 mA signal in the aux.
AUX. INPUT SIGNAL has been selected under
input or via communication.
CALIBRATION 4-20 mA.
The reason for the difference between situ-
ation 1) and 2) is: If the system runs in se-
Other alarms and warnings
quence - REMOTE (MULTISAB), the com-
pressor must be stopped to start any subse-
Oil system error (screw compressors) quent compressors in the sequence.
The reason for the alarm is that the oil float switch
When a compressor is remote controlled (3)
is not activated within the time set in the timer OIL
it is not a part of the sequence - REMOTE
FLOW during prelubrication; or that there is a
(MULTISAB) system - thus stopping this
drop-out on the oil float switch for a longer period
compressor will not start up subsequent
than the one set in the timer NO OIL during oper-
compressors.
ation.
PMS error
Capacity error (screw compressors)
If the control is to start the compressor and conse-
The reason for the alarm is that the capacity slide
quently adjusts the output START REQUEST
is not below 5% within the time set in the timer
(PMS) to ON, the input START REQUEST OK
SLIDE MAX at compressor stop; or that the slide
must be set on ON within the time set in the timer
- during operation - has not moved within 30 mins,
PMS FEEDBACK - or the alarm will be activated.
although the regulator is to regulate up or down
and the output signal from the regulator is above
0178-511 - ENG 55/230

Rev. 2005.03
No starting permission ually. This pressure level exceeds the warning

The reason for the warning is that the regulator in limit for high discharge pressure.
REMOTE/MULTISAB cannot start this compres-
sor, even though the regulator demands more ca- High motor temperature
pacity and this compressor is the next in line to The reason for the alarm is that the input THER-
start. The reason is that AUTO START has not MISTOR is open, ie the load on the input is above
been configured to YES, or the input EXTERNAL 3990 Ω.
STARTING PERMISSION-NORMAL STOP is not
ON.
Oil pump error (screw compressors)
The reason for the alarm is that feedback from the
Compressor motor error oil pump motor is not set/does not disappear with-
The reason for the warning is that feedback from in the time set in the timer OIL PUMP M. when the
the motor is not set/does not disappear within the compressor starts/stops (ie the output oil pump
time set in the timer MOTOR START when the start is activated/deactivated), or that feedback
compressor motor is started/stopped (ie the out- from the motor disappears even briefly during op-
put compressor start is activated/deactivated), or eration.
that feedback from the motor disappears even
The alarm functions as a warning during opera-
briefly during operation.
tion, ie after the prelubrication sequence has been
The alarm may also occur at compressor start if completed.
the emergency stop or an optional high pressure
control has been activated.
Oil pump error (SAB 80)
The reason for the alarm is that the differential
Compressor motor overload pressure across the mechanical oil pump is too
The reason for the alarm is that, within the time set low, ie lower than 0.5 Bar. This value can be set
in the timer CURR OVERL, a motor current has as set point 1 for the oil pressure.
been measured continually. This current exceeds
The alarm is delayed 45 seconds after compres-
the highest of the set point values that have been
sor start (same timer as for "low oil pressure").
set in SET POINT 1 and SET POINT 2 for MO-
TOR CURR. The alarm is only activated when the discharge
pressure is lower than 16 Bar. This value can be
set as set point 2 for the oil pressure.
Discharge pressure, overload
The reason for the alarm is that, within the time set At a discharge pressure level of approx. 16 Bar,
in the timer DISCH.PRES, OVERLOAD, a dis- the pump cannot be expected to generate a posi-
charge pressure level has been measured contin- tive relative pressure because of the shunt valve.
There is therefore no alarm surveillance of the dif-
ferential pressure across the oil pump.
56/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
Full flow pump error (screw (EEPROM) fitted on the CPU card, ie the serial
compressors) EPROM is either missing or defective.
The reason for the alarm is that feedback of the
full flow pump motor is not set/does not disappear Limiting suction pressure
within the time set in the timer FULL FLOW M, The warning indicates that the suction pressure
when the motor starts/stops (ie the output full flow limiter is active, ie the suction pressure is within
pumps start is activated/deactivated), or that the limiter neutral zone or below the warning limit.
feedback from the motor disappears even briefly
during operation.
Limiting discharge pressure
The alarm functions as a warning during opera- The warning indicates that the discharge pressure
tion, ie after the prelubrication sequence has been limiter is active, ie the discharge pressure is within
completed. the limiter neutral zone or above the warning limit.
Cooling fan error Limiting brine temperature

The alarm will be activated when feedback from The warning indicates that the brine temperature
the electrical cooling fan motor is not set/disap- limiter is active, ie the brine temperature is within
pears within the time limit set in the timer FULL the limiter neutral zone or below the warning limit.
FLOW M. when the motor is started/stopped (ie
the cooling fan is activated/deactivated), or when
feedback from the motor disappears even briefly
Limiting hot water
during operation. The warning indicates that the hot water tempera-
ture limiter is active, ie the hot water temperature
is within the limiter neutral zone or above the
Oil rectifier error (screw compressors)
warning limit.
The reason for the alarm is that suction gas super-
heat has not exceeded the value set in SET
POINT 1 before the timer RECT. DISABL has ex-
Limiting discharge temperature
pired, although the OIL RECTIFIER has been set The warning indicates that the discharge pipe
and the compressor is running. temperature limiter is active. See section Limiting
functions, High discharge pipe temperature.
Wrong starting number in sequence
The reason for the warning is that two or more
No communication to Chiller
compressors have got the same starting number The alarm/warning will only be activated if
and the same system number. UNISAB II is configured as part of a Chiller con-
trol, ie as SETUP I CONFIG I CHILLER = YES.
Error in diagnosis - EEPROM The alarm will only be activated if the communica-
The reason for the alarm is that it has become im- tion between UNISAB II and the connected Chiller
possible to read and write in the serial EPROM disappears for a longer period than the one set in
the timer NO CHILLER.
0178-511 - ENG 57/230

Rev. 2005.03
Chiller, alarm from Chiller The alarm will be activated if the alarm of the con-
The alarm will only be activated if UNISAB II is nected PLC goes off.
configured as part of a Chiller control, ie as
SETUP I CONFIG I CHILLER = YES. Evolution, no communication to PLC
The alarm will be activated if the alarm of the con- The alarm will only appear if UNISAB II is config-
nected Chiller goes off. ured as part of an Evolution control, ie as SETUP
I CONFIG. I COMMUNICATIONS I PORT 1 =
EVOLUTION XXX
Watch the oil pressure
The warning will appear if the oil pump for oil The alarm will only be activated if there is no com-
charging is started by means of the picture munication between UNISAB II and the connect-
TIMERS I OIL CHARGING ed PLC.
and the compressor is in operation at the same
time. Low lubricating pressure monitoring
(screw compressor)
Vi position error The reason for this alarm is that the differential
pressure across the compressor and thus the ef-
The alarm will only be activated if UNISAB II is
fective lubricating pressure is too low. The differ-
configured for automatic Vi regulation, ie
ential pressure is calculated in the following way:
SETUP I CONFIG I VOLUME RATIO = AUTO
measured oil pressure - 1.1 x suction pressure.
The alarm indicates that the display of capacity in The differential pressure must be higher than the
connection with automatic Vi regulation is incor- set alarm limit for low oil pressure, see the draw-
rect. The real capacity of the compressor is lower ing below. A warning will be issued after 25 sec-
than the one shown in the display. onds and an alarm after 145 seconds.
Evolution, alarm from PLC High oil differential pressure

(SMC Mk4)
Evolution, warning from PLC The warning is delayed 300 seconds during start.
The alarm/warning will only appear if UNISAB II is It is released if the oil differential pressure be-
configured as part of an Evolution control, ie as comes too high.
SETUP I CONFIG. I COMMUNICATIONS I
PORT 1 = EVOLUTION XXX
58/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
Fig. 3.2
LOW LUBRICATING PRESSURE

Po measured - 1.1 x
A P suc < lim A
t1 > 25 sec
yes
WARNING
yes
Po measured = Measured oil

pressure
No lim A = Alarm for low oil pres-
sure
LOW LUBRICATING
PRESSURE
No t1 > 145 sec ALARM

Yes
RESET
t1 = 0
No
t1 = 145 sec fixed
0178-511 - ENG 59/230

Rev. 2005.03
Table 6
Identification numbers for alarms / warnings
This is a list of alarms and warnings with identification numbers for both screw and reciprocating compres-
sors.
Screw compr. Recipr. compr. Id
Low suction pressure Warn + alarm 5) Warn + alarm 5) 31
High suction pressure Warn only Warn only 32
Low suction gas superheat Warn + alarm Warn + alarm 33
High suction gas superheat Warn + alarm Warn + alarm 34
Low discharge pressure alarm only alarm only 35
High discharge pressure Warn + alarm Warn + alarm 36
High discharge temperature Warn + alarm Warn + alarm 37
Low oil pressure (differential pressure) Warn + alarm Warn + Alarm 38
Low brine / intermed. gas temperature Warn + Alarm Warn + Alarm 39
Low discharge temperature Warn only Warn only 40
Low oil temperature Warn + Alarm Warn + Alarm 41
High oil temperature Warn + Alarm Warn + Alarm 42
High oil filter differential pressure Warn + Alarm Warn only (Mk4) 43
Oil system error ( oil flow switch ) Alarm only 44
Capacity error Warn + Alarm 1) 45
Compressor motor overload Alarm only Alarm only 46
Compressor motor error/emergency stop/HP Alarm only Alarm only 47
Oil pump error Warn + Alarm 2) 4) 48
High motor temperature (thermistor) Alarm only Alarm only 49
PMS error Alarm only Alarm only 55
No starting permission Warn only Warn only 56
High differential pressure (Pc - Pe) Warn + Alarm 3) 57
High brine / intermed. gas temperature Warn + Alarm Warn + Alarm 58
High oil pressure Warn + Alarm 59
High intermed. pressure Warn + Alarm 60
Low intermed. pressure Warn + Alarm 61
Full flow pump error Warn + Alarm 2) 62
60/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
Screw compr. Recipr. compr. Id
63
Oil rectifier error Warn only 64
Wrong starting number in sequence Warn only Warn only 65
Error in diagnosis - EEPROM Alarm only Alarm only 66
Low auxiliary input signal (univ. reg.) Warn + Alarm Warn + Alarm 67
High auxiliary input signal (univ. reg) Warn + Alarm Warn + Alarm 68
Low discharge gas superheat Warn + Alarm Warn + Alarm 69
Discharge gas overload Alarm only Alarm only 70
Evolution, Alarm from PLC Alarm only Alarm only 71
Evolution, no communication to PLC Alarm only Alarm only 72
Limiter, suction pressure Warn only Warn only 73
Limiter, discharge pressure Warn only Warn only 74
Limiter, brine temperature Warn only Warn only 75
Limiter, hot water Warn only Warn only 76
Evolution, warning from PLC Warn only Warn only 77
Limiter, discharge temperature Warn only Warn only 78
Watch the oil pressure Warn only 79
Common alarm from Chiller Alarm only Alarm only 80
Chiller, no communication to Chiller Warn + Alarm Warn + Alarm 81
Cooling fan error Alarm only 82
Vi position error Alarm only 83
Lube press Warn + Alarm 84

1) May occur as Warning in MAN and AUTO.
2) Alarm at prelubrication. Warning during operation.
3) Applies only to HPO/HPC.
4) The alarm LOW OIL PUMP PRESSURE DURING OPERATION applies to the SAB 80. The alarm is only activated at a discharge pres-
sure level below 16 Bar.
5) Alarm relay can be deactivated.
0178-511 - ENG 61/230

Rev. 2005.03
62/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
4. Timers
4. Timers
UNISAB II includes a number of timer functions the compressor, the counter will stay on the value
under the menu SETUP I TIMERS I . reached at that particular moment. In this way it is
possible to know for how long the compressor has
been running since the last operating period.
TIMERS
1 TIMERS
When the compressor is restarted, the counter be-
2 TIMER SETUP gins from 0.
3 SERVICE TIMERS
4 DATE-TIMER 4. DATE - TIME - I
5 OIL CHARGING
This picture shows:
6 MOTOR FAN
7 P BAND FACTOR TIME The time in hours
8 TRANSFER MIN The time in minutes
9 TAKE - OVER SEC The time in seconds
DAY Date
1. TIMERS - I MONTH Month
YEAR Year
This picture includes all the timers and shows
which timers are activated (they are counting Must be set correctly in order for the alarms to be
down). stored with the correct time. This function is pro-
vided with a battery back-up.
2. TIMER SETUP - I
In this picture the set values of the timers can be 5. OIL CHARGING - I
changed. The timers and their functions appear (screw compressor)
from the following tables for screw compressors Provided that the compressor is fitted with a pump
and reciprocating compressors respectively. for oil charging, this can be started in the picture
Some of these timers can be changed using the OIL CHARGING. This picture shows:
keyboard whereas others are fixed. The tables START OIL PUMP NO
also include the factory set values. TIMER 0 sec
To start the pump, proceed as follows:

3. SERVICE COUNTER - I Place the cursor on TIMER with K and use G for
ON TIME 00 HOUR parameter changing. Set the time that the pump is
SINCE START 0 sec to run and place the cursor on START OIL PUMP
On time J which is changed to YES with G and J . Con-
Indicates the total operating time of the compres- firm by pressing G.
sor. The pump will now start and run for the set period.
In case the pump is to stop before time expiry,
Since start
select NO in the top line. The pump will now stop
Shows how long time the compressor has been
and the time drop to 0.
running since it was last started. When stopping
0178-511 - ENG 63/230

Rev. 2005.03
4. Timers
6. MOTOR FAN I (Frequency To start the cooling fan manually, carry out the fol-
controlled screw compressor) lowing:
If the compressor is fitted with an electrical cooling Place the cursor on TIMER SP with K and press
fan for cooling the compressor motor, this can be G to change the parameter. Set the fan running
started manually in the picture COOLING FAN. time and place the cursor on START COOLING
The function is only available on frequency con- FAN. Select YES with G,and J . Enter setting
trolled compressors. with G .
The picture shows the following: The cooling fan will now start and operate for the
START COOLING FAN NO set running time.
TIMER SP 10 sec
To stop the cooling fan before the end of the
TIMER 0 sec
running time, select NO in the upper line. The fan
will now stop and the time be reset to 0.
64/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
4. Timers
Table 7 - Screw compressors

No. Value Factory Low High Unit Adjust-
able
1 Start-start delay 1200 600/60 3600 Sec Yes
2 Stop-start delay 300 60 3600 Sec Yes
3 Start delay 300 0 3600 Sec Yes
4 Stop delay 300 60 3600 Sec Yes
5 Suction ramp 0 0 1200 Sec Yes
6 Slide max 300 60 600 Sec Yes
7 Prelub1)/2)/3)/4)/5)/6) 10/60/0/6/50 0 120 Sec Yes
8 Oil flow 1)/2)/3)/4)/5) 600/90/60/120/600 -- -- Sec No
9 Oil flow delay 1)/2)/3) 50/0/20 -- -- Sec No
10 No oil/flow 1)/2)/3)/4) 10/2/60/120 - - Sec No
11 Lubrication time/flow 1)/2) 60/300 - - Sec No
12 Diff press OK 60 - - Sec No
13 Oil press low 1)/2) 45/300 - - Sec No
14 Filter diff high 300 - - Sec No
15 Oil temp low 300 - - Sec No
16 Oil temp high 300 - - Sec No
17 Superheating low 300 - - Sec No
18 Superheating high 300 - - Sec No
19 Disch press overload 300 - - Sec No
20 Current overload 300 - - Sec No
21 Motor start 15 5 120 Sec Yes
22 PMS feedback 60 10 300 Sec Yes
23 F.F. Pump start 10 5 30 Sec Yes
24 Oil pump start 10 5 30 Sec Yes
25 Oil rectifier start 900 0 3600 Sec Yes
26 Oil rectifier delay 300 0 3600 Sec Yes
27 Oil rectifier disable 3600 0 7200 Sec Yes
28 Start high pressure 30 0 120 Sec Yes
29 No Chiller 10 - - Sec No
0178-511 - ENG 65/230

Rev. 2005.03
4. Timers

able
30 Cap. negative 10000 60 20000 Sec Yes
31 Start unload 15 0 60 Sec Yes
32 Low suction pressure 0 0 60 Sec Yes
33 Lubricating pressure 145 - - Sec No
34 Vi-pause 60 - - Sec No
66/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
4. Timers
Table 8 - Reciprocating compressors

able
1 Start-start delay 1200 600/60 3600 Sec Yes
2 Stop-start delay 300 60 3600 Sec Yes
3 Start delay 300 0 3600 Sec Yes
4 Stop delay 300 5 3600 Sec Yes
5 Suction ramp 0 0 1200 Sec Yes
6 Delay up 60 5 1200 Sec Yes
7 Delay down 60 5 1200 Sec Yes
8 Take-over max 0 0 3600 Sec Yes
9 Take-over delay 300 300 300 Sec No
10 Intermediate pressure low 20 - - Sec No
11 Filter diff. high 300 -- -- Sec No
12 Not used -- -- -- -- --
13 Oil pressure low 60 - - Sec No
14 Oil pressure high 20 - - Sec No
15 Oil temp low 300 - - Sec No
16 Oil temp high 0 - - Sec No
17 Superheating low 15 - - Sec No
18 Superheating high 300 - - Sec No
19 Disch pressure overload 300 - - Sec No
20 Current overload 300 - - Sec No
21 Motor start 15 5 120 Sec Yes
22 PMS feedback 60 10 300 Sec Yes
23 Oil cool on 60 60 1500 Sec Yes
24 Oil return 600 0 1200 Sec Yes
25 Oil rectifier start 900 0 3600 Sec Yes
26 Oil rectifier delay 300 0 3600 Sec Yes
27 Oil rectifier disable 3600 0 7200 Sec Yes
28 Start high pressure 30 0 120 Sec Yes
29 No Chiller 10 - - Sec No
0178-511 - ENG 67/230

Rev. 2005.03
4. Timers

able
30 Not used - - - - -
31 Not used - - - - -
32 Low suction pressure 0 0 60 Sec Yes
33 Not used - - - - -
34 Not used
Timer description
Screw compressors tion is active as long as the compressor is working

itself down to its normal working point. When this
1. Start-start delay
has been reached, the compressor will be regulat-
States the number of seconds that must pass from
ed according to the set regulating values.
one compressor start to the next. If the compres-
sor stops before the timer has counted down to 0, Used only in case of suction pressure regulation.
the timer will block restart. If the value is set at 0, this function is disconnect-
1) For compressors configured with ed.
Rotatune=YES 6. Slide max
2) For compressors configured with At compressor stop the capacity slide will move
Rotatune=NO towards minimum position. In case it fails to get
2. Stop-start delay below 5% within the set time, an error message
will be issued.
States the number of seconds that must pass be-
fore the compressor can be restarted after stop. If UNISAB II tries to move the slide during opera-
This function is not used in MANUAL mode. tion, and the slide refuses to move within the set
time, an error message will appear.
3. Start delay
When UNISAB II is in AUTOMATIC or REMOTE, 7. Prelubrication
the compressor start will be delayed for the stated When starting compressors with prelubrication
number of seconds. pumps, the prelubrication time is calculated from
the time when the oil float issues a signal.
4. Stop delay
When UNISAB II is in AUTOMATIC or REMOTE 1) For SAB 202, SAB Mk3 and VMY Mk3.
and the compressor is below 5% slide stop posi- 2) For SAB 163 Mk1.
tion, the timer will start counting down and stop
3) For SV 10/20, FV 10/20, SAB 110 SR/LR,
the compressor at 0.
SAB 128 HR and SAB 163 HR.
5. Suction ramp
4) For SAB 283, SAB 355, GSV, RWF and
This timer indicates how fast the compressor is al- SAB 330 B
lowed to lower its suction pressure 1°C. The func-
68/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
4. Timers
5) For SAB 330 HP (B is short for Booster, 11. Lubrication time/flow

which can be selected in the CONFIG After start-up of compressors with prelubrication
menu. HP means Booster = NO). pump, the pump will run for the time stated after
6) For Rotatune compressors the time must be compressor start.
changed from 10 sec. to 0 sec. 1. For SAB 202, SAB Mk3 and VMY Mk3, SV
8. Oil flow 10/20 and FV 10/20
When prelubrication is initiated, a signal must be 2. For SAB 163 Mk1.
issued from the float switch before the timer ex- 12. Diff. pressure OK
pires; otherwise an error message appears.
For VMY Mk3, SAB Mk3, SAB 202, SV 10/20 and
1) For SAB 202, SAB Mk3 and VMY Mk3. FV 10/20 the oil pump will run for the stated time
2) For SAB 163 Mk1. after the desired differential pressure has been
reached.
3) For SV 10/20 and FV 10/20
13. Oil pressure low
4) For SAB 283, SAB 355, GSV, RWF and
During start the alarm for low oil pressure is de-
SAB 330 B
layed for the stated time. No delay during nor-
5) For SAB 330 HP (B is short for Booster, mal operation.
which can be selected in the CONFIG
1. For SAB 202, SAB Mk2, SAB Mk3, VMY,
menu. HP means Booster = NO).
SAB 80, SV 10/20 and FV 10/20.
9. Oil flow switch delay, start
2. For SAB 163 Mk 1
When starting a compressor, a time delay ensures
that the oil float has time to lift. 14. Filter diff. high
During start and operation the alarm for high filter
1. For SAB Mk 2 110/128/163 and SAB 80.
differential pressure is delayed for the stated time.
2. For compressors with prelubrication delay =
15. Oil temp. low
0 sec.
During start the alarm for low oil temperature is
3. For SV 10/20 and FV 10/20 delayed for the stated time. No delay during nor-
10. No oil/flow mal operation.
During operation the oil float is allowed to be dis- 16. Oil temp. high
connected only for the time period stated. During start the alarm for high oil temperature is
1. For SAB and VMY compressors except delayed for the stated time. No delay during nor-
SAB 80. mal operation.
2. For SV 10/20 and FV 10/20 17. Superheating low
3. For GSV/RWF During start the alarm for low superheating is de-
4. For SAB 80
mal operation.
0178-511 - ENG 69/230

Rev. 2005.03
4. Timers
18. Superheating high been reached, the solenoid valve to the oil rectifier
During start the alarm for high superheating is de- will be activated.
layed for the stated time. No delay during nor- 26. Oil rectifier delay
mal operation.
If suction gas superheating drops below set point
19. Disch. pressure, overload 1 for superheating, the solenoid valve will close.
If the discharge pressure is higher than the warn- Once the superheating rises above this limit
ing limit in the time stated, the compressor will again, the timer must expire before the solenoid
stop and an error message will appear. valve opens.
See also Limiters. 27. Oil rectifier disable
20. Current overload If suction gas superheating drops below set point
1 for superheating, the timer will start counting
If the motor current is higher than the set point in
down. Provided the superheating still remains be-
the time stated, the compressor will stop and an
low the limit once the timer has reached 0, a warn-
error message will appear.
ing will be issued to a superior computer.
See also Limiters.
28. Start high pressure
21. Motor start On two-stage plants the HP compressors can be
When the compressor starts, the motor guard started by force by activating the input
must issue a feedback before the timer expires; if External starting permission, normal stop.
not, an error message will appear.
The start will be delayed for the set number of sec-
The green light diode above the starting key A will onds.
flash until feedback has been received whereup-
With the compressors in sequence, number 1 in
on the light will be steady.
the sequence will start and the system will now
22. PMS (Starting request) feedback operate normally.
After the control has issued a starting request, it
29. No Chiller
must receive a feedback within the stated time; if
When UNISAB II is configured as part of a Chiller
control, the timer will ensure that communication
23. F. F. Pump start between UNISAB II and the connected Chiller
In case the motor guard of the full flow pump has does not disappear for a period longer period than
failed to issue a feedback within the stated time af- the set time. If this happens, both UNISAB II and
ter the starting signal, an error message will ap- UNISAB II-Chiller will be stopped by the alarm.
pear.
30. Cap. negative
24. Oil pump start When the compressor is started, the slide must
In case the motor guard of the oil pump has failed move to the position corresponding to the set zero
to issue a feedback within the stated time after the point (ie positive read capacity) as quickly as pos-
starting signal, an error message will appear. sible before the expiry of the cap. negative timer.
25. Oil rectifier start Otherwise an error message will be issued. The
Whenever the compressor starts, this timer will be cap. negative timer counts down each second by
activated and start counting down. When 0 has the value: (corrected capacity)2/5, where corrected
70/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
4. Timers
capacity may be negative values between -0 and 32. Low suction pressure
-30%, ie the timer will count down each second by During start-up and operation the alarm for low
a factor between 1 and 180. suction pressure is delayed for the indicated peri-
Each time the slide moves above 0% capacity, the od of time.
timer will stop. 33. Lubricating pressure
The timer is reset and restarted, as soon as the During start-up and operation the alarm for low
slide moves below -2% corrected capacity. suction pressure is delayed for the indicated peri-
od of time. A warning is issued after 25 seconds.
31. Unloaded start
The timer is used in connection with the compres- 34. Vi-pause
sors FV 17/19. When the compressor motor is The timer is used in connection with GST com-
started, a by-pass solenoid valve for oil discharge pressors, which have a three-stage automatic
will open for the time set. regulation of the volume ratio, 2.2-3.5-5.0. Before
switching from one Vi-step to another, the actual
The timer is used in connection with the compres-
Vi ratio for the compressor must have been
sors FV 24/26. When the compressor motor is
present for at least the indicated time other wise
started and stopped, the slide capacity down sole-
the change of the Vi step will be cancelled.
noid valve will open for the time set.
0178-511 - ENG 71/230

Rev. 2005.03
4. Timers
Reciprocating compressors 8. Take-over max

1. Start-start delay Only used in connection with MULTISAB. See the
section MULTISAB in this manual.
States the number of seconds that must pass from
one compressor starts to the next. If the compres- 9. Take-over delay
sor stops before the timer has reached 0, the timer Only used in connection with MULTISAB. See the
will block restart. section MULTISAB in this manual.
1) For compressors configured with 10. Intermediate pressure low
Rotatune=YES During start the alarm for low intermediate pres-
2) For compressors configured with sure is delayed for the stated time. No delay dur-
Rotatune=NO ing normal operation.
2. Stop-start delay 11. Filter diff. high

States the number of seconds that must pass be- 1. SMC Mk4; during start-up and operation,
fore the compressor can be restarted after stop. the warning for high oil filter differential pres-
This function is not used in MANUAL mode. sure is delayed for the indicated period of
time.
3. Start delay
When UNISAB II is in AUTOMATIC or REMOTE, 2. For SMC Mk3 and earlier versions, this tim-
the compressor start will be delayed for the stated er is not used.
number of seconds. 12. Not used
4. Stop delay 13. Oil pressure low
When UNISAB II is in AUTOMATIC or REMOTE, During start and operation the alarm for low oil
and the compressor is at its lowest capacity stage, pressure is delayed for the stated time.
the timer will start counting down and stop the
14. Oil pressure high
compressor at 0.
During start the alarm for high oil pressure is de-
5. Suction ramp layed for the stated time. No delay during nor-
This timer indicates how fast the compressor is al- mal operation.
lowed to lower its suction pressure 1°C/R. If the
15. Oil temperature low
value is set for 0, this function will be disconnect-
During start the alarm for low oil temperature is
ed.
delayed for the stated time. No delay during nor-
6. Delay up mal operation.
Indicates the time that passes between the load-
16. Oil temp high
ing of stages at increasing capacity in AUTOMAT-
During start the alarm for high oil temperature is
IC or REMOTE mode.
delayed for the stated time. No delay during nor-
7. Delay down mal operation.
Indicates the time that passes between the un-
17. Superheating low
loading of stages at decreasing capacity in AUTO-
During start the alarm for low superheating is de-
MATIC or REMOTE mode.
mal operation.
72/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
4. Timers
18. Superheating high 26. Oil rectifier delay

During start the alarm for high superheating is de- If the suction gas superheating drops below set
layed for the stated time. No delay during nor- point 1 for superheating, the solenoid valve will
mal operation. close. Once the superheating rises above this limit
again, the timer must expire before the solenoid
19. Disch. pressure, overload
valve opens.
In case the discharge pressure is higher than the
warning limit within the stated time, the compres- 27. Oil rectifier disable
sor will stop. If suction gas superheating drops below set point
1 for superheating, the timer will start counting
20. Current overload
down. Provided the superheating still remains be-
In case the motor current is higher than the set
low the limit once the timer has reached 0, a war-
point within the stated time, the compressor will
ning will be issued to a superior computer.
stop.
28. Start high pressure
21. Motor start
On two-stage plants the HP compressors can be
When the compressor starts, the motor guard
started by force by activating the input External
must issue a feedback before the timer expires; if
starting permission, normal stop. The start will
be delayed for the set number of seconds.
22. PMS (Starting request) feedback
With the compressors in sequence, number 1 in
After the control has issued a starting request, it
the sequence will start and the system will now
must receive a feedback within the stated time; if
operate normally.
29. No Chiller
23. Oil cool on
When UNISAB II is configured as part of a Chiller
At compressor stop the outlet for water cooling or
control, this timer will ensure that the communica-
oil cooling will not close until after the set time has
tion between UNISAB II and the connected Chiller
run out.
does not disappear for a period longer than the set
24. Oil return time. If this occurs, both UNISAB II and
At compressor start the outlets for oil return are UNISAB II-Chiller will be stopped by the alarm.
not opened until after the set time has run out.
30. Not used
25. Oil rectifier start 31. Not used
Whenever the compressor starts, the timer will be
32. Low suction pressure
activated and start counting down. When 0 has
During start-up and operation the alarm for low
been reached, the solenoid valve to the oil rectifier
suction pressure is delayed for the indicated peri-
will be activated.
od of time.
33. Not used
34. Not used.
0178-511 - ENG 73/230

Rev. 2005.03
4. Timers
7. P BAND FACTOR - I Sp = Set point

In case of a screw compressor, the following Nz = Neutral zone
picture will appear: Pb = Proportional band
START DELAY 1 Example 1:

STOP DELAY 0 UNISAB II has been set for suction pressure reg-
ulation,
Start delay Sp = -10 °C,
Start delay can be changed in the range from 1 to Nz = 2 K, Pb = 10 K,
100. Stop delay can be changed in the range from START DELAY = 90 sec and FACTOR = 50.
0 to 100. The function of these zones must be
STOP DELAY = 60 sec and FACTOR = 30.
seen in connection with the applied regulator (suc-
tion pressure, brine, etc). In the neutral zone and up to -4°C the compressor
will not be in operation. If the measured suction
If the value 1 is selected, the timer will not start to
pressure is a little higher than -4°C, the START
count until the measured value of the regulator is
DELAY timer will start counting and the compres-
1% inside the proportional band above the neutral
sor will start after 90 seconds. If necessary, a
zone.
compressor start can thus be delayed or blocked.
If the value 100 is selected, the timer will not start
In the neutral zone and up to -14°C the compres-
to count until the measured value of the regulator
sor will be in operation. If the measured suction
is 100% inside the proportional band above the
pressure is a little lower than -14°C and the capac-
neutral zone.
ity slide is below 5%, the STOP DELAY timer will
Whether 1% or 100% is selected, the timer - when start counting and the compressor will stop after
it is started - will count in seconds without exten- 60 seconds.
sion (this is not the case with reciprocating com-
Example 2:
pressors, see next section).
UNISAB II has been set for suction pressure
change,
Stop delay Sp = -20 °C,
If the value 0 is selected, the timer will start to Nz = 4K, Pb = 10 K,
count when the measured value of the regulator is START DELAY = 90 sec and FACTOR = 10.
in the neutral zone.
STOP DELAY = 60 sec and FACTOR = 0.
If the value 1 is selected, the timer will not start to
In the neutral zone and up to -17°C the compres-
count until the measured value of the regulator is
sor will not be in operation. If the measured suc-
1% inside the proportional band below the neutral
tion pressure is a little higher than -17°C, the
zone.
START DELAY timer will start to count and the
If the value 100 is selected, the timer will not start compressor will start after 90 seconds. If neces-
to count until the measured value of the regulator sary, a compressor start can thus be delayed or
is 100% inside the proportional band below the blocked.
neutral zone.
As long as the measured suction pressure is in the
upper proportional band, the compressor will be in
74/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
4. Timers
operation. If the measured suction pressure is a Basically, starting and stopping as well as engag-
little lower than -18°C and the capacity slide is being and disengaging are delayed by the timers
low 5%, the STOP DELAY timer will start to count START DELAY, STOP DELAY, DELAY UP and
and the compressor will stop after 60 seconds. DELAY DOWN. See section Timer description.
In case of a reciprocating compressor, the fol- The relevant timers start as soon as the regulated
lowing picture will appear: input (eg suction pressure) is just outside the neu-
tral zone.
DELAY UP 1
DELAY DOWN 1 There is one P BAND FACTOR for each of these
START DELAY 1 timers.
STOP DELAY 1 If the P BAND FACTOR is 1, the time delay will be
the same no matter if the regulated input is just
Each of these factors can be selected in the range outside the neutral zone or far outside the neutral
1-10. zone.
In AUTO and REMOTE mode, the various By selecting a P BAND FACTOR higher than 1
P BAND FACTORs are influencing the decision of (up to 10), it is possible to have the timer run slow-
when to start or stop the compressor or, for recip- er when the regulated input is close to the neutral
rocating compressors, when to engage or disen- zone as illustrated in the drawing.
gage another capacity stage.
Fig. 4.1
Timer step [sec]

PBF = P.Band Factor
Diff = Measuring value - Setpoint
PBF
1
Diff
-NZ 0 NZ PB
-PB
When the regulated input is outside the P band Example 1:

(PB), the timer will run at normal speed, as it is Suction pressure regulation has been selected.
counting in seconds. When the regulated input is The measured suction pressure equals the set
just outside the neutral zone (NZ), each count- point. The compressor is stopped and ready to
down will last one PBF second. start.
In this way, a compressor start can be delayed or Set point Sp = -10°C/R
blocked if there is no particular cooling require- Nz = 2°C/R
ment. However, if the deviation is large, the timer Pb = 5°C/R
will count down fast and start the compressor. START DELAY = 60 sec
P BAND FACTOR START DELAY = 5.
0178-511 - ENG 75/230

Rev. 2005.03
4. Timers
When the measured suction pressure exceeds If the pressure is still moving upwards and ex-
-9°C/R, the START DELAY timer will begin to ceeds 36°C/R (the Pb limit), the timer will count in
count with an interval of 5 sec (P BAND FACTOR) seconds.
each time the value in the display counts one The resulting total delay will range between 30
down. If the pressure steadies, the timer will run and 90 seconds, after which the compressor will
for 5 x 60 = 300 seconds. disengage one capacity stage.
Should the measuring value reach -6.5°C/R, the
counting interval will be 3 sec. Special timers in connection with
If the pressure is still moving upwards and ex- MULTISAB
ceeds -4°C/R (the Pb limit), the timer will count in Reciprocating compressors
seconds. In the MULTISAB system which regulates and op-
The resulting total delay will range between 60 timizes more than one compressor, there are a
and 300 seconds, after which the compressor will number of factors attached to a TRANS-
start. FER/TAKE-OVER function between reciprocating
and screw compressors. These factors are de-
Example 2:
scribed in detail in section MULTISAB regulation.
Discharge pressure regulation has been selected
on a reciprocating compressor. The measured The factors are found in the pictures:
discharge pressure equals the set point. The com-
pressor is running at 100% capacity. 8. TRANSFER - I Reciprocating
Set point Sp = 30°C/R compressors
Nz = 2°C/R FACTOR DOWN 1
Pb = 5°C/R ZONE 15%
DELAY DOWN = 30 sec
P BAND FACTOR DELAY DOWN = 3.
9. TAKE-OVER - I Reciprocating
When the measured discharge pressure exceeds compressors
31°C/R, the timer DELAY DOWN will begin to
FACTOR UP 1
count with an interval of 3 sec (P BAND FACTOR)
FACTOR START 1
each time the value in the display counts one
ZONE 15%
down. If the pressure steadies, the timer will run
for 3 x 30 = 90 seconds.
Should the measuring value reach 33.5°C/R, the
counting interval will be 2 sec.
76/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
5. MULTISAB
5. MULTISAB
MULTISAB is a distributed compressor control If MULTISAB is to function optimally, it is of vital
system, which is very useful when more compres- importance that certain key parameters are se-
sors are working together (eg connection to the lected correctly by the user as explained in section
same suction line). With MULTISAB it is possible MULTISAB regulation. To understand the con-
to start, stop and capacity regulate compressors tents of the MULTISAB pictures, the following key
according to the varying cooling requirements. parameters are described here: COMPR. NO,
MULTISAB is a standard function in UNISAB II. SYSTEM NO, PREF. MASTER, START NO and
MULTISAB is described in detail in section MUL- CONTROL MODE.
TISAB regulation. Always make sure that all UNISAB II units on a
MULTISAB is only able to work if all UNISAB II network have different COMPR. NOs, ie two units
units which are to participate in the distributed are not allowed to have the same COMPR. NO.
control are physically connected via the Danbuss See section Configuration.
communication network. The section Installation SYSTEM NO informs MULTISAB which com-
of data communication cable describes how to pressors are to work together. The drawing below
connect the units. shows two examples.
Fig. 5.1
SYSTEM NO
= 1 or 2
Compr. 1 Compr. 1
Suction line, subplant 1 SYSTEM NO

= 1 or 2
SYSTEM NO = 1
Compr. 2 Compr. 2
Common Multisab
Multisab network Suction main line 1
network
SYSTEM NO SYSTEM NO = 1
= 1 or 2
Suction main line 2
SYSTEM NO = 2
Compr. 3
Compr. 3
Suction line, subplant 2

SYSTEM NO
SYSTEM NO = 2 = 1 or 2
Compr. 4 Compr. 4
Separated compressor plants Common compressor plant
In the example to the left, two separate compres- • UNISAB No 1 has the same SYSTEMNO as
sor plants are connected on a common Danbuss UNISAB No 2
network. Here it is of vital importance that • UNISAB No 3 has the same SYSTEM NO
as UNISAB No 4
0178-511 - ENG 77/230

Rev. 2005.03
5. MULTISAB
• SYSTEM NO of UNISAB 1 and 2 differs ble if it is shut off, not communicating, not in RE-
from SYSTEM NO of UNISAB 3 and 4. MOTE mode or in shutdown alarm condition. An
In the example to the right, each of the four com- alarm condition may be due to a sensor error, re-
pressors can be connected independently to any sulting in a change of SYS CONTROLLER and
of the two suction main lines. In this example is is thus of sensor.
also important that SYSTEM NO is correct. How- In order for a compressor to become part of a
ever, it is particularly important that when chang- MULTISAB system, the above key parameters
ing the valve settings, the SYSTEM NO in the must be set up. CONTROL MODE must be set for
UNISAB II units in question is changed according- REMOTE. In other words, by changing the CON-
ly as this does not take place automatically. TROL MODE, the user is able to include and ex-
START NO defines the priority of the compres- clude the compressor from the MULTISAB sys-
sors with common SYSTEM NO. The unit with the tem. See section Compressor regulation.
lowest START NO will be the first to start. The MULTISAB functions are found in the menu
PREF. MASTER must be identical for all units SETUP I MULTISAB I
with the same SYSTEM NO. See section Config- MULTISAB
uration. PREF. MASTER specifies whether it is MULTISAB STATE
COMPR. NO or START NO which is to define ALL COMPRESSORS
which UNISAB II is to be SYS CONTROLLER. PARALLEL CONTR.
SYS CONTROLLER is responsible for the co-or-

dination of the involved units. It is the sensor of the 1. MULTISAB STATE - I
SYS CONTROLLER (eg suction pressure input) START NO 1
which is used for the regulation.
SYSTEM NO 1
If PREF. MASTER = #COMPR, the unit with the SYS. CONTROLLER 1
lowest COMPR. NO will be SYS CONTROLLER MAY START
except if the UNISAB II unit in question is shut off
or otherwise unable to communicate. In such cas- Here START NO and SYSTEM NO can be adjust-
es the unit with the next COMPR. NO will take ed in the range 1-14. Furthermore, SYS CON-
over as SYS CONTROLLER. TROLLER shows which unit is the master as ex-
plained above.
If PREF. MASTER = #START, the unit with the
lowest START NO will be SYS CONTROLLER, In the fourth line of the picture, the MULTISAB
but only as long as it is available. If it is not avail- status of the UNISAB II in question is shown. The
able, the unit with the next START NO will take status can be one of the following:
over as SYS CONTROLLER. A unit is not availa-
78/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
5. MULTISAB
State Explanation
BLOCKED The compressor cannot (and is not going to) start MULTISAB now.
NOT MY TURN Another compressor must start before this one / there is no cooling requirement.
MAY START Starts when START DELAY expires as there is now a cooling requirement.
RUNS AT MAX CAP Must run at 100% capacity.
LEAD COMPR. Runs in parallel operation as master.
LAG COMPR. Runs in parallel operation as slave.
MAY STOP Is below 5% capacity, stops when STOP DELAY expires.
RUNS BY ITSELF Is the only compressor in the system that is in operation.
STOP RAMP UP Stops parallel operation, as master - only screw compr.
STOP RAMP DOWN Stops parallel operation, as slave - only screw compr.
2. ALL COMPRESSORS - I Control mode

COMPR. # 01 MANUAL Operating mode of compressor no 01. In this ex-
SYSTEM # 01 ample compressor no. 01 is in MANUAL mode.
START # 02
Control mode be one of the following: STOPPED,
MANUAL, AUTO or REMOTE.
READY 0%
SYSTEM #
This picture makes it possible - from a UNISAB II
SYSTEM NO of compressor no 01.
unit - to see MULTISAB information about the oth-
er compressors in the communication network. START #
START NO of compressor no 01.
COMPR. #
The number of the observed UNISAB II unit. In Status
this example it is compressor no 01. Compressor operating status of compressor no.
01. Operating status can be one of the following:
0178-511 - ENG 79/230

Rev. 2005.03
5. MULTISAB
State Explanation
READY UNISAB II is ready to start.
RUNNING Compressor in operation.
STARTING Compressor motor start-up.
SHUTDOWN In a state of alarm.
PAUSE Waiting for a timer to expire / compressor stopped and in limitation mode.
PRELUB Working on the prelubrication sequence.
CAP SLIDE DOWN Runs the slide down after stop.
RUNS AT OVERL. Motor current too high.
DISCHARGE LIM. Discharge pressure too high.
SUCTION LIM. Suction pressure too low.
STOPPED Compressor cannot start.
Capacity This picture show the numbers of the compres-

Capacity of compressor no 1. sors which come before and after this compressor
in the starting sequence and which can start. The
The picture can of course be used for getting an
last two lines only apply to screw compressors.
overall view of the MULTISAB operation of the
plant. PRECEDING
It may also be used for testing whether the com- The number of the compressor that comes before
munication between the UNISAB II units on the this compressor in the starting sequence - (lower
network is working. In case there is no communi- START NO).
cation to one of the UNISAB II units, the status NEXT
field in line 4 will be replaced by a "?". The number of the compressor which is next in the
starting sequence - (higher START NO)
3. PARALLEL CONTR. - I FOLLOWING
The appearance of this picture depends oN The number of the compressor which follows the
whether configuration point ROTATUNE is set to next compressor in the starting sequence (an
YES or NO on the specific compressor. even higher START NO).
If ROTATUNE is set to NO the picture will appear PARALLEL CAP
as this: The percentage at which MULTISAB is going to
stop this compressor, when this compressor is
PRECEDING 2
one of the two screw compressors that run in par-
NEXT 3
allel.
FOLLOWING 0
OFFSET
PARALLEL CAP 45.0%
Can be set between 0.0% and -20.0%. The OFF-
OFFSET -10.0%
SET value is added to the calculation of PARAL-
LEL CAP. After entering an OFFSET value (not
80/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
5. MULTISAB
0), the PARALLEL CAP value will be reduced ac- FORCING

cordingly. The rotatune compressor is forcing the conven-
This means that the point at which the lag (screw) tional compressors shown in this line (in this case
compressor is stopped is reduced by the OFFSET compressor number 3 and 4).
value. This may be useful when water chillers are EXPECTED
running in parallel as these units may have a rela- This line shows what the conventional compres-
tively better COP at part load (heat transfer being sors are expected to do:
better at part load). Note that the OFFSET value
• START
is not changed by a FACTORY RESET.
• INCREASE
Note: If the offset function is used, you need to
set the offset value for both the lead and lag screw • NOTHING
compressor. • DECREASE
If ROTATUNE is set to YES the picture will appear • STOP
as this:
Note: The start sequence will still be followed.
FORCING 03 04 SIGNAL OUT
EXPECTED INCREASE The rotatune master sends out a regulating signal
SIGNAL OUT 5% to the conventional compressors in the system.
The signal out can vary between -100 and +100
%.
This picture shows how the rotatune master com-
pressor controls the conventional compressors in
the system. The rotatune master also controls the
rotatune slave compressors in the system but this
can not be seen in this picture.
0178-511 - ENG 81/230

Rev. 2005.03
5. MULTISAB
82/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
6. Compressor regulation
Control mode Regulators

The compressor can be adjusted for different UNISAB II includes a number of compressor ca-
modes of operation. These are found in SETUP I pacity regulators. In the modes AUTO and RE-
CONTROL I . MOTE, one (and only one) of these regulators is
COMPRESSOR CONTROL responsible for adjusting the capacity according to
STOPPED the cooling (or heating) requirements. Which reg-
ulator to use is specified in Pos. 3: CONTROL ON
When this picture is selected, the cursor will be in the menu CONFIG. See section Configuration.
positioned in the top line. Press G and the cursor CONTROL ON can be set to one of the following:
moves to the second line.
• SUCTION SIDE
Select the desired mode of operation with J K. • BRINE
There are the following possibilities: • DISCHARGE SIDE
• STOPPED • HOT WATER
• MANUAL • EXT.COOL
• AUTO • EXT.HEAT
• REMOTE Each regulator has its own set of parameters. This
STOPPED means that the compressor is blocked means that when changing the CONTROL ON
and thus cannot start. setting from one regulator to another and back
again, the original parameters are kept.
MANUAL means that the compressor only oper-
ates manually, ie it is not possible to change to an- Each regulator parameter set includes: Set point
other mode by means of C. (SP), Neutral zone (Nz) and Proportional band
(Pb or P Band). Depending on whether PID = YES
The compressor can, however, be started with A
or NO is selected in the picture CONFIG. I REG-
and stopped with B. Capacity is increased/de-
ULATE I PID, PID parameters will also be used
creased with E F.
for screw compressors. See section PID regula-
AUTO means that the compressor runs in local tion below.
automatic operation according to the form of reg-
Set point is the pressure or the temperature de-
ulation chosen (suction pressure, brine, etc). It is
sired in the plant.
possible to change to MANUAL with C.
Neutral zone indicates how much the pressure or
REMOTE means that the compressor works to-
temperature is allowed to fluctuate in relation to
gether with one or more compressors in a com-
the Sp without the compressor changing its ca-
mon MULTISAB control system. It is possible to
pacity. The set value of Nz is positioned symmet-
change to MANUAL with C.
rically around the set point (Sp +/- 1/2 Nz).
Proportional band indicates how powerful the
regulating signal to the compressor capacity reg-
ulation is going to be, depending on the difference
0178-511 - ENG 83/230

Rev. 2005.03
between the desired value (Sp) and the actual val- as the regulating impulse will be very long if the
ue. measured value is outside the P Band. The P
In case the measured value is just outside the Nz, Band is positioned symmetrically around Sp out-
the regulating impulses will be very short, where- side the Nz. See Fig. 6.1.
Fig. 6.1
rapidly up
Very slowly up
SP
P.Band P.Band
Error signal
NZ
Very slowly down
rapidly down
Screw compressors
Screw compressors are capacity regulated (hy- matically by the outer loop. As long as this set
draulically or electrically) by moving the capacity point is constant, the inner loop will ensure that
slide. This takes place via two digital outputs the capacity slide remains in this position, inde-
which are controlled by UNISAB II, so that the pendent of any other outside influences.
slide moves towards max. or min. capacity ac- The outer loop, which is a PID regulator, adjusts
cording to demand. The setting is stepless from 0 the capacity set point according to the selected
to 100%. UNISAB II will usually pulse the digital control set point and measured value, eg the suc-
outputs with a pulse/delay ratio. Consequently, a tion pressure set point and measured value. In
constant up or down signal will rarely be given. MANUAL mode, the outer loop is not active. In
The capacity control must be seen as two PID AUTO and REMOTE, the outer loop is active ac-
control loops (an inner and an outer loop). cording to the CONTROL ON setting. See section
The inner loop, which is a proportional regulator, Regulators.
adjusts the slide position continuously according The inner loop set point can also be controlled via
to the capacity set point. In MANUAL mode the the external input (see section Set point control
capacity set point is selected with the E F keys with current input) or via the communication net-
and in AUTO/REMOTE mode it is selected auto- work.
84/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
PID regulation (outer loop) TRAL ZONE and PROP. BAND are accessible.
On screw compressors a PID regulator is used for The actual parameters are found in the relevant
the outer loop of capacity regulation. In the picture picture, eg SUCT SIDE I SUCT PRESS. Each
SET UP I CONFIG I REGULATE I PID it is parameter is briefly described below. The theory
now possible to select PID = YES or NO. If PID = behind PID regulation is described in innumerable
YES is selected all the parameters stated below books about automatic regulation. These books
are accessible. If PID = NO is selected only pa- also describe methods for optimizing the parame-
rameters ACTUAL SP, SET POINT 1 and 2, NEU- ters
Name Description
ACTUAL SP. The set point which the PID controller works with at the moment.
SET POINT 1 User selected set point 1
SET POINT 2 User selected set point 2
NEUTRAL ZONE The neutral zone is a symmetrical area around ACTUAL SP. When the controlled val-
ue is inside the area, the controller will be passive. The purpose is to increase service
life of the output hardware (relays, valves, spindle motor, etc). However, this is also
partly ensured by the parameter MIN PULSE, see section P regulation (inner loop)
below, which is why the NEUTRAL ZONE can be set at 0. A larger NEUTRAL ZONE
makes the regulation less accurate.
PROP. BAND This parameter decides the total gain in the control loop. Increasing PROP. BAND
will give a slower response. Thus changing PROP. BAND does not only affect the
proportional term, but also the integral and differential terms.
T. INT. Integral Time decides the gain of the integral term. A smaller T. INT means a larger
gain, ie the controller will try to reach the set point faster.
T. DIFF. Differential Time decides the gain of the differential term. A larger T. DIFF means a
larger gain. Normally select T. DIFF = 0 which deactivates the differential term and
thus the regulator will be working as a PI controller.
P. PART This field shows the actual Proportional term calculated by the PID controller.
I. PART This field shows the actual Integral term calculated by the PID controller.
D. PART This field shows the actual Differential term calculated by the PID controller
REG. OUTPUT The actual Regulator Output is the sum of P. PART, I. PART and D. PART.
P regulation (inner loop) point generated by the outer loop. Additionally the
The parameters for the inner loop, which is only a following parameters can be selected:
proportional regulation (P regulator), are set in the • MIN PULSE is the shortest pulse that
picture SET UP I CAPACITY I CAPACITY. The UNISAB II will give on the relay output, eg it
P regulator parameters include ACTUAL SET takes time for a hydraulic valve to open and
POINT, NEUTRAL ZONE, PROP.BAND and close, and for the hydraulic oil to move, so a
P.PART. ACTUAL SET POINT is the capacity set pulse shorter than about half a second
would have no effect and would only short-
0178-511 - ENG 85/230

Rev. 2005.03
en the service life of the valve and the relay. neutral zone is too high, the regulator may fluctu-
A longer MIN PULSE increases the service ate too much.
life of the hardware, but it also makes the If PID = NO is selected, the outer loop is working
regulation less accurate. more moderately than when PID = YES is select-
• RUN TIME is the approximate time it takes ed. A P band of less than 10°C may therefore be
for the capacity slide to move from minimum used. Requirements for the neutral zone are the
position to maximum position and vice versa same as when PID = YES. As already mentioned,
at constant signal. Please note that RUN T.INT. and T.DIFF. are not accessible when PID =
TIME for the capacity slide may be reduced NO.
by variable slide end stop etc where this is
Inner loop
relevant.
As regards the inner loop it is not recommended
to use any other values than the default values for
Regulation of Vi slide Neutral zone (Nz = 0.0) and Proportional band (P
If there is automatic Vi slide control, it works the band = 200%).
same way as the inner loop with the one exception The parameter MIN PULSE determines the pulse
that UNISAB II calculates the position set point duration up or down every time the solenoid valve
according to the actual suction and discharge is activated. If the value is high, a correspondingly
pressure. The parameters are available in the pic- large capacity change is required before the regu-
ture SET UP I CAPACITY I Vi POSITION. lator reacts with an up or down signal. This is a
kind of neutral zone. Default value is 0.5 seconds
Setting the regulator and should not be higher than 2 seconds.
With version 2.01, the PID regulator was intro- The parameter RUN TIME defines how long it will
duced to replace the previous “three-point I regu- take to run the slide from 0-100% at constant up
lator”. As from version 2.03.2 it is possible to se- signal or from 100-0% at constant down signal.
lect PID = YES or NO. If PID = NO is selected the Usually slide speed is always adjusted on the oil
regulator works approximately like the former I needle valves positioned on the capacity regulat-
regulator. Irrespective of whether PID = YES or ing block so that the slide speed is approx. 60 sec-
NO is selected, it is recommended to begin with onds when the oil is warm from operation. This ad-
the factory values and then, if necessary, adjust justment is usually carried out by the service engi-
the values to the conditions of the actual plant. neer who starts up the compressor unit.
Outer loop If the slide speed for some reason cannot be ad-
If PID = YES is selected, it is not recommended to justed for 60 seconds, the RUN TIME parameter
adjust the P band further down than 10°C and must be changed so that run time corresponds to
T.INT. further down than 30 seconds. Higher val- the actual operating conditions. If this is not done,
ues may very well occur. it will appear as if the PID regulator is out of control
T.DIFF. is usually always 0. and it may cause hunting.
The neutral zone can be set for 0.4°C or higher if Example 1
it is not required that the suction pressure is kept A screw compressor with a combination of slide
as narrow as possible around the set point. If the regulation and frequency regulation has a slide
86/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
velocity at 60 seconds from 0-100% slide move- Usually it will never be necessary to change the T.
ment. Depending on min. and max. frequency this DIFF. to a value different than 0 sec. However, in
is shown as eg 0-42% capacity on the UNISAB II special cases where the compressor is part of a
display. When the slide has reached 100%, the process plant, eg. in petrochemical plants, it may
frequency converter will start to increase the fre- be necessary to use another value than 0 sec.
quency to the max. frequency set. This will take 60 This will only be necessary if the process requires
seconds and be shown as 42-100% in the a very fast regulation upwards or downwards to
UNISAB II display. Thus the RUN TIME parame- avoid that the suction pressure removes itself too
ter must be set for 60+60=120 seconds for correct far from the set point.
regulation.
For screw compressors connected to frequency
Reciprocating compressors are capacity regulat-
converters see also the separate UNISAB II Rota-
ed in stages by connection/disconnection of cylin-
tune appendix.
ders, typically in pairs, through solenoid valves
Example 2 controlled by UNISAB II.
PID = YES
How fast the compressor loads/unloads stages is
Values for outer loop:
determined by the timers DELAY UP and DELAY
Nz = 0.0
DOWN, which will start counting as soon as the
P band = 10.0
value is outside the neutral zone.
T. INT. = 60.0
T. DIFF. = 0.0 The regulator is allowed to have a P Band of 0,
which means that the stages are loaded in sec-
If the compressor is running very unsteadily dur-
onds as set.
ing regulation or two compressors cannot find one
another in parallel operation, raise the P band to If the P Band is above 0, the delay times can be
eg. 50°C. prolonged as long as the value is within the P
Band.
If the running of the compressor has steadied, but
the regulator seems slow to reach its set point, re- The P Band is only relevant if the P Band factors
duce the P band a little at a time until the running DELAY UP and/or DELAY DOWN are set in the
of the compressor becomes unsteady again. Now picture P BAND FACTOR at a value above 1. See
raise the P band to the last applicable value. If the P BAND FACTOR in section Timers.
suction pressure still does not reach its set point If the value is just outside the neutral zone and the
(depending on the setting of Nz) a reduction in the P Band factor DELAY UP is eg 10, counting will be
integral-time can be necessary to fine-tune the slow: "1 sec." becomes 10 sec.
regulator.
If the value is just outside the P Band, counting will
If the regulator during a long period of time seems be speeded up, "1 sec" becomes 1 sec.
to hunt, increase the T. INT. to eg. 100-200 sec. If
For reciprocating compressors connected to fre-
the hunting stops, reduce the T. INT. until the sys-
quency converters see also the separate UNISAB
tem starts hunting again. Now increase the T. INT.
II Rotatune appendix.
to the last applicable value.
0178-511 - ENG 87/230

Rev. 2005.03
Input signal
0 5 10 15 Time
Output signal
P-part B
A: Proportional band=10°C A
B: Proportional band=5°C
0 5 10 15 Time
Output signal
I-part C
D
C: Integral time=30 sec
D: Integral time=60 sec
0 5 10 15 Time
88/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
Output signal
D-part
F
E: Differential time=10 sec E
F: Differential time=20 sec
0 5 10 15 Time
Output signal
PID-part
0 5 10 15 Time
0178-511 - ENG 89/230

Rev. 2005.03
Table 9A - Settings - Regulating parameters, Reciprocating compressors

Regulator type Minimum Maximum Factory Unit
setting
Suct. pressure Sp 1 -1 +9 +1 BAR

(-90) (+ 24.8)1* (-19.4) °C/R717
Sp 2 -1 +9 +1 BAR
(-90) (+ 24.8)1* (-19.4) °C/R717
Nz 0 100 4 °C
Pb 0 100 10 °C
Brine temperature Sp 1 - 60 + 100 20 °C
Sp 2 - 60 + 100 20 °C
Nz 0 100 4 °C
Pb 0 100 5 °C
Disch. side Sp 1 -1 + 24 +8 BAR

(-90) (+ 58)2* (+ 21.4) °C/R717
Sp 2 -1 + 24 +8 BAR
(-90) (+ 58)2* (+ 21.4) °C/R717
Nz 0 100 4 °C
Pb 0 100 10 °C
Hot water Sp 1 - 60 + 100 20 °C
Sp 2 - 60 + 100 20 °C
Nz 0 100 4 °C
Pb 0 100 5 °C
Ext. cool Universal regulator Sp 1 - 999 + 999 0 -
Sp 2 - 999 + 999 0 -
Nz 0 + 999 0 -
Pb 0 + 999 0 -
Ext. heat Universal regulator Sp 1 - 999 + 999 0 -
Sp 2 - 999 + 999 0 -
Nz 0 + 999 0 -
Pb 0 + 999 0 -
Motor current limiter Sp 1 0 2500 2500 Amp
Sp 2 0 2500 2500 Amp
NOTE: 1* HPO/HPC +25 bar (+60°/R717) 2* HPO/HPC +40 bar (+79.4°/R717)
90/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
Table 9B - Settings - Regulating parameters, Screw compressors

Regulator type Minimum Maximum Factory setting Unit
Capacity control Nz 0.0 10.0 0.0 %
Pb 0.1 999.9 200.0 %
Min. Pulse 1.0 50.0 1.0 sec
Run Time 1.0 999.0 See note 1 sec
Vi slide control, Com- Nz 0.0 10.0 4.0 %

pressors with automatic
Vi regulation Pb 0.1 999.9 200.0 %
Min. Pulse 1.0 10.0 1.0 sec
Run Time 1.0 999.0 See note 1 sec
Suct. pressure Sp 1 -1 +9 +1 BAR

(-90) (+24.8) (-19.4) °C/R717
Sp 2 -1 +9 +1 BAR
(-90) (+24.8) (-19.4) °C/R717
Nz 0.0 200.0 0.0 °C/R717
Pb 0.1 999.9 10.0 °C/R717
(T.Int.) Only 0.5 999.9 60.0 sec

when PID=YES
(T.Diff.) Only 0.0 99.9 0.0 sec

when PID=YES
Brine temperature Sp 1 -60 100 20 °C
Sp 2 -60 100 20 °C
Nz 0.0 100 0 °C
Pb 0.1 999.9 50 °C
(T.Int.) Only 0.5 999.9 30.0 sec

when PID=YES
(T.Diff.) Only 0.0 99.9 0 sec

when PID=YES
Discharge Sp 1 -1 +24 +8 BAR

(90) (+58) (+21.4) °C/R717
Sp 2 -1 +24 +8 BAR
(90) (+58) (+21.4) °C/R717
Nz 0.0 200 0.0 °C/R717
Pb 0.1 999.9 10 °C/R717
(T.Int.) Only 0.5 999.9 60.0 sec

when PID=YES
(T.Diff.) Only 0.0 99.9 0 sec

when PID=YES
0178-511 - ENG 91/230

Rev. 2005.03
Regulator type Minimum Maximum Factory setting Unit
Hot water Sp 1 -60 100 20 °C
Sp 2 -60 100 20 °C
Nz 0.0 100 0 °C
Pb 0.1 999.9 50 °C
(T.Int.) Only 0.5 999.9 30.0 sec

when PID=YES
(T.Diff) Only 0.0 99.9 0.0 sec

when PID=YES
Ext. cool Sp 1 -999 +999 0

Universal
regulator Sp 2 -999 +999 0
Nz 0 999.9 0
Pb 0 999.9 100
(T.Int.) Only 0.5 999.9 30 sec

when PID=YES
(T.Diff) Only 0.0 99.9 0 sec

when PID=YES
Ext. heat Sp 1 -999 +999 0

Universal
regulator Sp 2 -999 +999 0
Nz 0 999.9 0
Pb 0 999.9 100
(T.Int.) Only 0.5 999.9 30 sec

when PID=YES
(T.Diff) Only 0.0 99.9 0 sec

when PID=YES
Motor current Sp 1 0 2500 2500 Amp
Limiter Sp 2 0 2500 2500 Amp
Note 1. Run Time factory settings are as follows:
SAB 330 S SAB 330 L SAB 330 E Others
Cap. Run Time 41 56 74 60
Vi Run Time 19 24 31 60
92/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
Table 9C - Settings - Regulating parameters, SAB 330

Regulator type Factory setting SAB 330
Hydraulic Mechanical
Capacity control Nz 0 2
Pb 200 200
Min. Pulse 1 2
Run time See note 1 See note 1
Vi slide control, com- Nz 4 10
pressors with automatic
Pb 200 200
Vi regulation
Min. Pulse 1 1
Run time See note 1 See note 1
Set points on regulators pressures on K until reaching the bottom of the

All regulators for capacity regulation (suction picture.
pressure, brine temp, etc) can have two 2 set CONTROL ON = DISCHARGE
points which are selected by opening/closing a The pressure is measured by the built-in pressure
digital input named REGULATOR SET POINT 1 transducer on the compressor discharge side.
OR 2 (see wiring diagrams).
The regulator is set by selecting DISCH. SIDE I
Note that also the Motor Current Limiter has two DISCH.PRESS I PARAMETERS followed by re-
set points, which are selected with another digital peated pressures on K until reaching the bottom
input named MOTOR CURRENT SET POINT 1 of the picture. Note that the Neutral zone and the
OR 2. P Band can only be selected when the pressure is
CONTROL ON = SUCTION shown in °C/R.
The pressure is measured by the built-in pressure CONTROL ON = HOT WATER
transducer on the compressor suction side. The hot water temperature is measured by a Pt
The regulator is set by selecting SUCTION I 100 sensor connected to the brine temperature in-
SUCT.PRESS I PARAMETERS followed by re- put (see wiring diagrams). Position the sensor on
peated pressures on K until reaching the bottom the spot where the temperature is to be regulated.
of the picture. Note that the Neutral zone and the The sensor is not built into the compressor.
P Band can only be selected when the pressure is The regulator is set by selecting BRINE I BRINE
shown in °C/R. TEMP I PARAMETERS followed by repeated
CONTROL ON = BRINE pressures on K until reaching the bottom of the
The brine temperature is measured by a Pt 100 picture.
sensor on the spot where the temperature is to be Note that the BRINE REGULATOR at this stage
regulated. The sensor is not built into the com- functions as a HOT WATER REGULATOR. The
pressor. difference is that the compressor will load capacity
The regulator is set by selecting BRINE I BRINE at decreasing temperature.
TEMP I PARAMETERS followed by repeated
0178-511 - ENG 93/230

Rev. 2005.03
Universal regulator (Ext. input) Ext. heat

In addition to the above-mentioned regulators the If selecting this function, the compressor will reg-
universal regulator can also be used. ulate the capacity upwards in case of decreasing
measuring value.
To do so, connect a 4-20 mA sensor (pressure,
temperature or other) to the UNISAB II input Now select menu BRINE I EXT. INPUT I PA-
named POSSIBLE REMOTE COMPRESSOR RAMETERS. Press to the bottom of the picture
OPERATION. with K where the set values of the regulator are
positioned. These can be set by pressing G fol-
When selecting 4-20 mA input in the menu CALI-
lowed by J or K.
BRATE, the following picture will appear:
4 mA 0
20 mA 0
Set point control with current input
NOT USED The set points of SUCTION PRESSURE, BRINE
TEMPERATURE, DISCH.PRESSURE, HOT WA-
The signal must be scaled to fit the sensor meas- TER and CAPACITY can all be changed through
uring range. a 4-20 mA signal.
Ex.: A temperature sensor of -30°C to +20°C is Connect these to the terminals as shown in the
used. wiring diagrams.
The cursor is positioned on 4 mA. Press G and
the cursor moves to the right. Change the value to Suction pressure
-30 and press G .
In the menu CONFIG SUCTION SIDE must be se-
Move the cursor down to 20 mA, press G and lected in the line CONTROL ON. Select 4-20 mA
the cursor moves right once more. Change the INPUT I in the menu CALIB, and the following
value to +20 and press G . picture will appear:
Move the cursor down to USED FOR, press G 4 mA 0
and the cursor moves to the right. Select EXTER- 20 mA 0
NAL INPUT SIGNAL by means of J or K. NOT USED
The picture will now look like this: Ex.: The set point is to vary from -50 to -10°C/R
4 mA -30 corresponding to a change of the current signal
20 mA 20 from 4 - 20 mA.
EXTERNAL INPUT SIGNAL
The cursor is positioned on 4 mA. Press G until
Each measuring signal can be scaled in accord- the cursor moves to the right, and change the val-
ance with the transducer measuring range. ue to -50 with K, then press G again.
In the menu CONFIG, select in line CONTROL Move the cursor to 20 mA, Press G until the cur-
ON one of the following: sor moves to the left, and change the value -10,
press G again.
Ext. cool
If selecting this function, the compressor will reg-
ulate the capacity upwards in case of increasing
measuring value.
94/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
Move the cursor to third line, press G until the The picture will now look like this:
cursor moves to the right, and select 4 mA -10
SUCT.PRESSURE SETPOINT with J or K. Fin- 20 mA 20
ish by pressing G. BRINE TEMP. SETPOINT
The picture will now look like this: The set point of the brine regulator is now going to
4 mA -50 change from -10 to +20°C corresponding to a
20 mA -10
change of the current from 4-20 mA.
SUCTION PRESS. SETPOINT
It is possible to follow the set point value by select-
The set point of the suction pressure regulator is ing BRINE I BRINE TEMP I PARAMETERS
to vary from -50 to -10°C/R corresponding to a and press downwards to ACTUAL SP with K.
change in the current from 4-20 mA.
It is possible to follow the set point value by select- Disch. pressure
ing SUCTION SIDE I SUCTION PRESSURE I In the menu CONFIG DISCH.SIDE must be se-
PARAMETERS and press downwards to ACTU- lected in the line CONTROL ON. Select 4-20 mA
AL SP with K. INPUT I in the menu CALIB, and the following
picture will appear:
Brine temperature 4 mA 0
20 mA 0
In the menu CONFIG BRINE must be selected in
NOT USED
the line CONTROL ON. Select 4-20 mA INPUT I
in the menu CALIB, and the following picture will Ex.: The setpoint is to vary from +10 to +35°C/R
appear: corresponding to a change of the current signal
4 mA 0 from 4-20 mA.
20 mA 0
NOT USED
The cursor is positioned on 4 mA. Press G until
the cursor moves to the right. Change the value to
Ex.: The set point is to vary from -10 to +20°C cor- +10 with J, then press G again.
responding to a change of the current signal from Move the cursor down to 20 mA. Press G until
4 - 20 mA. the cursor moves to the right. Change the value to
The cursor is positioned on 4 mA. Press G until +35, and press G.
the cursor moves to the right. Change the value to Move the cursor down to third line. Press G until
-10 with K, then press G again. the cursor moves to the right, and select DISCH.
Move the cursor down to 20 mA. Press G until PRESSURE SET POINT with J or K. Finish by
the cursor moves to the right. Change the value to pressing G.
+20, and press G. The picture will now look like this:
Move the cursor down to CONTROL ON. Press 4 mA 10
G until the cursor moves to the right, and select 20 mA 35
BRINE TEMP SET POINT with J or K . Finish by DISCH. PRESS. SETPOINT
pressing G.
0178-511 - ENG 95/230

Rev. 2005.03
The set point of the discharge pressure regulator It is possible to follow the setpoint value by select-
is now going to change from +10 to +35°C/R cor- ing BRINE I BRINE TEMP I PARAMETERS
responding to a change of the current from 4-20 and press downwards to ACTUAL SP with K .
mA.
It is possible to follow the set point value by select- Capacity control
ing DISCH.SIDE I DISCH.PRESS I PARAME- UNISAB II must be set in REMOTE mode in the
TERS and press downwards to ACTUAL SP with picture CONTROL.
K.
In the menu CALIB, select 4-20 mA INPUT I, and
the following picture will appear:
Hotwater 4 mA 0
In the menu CONFIG, HOTWATER must be se- 20 mA 0
lected in the line CONTROL ON. Select 4-20 mA NOT USED
INPUT I in the menu CALIB, and the following

Ex.: The set point of the capacity slide on a screw
picture will appear:
compressor is to vary from 0 to 100% correspond-
4 mA 0
ing to a change in the current signal from 4-20 mA.
20 mA 0
NOT USED The cursor is positioned on 4 mA. Press G until
the cursor moves to the right, and change the val-
Ex.: The set point is to vary from +30 to +65°C cor- ue to 0 (skip this if the value is 0) with J or K, and
responding to a change in the current signal from press G again.
4-20 mA.
Move the cursor down to 20 mA. Press G until
The cursor is positioned on 4 mA. Press G until the cursor moves to the right, and change the val-
the cursor moves to the right, and change the value to 100, and press G.
ue to +30 with K, then press G again.
Move the cursor down to USED FOR. Press G
Move the cursor down to 20 mA. Press G until until the cursor moves to the right, and select CA-
the cursor moves to the right. Change the value to PACITY SET POINT with J or K. Finish by press-
+65, and press G. ing G.
Move the cursor down to USED FOR, press G The picture will now look like this:
until the cursor moves to the right, and select
4 mA 0
HOTWATER SET POINT with J or K. Finish by 20 mA 100
pressing G. CAPACITY SETPOINT
The picture will now like this:

The capacity slide will now move from 0% to
4 mA +30
100% corresponding to a change in the current
20 mA +65
HOT WATER SETPOINT
from 4 - 20 mA.
In the same way it is possible to control the capac-
The setpoint in the hotwater regulator now chang- ity on a reciprocating compressor.
es from +30 to +65°C, corresponding to a change
in the current from 4-20 mA. The reciprocating compressor changes one ca-
pacity stage up or down depending on whether
96/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
the signal is above or below the percentage corre- timer STOP DELAY will be activated when the sig-
sponding to the capacity stage in question. The nal is below 0%. When the STOP DELAY timer
timers DELAY UP and DELAY DOWN, which are has finished counting down, the compressor will
used during the loading/unloading of capacity stop.
stages, are now active when capacity regulation In case the current signal drops to -10% (2.4 mA),
takes place with an external 4-20 mA signal (ap- there will be a change to the chosen form of regu-
plies to version 1.08 and later versions). This lation (eg suction pressure regulation, brine regu-
means that for an SMC 108 without total unload- lation, etc). If the signal exceeds -10% once more,
ing the following changes apply: there will be a change to capacity remote control.
0% ≤ Signal < 25% = 0% capacity, When UNISAB II is configured to "capacity set
25% ≤ Signal < 50% = 25% capacity, point", the starting number is changed to 0. The
50% ≤ Signal < 75% = 50% capacity, "old" starting number is stored and reinserted in
75% ≤ Signal < 100% = 75% capacity, case UNISAB II is configured differently from "ca-
100% ≤ Signal = 100% capacity. pacity set point".
This works as follows:
Start Climatic Control
When the signal is above 5% (4.8 mA) and AUTO This function can be used for both reciprocating
START = YES has been configured, the timer and screw compressors without automatic Vi reg-
START DELAY will begin to count down (in case ulation. The function is included in the menu CON-
of screw compressors). FIG and is further described in section Configura-
For reciprocating compressors, the timer START tion.
DELAY will start once the signal is above the low- The set point of the inlet temperature on the water
est capacity stage. When the timer START DE- side of plants that are regulated on brine temper-
LAY has counted down, the compressor will start ature or hot water temperature can be dislocated
and follow the signal up/down. Note, however, by the outside temperature. This requires a 4 - 20
that various limiters may reduce the compressor mA temperature transducer, which is connected
capacity. to the current inlet in UNISAB II as shown in the
Stop wiring diagrams positioned at the end of this man-
When the signal is below 5% (4.8 mA) and AUTO ual.
STOP = YES has been configured, the timer Use a standard temperature transducer with a
STOP DELAY will stop counting down (in case of suitable temperature range, eg -30 - +25°C as
screw compressors). For reciprocating compres- shown in Fig. 6.2. Note that the points of disconti-
sors, the timer STOP DELAY will start once the nuity in the diagram will be determined by the
signal is below the lowest capacity stage. For re- transducer measuring range as seen in the follow-
ciprocating compressors with total unloading, the ing examples 1 and 2.
0178-511 - ENG 97/230

Rev. 2005.03
Fig. 6.2 Fig. 6.3
T inlet T inlet
Sp 1 (+65 5
°C)
14
Sp 2 12 Sp 1
(+25 °C) T out
5
10
4 mA 20 mA
8
(30 °C) (+25 °C)
6
No further compensation will be made once the
Sp 2 4
outside temperature is above the top point of dis-
continuity and below the bottom point of disconti-
2
nuity.
T out
The factor by which the outside temperature will
-10 10 20 30 40
influence the inlet temperature positively or nega-
tively must be set in the BRINE, HOTWATER or In the drawing the settings are SP1 = 12°C at To
UNIVERSAL regulator. In the picture CONFIG, = 0°C and SP2 = 4°C at To = 30°C.
select CONTROL ON = BRINE or HOTWATER, Note that SP1 belongs to the lowest and SP2 to
or (UNIVERSAL regulator) EXT.COL/EXT. HEAT highest outside temperature.
as well as CLIMA CONTROL = YES in the menu
The straight line in Fig. 6.3 shows how the inlet
CONFIG.
temperature is going to vary under the influence of
Example 1: the outside temperature.
On a water cooling unit, the inlet temperature is to
Select the menu BRINE I BRINE TEMP I PA-
be corrected by the outside temperature.
RAMETERS and go down to SET POINT 1 and
1) If the outside temperature is +30 °C or more, SET POINT 2 with K.
the inlet temperature should be +4°C.
Give SET POINT 1 the value SP1 = 12°C from
2) If the outside temperature is +0°C or less, Fig. 6.3 by pressing G.
the inlet temperature should be +12°C.
Give SET POINT 2 the value SP2 = 4°C from
In the menu CONFIG, set CONTROL ON on Fig. 6.3 by pressing G.
BRINE and CLIMA CONTROL on YES. Select an
At the same time set NEUTRAL ZONE = 3°C and
outside sensor with a range of 0 - +30 °C.
PROP.BAND = 10°C as starting points.
The system is now adjusted to the desired func-
tion.
98/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
The picture will now look like this: Fig. 6.4

SET POINT 1 12 °C
T Inlet
SET POINT 2 0 °C
NEUTRAL ZONE 3 °C
80
PROP. BAND 10 °C
70
SP1
The ACTUAL SP shows the value according to 60
50
which the inlet temperature is regulated at that
SP2 40
particular moment. If the outside temperature is
30
30°C, this value must be 4°C. 20
If the outside temperature is 0°C, the value must 10
T out
be 12°C.
-20 -10 10 20 30 40
The outside temperature can be seen in % of the
measuring range in the picture CAPACITY: In the drawing the settings are SP1 = 65°C at To
CAPACITY XXX A = -10°C and SP2 = 40°C at To = 30°C.
NOT USED XX Note that SP1 belongs to the lowest and SP2 to
OUTSIDE TEMP. XX % the highest outside temperature.
The straight line indicates how the inlet tempera-
Example 2:
ture is going to vary under the influence of the out-
On a heat pump unit the inlet temperature is to be
side temperature.
corrected by the outside temperature.
Select menu BRINE I BRINE TEMP I PARAM-
1) If the outside temperature is +30°C, the inlet
ETERS and go down to SET POINT 1 and SET
temperature must be +40 °C.
POINT 2.
2) If the outside temperature is-10°C, the inlet
Give SET POINT 1 the value SP1 = 65°C from the
temperature must be +65 °C.
figure by pressing G.
In the menu CONFIG, adjust CONTROL ON to
Give SET POINT 2 the value SP2 = 40°C from the
HOTWATER and CLIMA CONTROL to YES.
figure by pressing G.
Select an outside sensor in the range -10 - +30 °C.
At the same time set NEUTRAL ZONE = 3°C and
PROP.BAND = 10°C as starting points.
The system is now adjusted to the desired func-
tion.
SET POINT 1 65 °C
SET POINT 2 40 °C
NEUTRAL ZONE 3 °C
PROP. BAND 10 °C
The ACTUAL SP shows the value according to

which the inlet temperature is regulated at that
particular moment. If the outside temperature is
30°C, this value must be 40°C.
0178-511 - ENG 99/230

Rev. 2005.03
If the outside temperature is -10°C, the value must The slide speed is checked with the compressor in
be 65°C. MANUAL mode, at normal oil temperature and by
The outside temperature can be seen in % of the activating E F used for capacity regulation.
measuring range in the picture CAPACITY: With the slide in minimum position (< 5%) and with
CAPACITY XXX A a constant pressure on E (capacity up), it takes
NOT USED XX about 60 sec for the slide to move to 100%, and
OUTSIDE TEMP. XX % with a constant pressure on F (capacity down)
approx. 60 sec to move down to 0%.
Examples 1) and 2) precondition that the flow
temperature is measured with the normal Pt 100 Is this not the case, adjust the throttle valves.
input, but if a temperature transducer of 4-20 mA
is installed in a common reservoir, the outdoor Volume ratio slide
compensation will also be able to work here. The volume ratio slide is moved by adding or re-
See section Universal regulator in which the pro- moving oil for the slide piston cylinder. The move-
cedure will be exactly the same as described in ment is controlled by UNISAB II, which activates
above examples as this regulator can also be the solenoid valves in the oil lines, thus moving
used for both COOLING and HEATING functions. the slide in the desired direction. If this movement
takes place too fast, the system will become very
In both examples the inlet temperature will rise at
unstable and give rise to unnecessary wear and
falling outside temperatures.
tear of the slide.
If the opposite effect is required, ie rising inlet tem-
To prevent the above, adjustable throttle valves
perature at rising outside temperature, SP1 and
have been built into the oil lines and by changing
SP2 must be switched.
the opening degree of the throttle valves, the slide
movement can be adjusted to a suitable speed.
Adjusting slide speed (screw
The speed is checked with the compressor in
compressors with hydraulic slides)
MANUAL mode and at a normal oil temperature.
Capacity slide Bring the capacity slide to 20-30% position.
The capacity slide is moved by adding or remov- Select picture CAPACITY I VI POSITION I SET
ing oil from the slide piston cylinder. The move- POINT 1.
ment is controlled by UNISAB II, which activates SETPOINT 1 0.0%
the solenoid valves in the oil lines, thus moving

the slide in the desired direction. If this movement and change the value to -10% by pressing G and
takes place too fast, the system will become very K. This will make the slide move to minimum po-
unstable and give rise to unnecessary wear and sition.
tear of the slide. Return to VI POSITION to check the slide move-
To prevent the above, adjustable throttle valves ment.
have been built into the oil lines and by changing When the slide has reached minimum, change
the opening degree of the throttle valves, the slide SET POINT 1 to 110%. The slide will now move to
movement can be adjusted to a suitable speed. maximum position. Check the speed of the move-
100/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
ment from 0% to 100% in the picture with VI PO- In case the calculated zero point cannot be set
SITION. within a certain time limit, which is dependent on
The movement from 0% to 100% must be adjust- the calculated movement, an alarm will be issued.
ed on the throttle valves to last approx. 120 sec. When the compressor stops, the slide will drop to
This also applies to the movement from 100% to the calculated zero point. The motor will stop, and
0%. hereafter the slide will be pushed down to the
Use SET POINT 1 with either - 10% or 110% to physical zero position by the built-in spring.
move the slide back and forth until the speed is Once the differential pressure across the com-
correct. pressor has been equalized (Π=1), the calculated
zero point and the physical zero position will be
Variable Zero position the same.
In general If the pressure conditions are changed during op-

The flow of screw compressors at low slide posi- eration so that the calculated "zero point" of the
tions seen in relation to the fully loaded "flow", is slide is moved (whereby the corrected capacity is
strongly dependent on the operating conditions. changed), the capacity may be a negative value
Thus, it has turned out to be expedient to enter a for a certain period.
"floating zero point", which ensures that the com- For all other screw compressor types than SAB
pressor operates with a correct slide position. 202 a "zero point" can be set manually, if required.
The program in UNISAB II ensures that the SAB This manually set zero point has the same func-
202 compressor always adapts to the variable option as described above in the sections for com-
erating conditions. pressor start and stop.
Based on discharge pressure, suction pressure,

compressor type and capacity, UNISAB II calcu-
Corrected capacity
lates a "zero point" below which the compressor UNISAB II will automatically correct the capacity
capacity slide is not permitted to drop while the reading in relation to both the new calculated zero
compressor is operating. point and to the Vi slide position when automatic
Vi regulation is included.
When the compressor starts, the new "zero point"
will be calculated, and the capacity slide moves as With manual Vi regulation the capacity reading is
quickly as possible from a physical zero point (me- automatically corrected in relation to the new cal-
chanical impact) to the calculated zero. As long as culated zero point.
the slide position is below the calculated zero
Remember that whenever the Vi slide is moved
point, the capacity is shown as a negative value in
manually, the position transmitter of the capacity
the display.
slide must be recalibrated at 100%.
The corrected capacity is calculated according to
the following principle:
0178-511 - ENG 101/230

Rev. 2005.03
Fig. 6.5
0% 100%
Corrected capacity
Pressure cond.
1.5 12 25 Volume cond.: 4.5 3 2
Cap. slide
Measured slide pos.
0% 100%
0% Zero% pos. 100% 0%

“Zero slide” “Vi slide”
The capacity slide signal from the position trans- pacity slide is not allowed to drop while the com-
mitter is scaled in such a way that 0% is read pressor is operating.
when the slide position corresponds to the calcu- For SAB 202S and SAB 202L, which have auto-
lated/set zero point, and 100% is read when the matic settings of the zero point, manual setting is
capacity slide meets the Vi slide, regardless of usually not allowed.
whether the setting is carried out automatically or
The manual setting of the zero point is carried out
manually.
in the picture SETUP I CONFIG. in the configu-
ration point:
Automatic setting of new zero point
(SAB 202) MANUAL ZERO 0.0%
The zero point for the various types of SAB 202 is The setting ranges between 0-40% of max. ca-
calculated according to a programmed algorithm. pacity slide travel (at Vi ratio = 2).
The current calculated value of the zero point is With manual Vi regulation the zero point is cor-
displayed in picture: rected automatically by a factor that depends on
an optimum (calculated) setting of the Vi-slide.
SETUP I DIAGNOSIS I ZERO CAPACITY
Consequently, it is very important that the set-
POS.
ting of the Vi slide is correct.
With manual Vi regulation the zero point is correct-
The setting will be stored when the compressor
ed and set automatically, corresponding to an op-
stops and/or UNISAB II is switched off.
timum setting of the Vi slide. Consequently, it is of
great importance that the setting of the Vi slide
is correct. Built-in spacer block
If the compressor has a built-in spacer block and
Manual setting of new zero point (all Vi regulation is automatic, the MECHANICAL
types of screw compressors) ZERO must be set on YES. Thus, the travel of the
capacity slide will be reduced by the % value
For all screw compressor types without automat-
[0-40%] which is entered in MANUAL ZERO so
ic zero point setting, it is possible to set a "zero
that the corrected capacity may be calculated and
point" manually, below which the compressor ca-
shown correctly.
102/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
The value [0-40%] that must be entered in MAN- pressor run for too long a period with a negative
UAL ZERO must have the following size: capacity.
Fig. 6.6
Configuration
length of spacer block To obtain a correct calculation of the zero point, it
manual zero = 100%
length of total capacity travel is important that the compressor type and swept
volume have been entered correctly.
Setting of MECHANICAL ZERO is carried out in
The swept volume of the compressor is deter-
the picture SETUP I CONFIG. in the configura-
mined on the basis of:
tion point:
Compressor type
MECHANICAL ZERO [NO/YES]
RPM (50/60 Hz)
MANUAL ZERO 0.0%
Male/female rotor
The position transmitter is calibrated with the
In case of SAB 202, UNISAB II will automatically
spacer block mounted and the Vi-slide in minimum
enter a swept volume value corresponding to the
(0%).
S type with Male rotor and a 2-pole 50 Hz motor,
ie 1229 m3/h. The correct swept volume must be
The alarm based on the number of revolutions of the com-
In case the slide cannot reach the position corre- pressor, ie 50/60 Hz supply, and on whether the
sponding to a calculated or set zero point (ie a compressor has male or female rotor drive:
positive read capacity) before the expiry of the
SAB 202 SM/ 50 Hz, swept volume = 1229 m3/h
timer Tcap.neg., the compressor will be stopped with
SAB 202 SM/ 60 Hz, swept volume = 1475 m3/h
the following alarm: SAB 202 SF/ 50 Hz, swept volume = 1843 m3/h
CAPACITY ERROR SAB 202 SF/ 60 Hz, swept volume = 2212 m3/h
Each second the timer Tcap.neg. is counting down by SAB 202 LM/ 50 Hz, swept volume = 1590 m3/h
a factor somewhere between 1 and 180 depend- SAB 202 LM/ 60 Hz, swept volume = 1908 m3/h
SAB 202 LF/ 50 Hz, swept volume = 2385 m3/h
ing upon the read negative capacity. Each time
SAB 202 LF/ 60 Hz, swept volume = 2862 m3/h
the slide moves above 0% read capacity, the timer
will be stopped. The timer is reset (set to the reset The nominal swept volume at 50 Hz can be read
value) and is restarted once the slide moves be- on the compressor name plate.
low -2% capacity. As mentioned earlier, two new configuration
The timer is set in the picture SETUP I TIMERS points have been introduced in the picture SETUP
I TIMER RESET in the timer I CONFIG.:
CAP.NEG. MECHANICAL ZERO NO [/YES]
The reset value can be set in the interval of MANUAL ZERO 0.0%
60-20000. The factory value is 10000. Only if the compressor has a built-in spacer block
It is very important that the timer has been set cor- as well as automatic Vi regulation, the ME-
rectly. Too low a value will result in the alarm Ca- CHANICAL ZERO must be set on YES. In all oth-
pacity error. Too high a value will make the com-
0178-511 - ENG 103/230

Rev. 2005.03
er cases MECHANICAL ZERO is set on NO. See Zero pos. picture

section Built-in Spacer Block. Reading of the current calculated zero point value
Manual setting of the zero point is carried out by as well as any manual set zero point value takes
entering a zero point between 0-40% of max. ca- place in the diagnosis picture:
pacity slide travel in MANUAL ZERO 0.0% SET UP I DIAGNOSIS I ZERO
See section Manual setting of new zero point. CAPACITY POS.
CALCULATED ZERO 22.0% (current reading 0-40%)

MANUAL ZERO 0.0% (manual adjustment 0-40%)
CAP. POSITION 66.5% (current slide position corresponds to 4-20 mA
CAPACITY 100.0% (corrected capacity - as read)
Electrical slide control justed by changing the capacity slide position,

which consequently moves the Vi slide. Note that
(Screw compressors SAB 250 and SAB 330)
in the survey pictures, full load is indicated in the
These screw compressors are fitted with a capac-
ity slide (master slide) driven by an AC motor fourth line by a solenoid valve symbol:
through magnetic transmission, gearbox and
At part load, the Vi slide is reset to minimum po-
spindle, as well as a hydraulically Vi slide (baby
sition by deactivating the solenoid valve. The ca-
slide) which is controlled by a solenoid valve. The
pacity slide is moved according to the capacity re-
digital output for the valve is always controlled au-
quirement.
tomatically by UNISAB II. Only the capacity slide
is fitted with a position transmitter. UNISAB II changes from part load to full load
mode when the capacity exceeds the selected
Note that the minimum pulse when moving the ca-
limit, VI MODE included in the picture SETUP I
pacity slide is 1 second. For a SAB 330L this cor-
CONFIG I COMPRESSOR. The default limit is
responds to a minimum capacity position change
VI MODE = 97%, but it can be adjusted in the
of 1.8%. It is very useful to have this in mind when
range 70 to 97%.
adjusting the PID regulators. Further, there is a
pause of at least 1 second when changing the ro- UNISAB II returns to part load when the capacity
tation direction of the motor. requirement decreases.
The changes described are performed automati-
Part load and full load cally in any of the modes MANUAL, AUTO and
REMOTE.
As regards capacity control and Vi adjustment,
there are two operating modes: Part load and full
load. Calculated Vi position
At full load, the capacity is by definition 100%. By When changing to or running in full load mode,
activating the solenoid valve, the Vi slide is forced UNISAB II determines an optimal calculated Vi
in mesh with the capacity slide. The Vi is then ad- position xVi [%] according to suction pressure/dis-
104/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
charge pressure ratio, compressor type, refriger- However, stop movement if/when reaching
ant and whether there is an economizer. Further- the limit for reasonable power consumption.
more, the corresponding capacity slide position is 2. Deactivate solenoid valve of Vi slide to re-
calculated:
lease Vi slide and move it to minimum posi-
xcap [%] xVi =100 [%] -xVi [%] * tion.
(Vi-slide [mm] /Cap-slide [mm])
3. If still necessary, move capacity slide to the
While in full load mode, the xcap[%] xVi is the set limit VI MODE.
point of the capacity slide position regulator. 4. Change to normal capacity control.
Change to full load Position indications

When changing from part load to full load, In the picture MOTOR, CAPACITY and VI POSI-
UNISAB II will run through the following steps: TION are indicated.
1. Move capacity slide if necessary (see be- At full load, CAPACITY indication will show 100%,
low). while VI POSITION is calculated from the actual
2. Activate solenoid valve of Vi slide to force Vi capacity slide position.
slide into mesh with capacity slide. At part load, CAPACITY indication will show the
3. Move capacity slide (and thus Vi slide) to op- actual capacity slide position, while VI POSITION
timal position xcap [%] xVi. is 0%.
As regards point 1, UNISAB II compares the

above defined xcap [%] xVi with the actual capacity Slide brake control
slide position. If the actual position is much higher The slide brake is released for a short time -
than xcap [%] xVi , the result would be an undesirable BRAKE DLY - before the slide motor is activated.
power consumption if the Vi slide valve is activat- The brake is also released for the period of time
ed immediately. Therefore, the capacity slide is BRAKE DLY after deactivating the slide motor.
moved as quickly as possible down into the area Brake DLY can be selected in the range 0 to 0.5
where UNISAB II calculates that the power con- seconds in the picture DIAGNOSES I MISC.
sumption will be reasonable. After this, UNISAB II FUNCTIONS.
will move on to points 2 and 3.
Capacity alarm
Change to part load If the slide does not move as expected, a capacity
When changing from full load to part load, alarm will be issued. This means that each time
UNISAB II will run through the following steps: the slide moves at least 0.5% in the chosen direc-
tion, a CAPACITY timer is reset to 100 seconds. If
1. If necessary, move capacity slide (and thus
a move is expected, the timer will count down. If
Vi slide) as close as possible to the limit VI
the timer reaches 0, the alarm will be issued. The
MODE to avoid undesirable capacity jumps.
timer can be inspected in the picture DIAG-
NOSES I MISC. FUNCTIONS.
0178-511 - ENG 105/230

Rev. 2005.03
106/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
7. Limiting functions
UNISAB II includes a number of limiting functions There is a standard limiter for each of the follow-
(in the following called limiters). ing:
The purpose of a limiter is to prevent shutdowns • Low suction pressure
by limiting or even changing the compressor ca- • High discharge pressure
pacity when the measured value exceeds the se-
lected limits. In most cases, "changing the capac- • High motor current
ity" means decreasing it. However, this is not the • Low brine temperature
case with all limiters. • High water temperature
In general, a limiter can be watching, passive or • High differential pressure
active. While all limiters are watching, the com- Pdiff =Pdisch - Psuct (HPO and
pressor start/stop and the capacity regulation will HPC reciprocating compressors)
work normally.
Furthermore, the following special limiters exist:
While a limiter is passive or active, the compres-
sor cannot be started and will be in staus DELAY. • High suction pressure
If the compressor is in operation, the capacity reg- • Suction ramp
ulation will be partly disabled. Further, if a limiter • High discharge temperature
is active, the capacity will be changed actively.
All relevant limiters are permanently in operation. Standard limiters
If necessary, they will intervene in any of the oper-
The standard limiting function is based on the user
ating modes MANUAL, AUTO and REMOTE.
selected high/low alarm limit, high/low warning
In case the compressor is in MANUAL mode and limit and the limiting zone Lz. In the special case
a limiter is active, the capacity slide will automat- of the high motor current limiter, the value of Lz is
ically be returned to its original value as soon as 2% for screw compressors and 5% for reciprocat-
the limiter is watching. ing compressors. In all other cases, Lz is calculat-
When a limiter is passive or active, the red lamp ed as half the difference between the alarm limit
will flash slowly, and the warning relay will be ac- and the warning limit.
tivated. Further, the display will show whether the Fig. 7.1 illustrates how a standard limiter works
limiter is passive or active. with the high discharge pressure limiter as exam-
ple.
0178-511 - ENG 107/230

Rev. 2005.03
Fig. 7.1
SCREW COMPRESSORS (ALL LIMITERS) and RECIPROCATING COMPRESSORS
RECIPR. COMPRESSORS (MOTOR CURRENT (ALL LIMITERS EXCEPT MOTOR CURRENT
LIMITER) LIMITER)
Discharge press. [bar] Discharge press. [bar]
ALARM
WARNING
Limiting zone
Time Time
1 Limiter is watching. Normal control, capacity can increase or decrease. If compressor is not in operation, it can be started.
2 Limiter changes from watching to passive.
Limiter is passive. Capacity cannot be increased. Capacity is not reduced by Limiter,

3 but possibly by regulator. If compressor is not running, it cannot be started and will be in status DELAY.
4 Limiter becomes active. Capacity is reduced at once, and timer begins to count.
5 Limiter is active. At each timeout, capacity is reduced and timer restarted, until compressor stops at low capacity. If compres-
sor is not running, it cannot be started and will be in status DELAY.
6 Limiter changes from active to passive.
7 Limiter changes from passive to watching.
8 Compressor is stopped (shutdown) immediately.
In the example, the alarm (= shutdown) limit for Motor current limiter
high discharge pressure has been set for 16 bar, Even the high motor current limiter is special for
while the warning limit is 14 bar. As indicated, the reciprocating compressors. When one stage is
size of the limiting zone (Lz) is then (16 -14) / 2 = disengaged due to the limiter, the resulting motor
1 bar. The limit of the limiting zone is thus warning current drop will be measured. It is assumed that
limit - Lz = 14 -1 = 13 bar. if the stage is re-engaged, the motor current will
As shown in Fig. 7.1, most reciprocating compres- increase by the size of the drop. To avoid disen-
sor limiters differ from the corresponding limiters gaging and re-engaging in turn, the limiter will en-
for screw compressor in the way that when the sure that the stage will not be re-engaged until the
measured value is within the limiting zone, the sta- resulting current will be below 95% of the limit for
tus of the limiter will depend on whether the limiter the limiter zone.
has been watching or active. If the limiter has Note that the warning limit for motor current is
been watching, it will remain watching in the limit- SET POINT 1 selected in the picture MOTOR I
ing zone. If the limiter has been active, it will be- MOTOR POWER. If SETPOINT 1 = 1000 kW,
come passive for as long as it is in the limiting the limit for the limiting zone will be 1000 - 2%
zone. = 980 kW for screw compressors, and 1000 -
5% = 950 kW for reciprocating compressors.
108/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
High difference pressure limiter High discharge pipe temperature (one-stage re-
Note in particular that this limiter only applies to ciprocating compressors)
HPO and HPC compressors and that it has a fixed From version 1.10 and onwards a capacity limiting
warning limit of 25.2 bar and a fixed alarm limit of function has been entered for all one-stage recip-
26 bar. The limiter is released at 25 bar and it is rocating compressors using refrigerant R717.
passive between 25-25.2 bar. This function is activated at certain operating con-
ditions, especially at excessive differential pres-
Special limiters sure, corresponding to the operating diagram
High suction pressure limitation zone 2 (zone 4, however, for CMO, SMC 100 S/L
and SMC 180).
It is possible to have a high suction pressure lim-
iting function. The effect of this high suction pres- At such operating conditions compressors of the
sure limiting function is that the compressor ca- CMO/HPO and SMC/HPC type must as minimum
pacity is limited to an adjustable max. value when- load 50% of their capacity when starting up and
ever the suction pressure is above the suction during operation.
pressure warning limit. At present the limit curve (which is a straight line)
Max. capacity at "high suction pressure limitation" is fixed on the basis of a max. permissible dis-
is set in picture: charge pipe/oil temperature (T2max) of 150°C as
SETUP I CALIBRATE I CAP. LIMIT as: LIMIT well as suction superheating of 10°C.
HIGH xxx.x%. Whenever the limiting function is active, the fol-
High limit can be set between 0% and 100% lowing will occur at start-up:
where a setting of 100% disables the function.
– Capacity stages corresponding to a min-
In the WARNING picture the text "SUCT. PRESS imum of 50% will be loaded.
HIGH LIM" will appear.
When the limiting function is active during opera-
Suction ramp tion, with 50% capacity or more, the following will
With the timer SUCTION RAMP it is possible to in- occur:
dicate the speed at which the compressor is al-
– It is impossible, both in MANUAL, AUTO
lowed to lower its suction pressure 1°C. The func-
or REMOTE, to unload capacity stages
tion, which is used for as long as the compressor
so that the capacity drops below 50%, ie
is working down towards its normal operating
50/66% are the lowest capacity stages -
point, is a combination of low suction pressure lim-
also when "total unloading" has been se-
iting function and a ramp function.
lected.
If the suction pressure ramp limiting function pre-
– In AUTO and REMOTE the timer STOP
vents the compressor from increasing its capacity
DELAY will be started at 50/66% if the
above 5%, the timer STOP DELAY will not be ac-
regulator sends out a down regulating
tivated and the compressor will continue operat-
signal. If one of the limiting functions is
ing.
to unload capacity, the timer DELAY
The suction pressure limitation without the ramp DOWN will be started at 50/66%.
function can stop the compressor if capacity
comes below 5% for a longer period.
0178-511 - ENG 109/230

Rev. 2005.03
If the compressor is operating at a capacity below to be stopped on the "total unloading timer" due to
50% when the limiting function is active, the limit- insufficient capacity or if the limiting function pre-
ing function will not actively begin to load stages. vents the capacity from being reduced in MANU-
However, the following will take place: AL, AUTO or REMOTE.
– In MANUAL the compressor will be The limit curve (limiting zones 2/4) corresponds as
stopped on the "total unloading timer" standard to suction superheating of 10°C (factory
provided that the capacity stays below value).
50% for more than approx. 4 mins. Since the limit curve is directly dependent on the
– In AUTO and REMOTE the compressor suction superheating of the plant, the actual su-
will be stopped on the "total unloading perheating of the plant must be entered as set
timer" provided the regulator is neutral point 2 in picture: SUCTION SIDE I SUCTION
and capacity remains below 50% for SUPERHEAT. I SETPOINT 2 if it differs from the
more than approx. 4 mins. above factory value.
– If the regulator sends out a regulating Adjusting range: -10 - +30°C
down signal, the timer STOP DELAY will By adjusting SET POINT 2 parameter for suction
be started. superheating upwards or downwards, the limit
– If one of the other limiting functions is to curve will be dislocated accordingly.
unload capacity, the timer DELAY If SET POINT 2 is set for -10°C, the limit curve will
DOWN will stop at 50/66%. be dislocated so much upward - 20°C compared
– If the regulator sends out a regulating up to normal - that the limiting function will be discon-
signal and the compressor is loading nected.
stages so that capacity rises to 50% or
more, the situation will be the same as Display indications
the one described in the previous sec-
The following tables show the texts appearing in
tion.
the display in connection with the various limiters.
In the WARNING picture the text LIMITING DIS-
CHARGE TEMP. will appear if the compressor is
110/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
Screw compressors Overview picture indication
Compressor Compressor WARNING picture, WARNING picture,

Limiter stopped running Passive indication Active indication
Standard Limiters:
Low suction pressure PAUSE SUCTION LIM. LIMITING SUCT. PRESS SUCT. PRESS LOW LIM
High discharge pressure PAUSE DISCHARGE LIM. LIMITING DISCH. PRESS DISCH. PRES HIGH LIM
High motor current Irrelevant RUNN. OVERLOAD None None
Low brine temperature PAUSE SUCTION LIM. LIMITING BRINE TEMP and BRINE TEMP LOW LIM and
LIMITING SUCT. PRESS LIMITING BRINE TEMP
High water temperature PAUSE DISCHARGE LIM. LIMITING HOT WATER and BRINE TEMP HIGH LIM and
LIMITING DISCH. PRESS LIMITING HOT WATER
High differential pressure Irrelevant Irrelevant Irrelevant Irrelevant
Special Limiters:
High suction pressure READY SUCTION LIM. 1) None 2) 3) SUCT. PRESS HIGH LIM 3)
Suction ramp Irrelevant SUCTION LIM. LIMITING SUCT. PRESS Irrelevant
High discharge temp. Irrelevant Irrelevant Irrelevant Irrelevant
Recip. compressor Overview picture indication
Compressor Compressor WARNING picture, WARNING picture,

Limiter stopped running Passive indication Active indication
Standard Limiters:
Low suction pressure PAUSE SUCTION LIM. None SUCT. PRESS LOW LIM
High discharge pressure PAUSE DISCHARGE LIM. None DISCH. PRES HIGH LIM
High motor current Irrelevant RUNN. OVERLOAD None None
Low brine temperature PAUSE SUCTION LIM. LIMITING BRINE TEMP BRINE TEMP LOW LIM and
LIMITING BRINE TEMP
High water temperature PAUSE DISCHARGE LIM. LIMITING HOT WATER BRINE TEMP HIGH LIM and
LIMITING HOT WATER
High differential pressure Irrelevant DISCHARGE LIM. None HIGH DIFFERENTIAL PRES-
SURE
Special Limiters:
High suction pressure READY SUCTION LIM. 1) None 2) 3) SUCT. PRESS HIGH LIM 3)
Suction ramp Irrelevant SUCTION LIM. None None
High discharge temperature Irrelevant None None LIMITING DISCH. TEMP
Notes:
Only shown while capacity is limited.
If limiter is active (at suction pressure > warning limit), it will remain active until the pressure comes below the warning limit less 2°C/R.
Limiter is not active or passive like standard limiters. It actively limits capacity so that it is less than or equal to the selected LIMIT HIGH.
0178-511 - ENG 111/230

Rev. 2005.03
112/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
8. Compressor control and surveillance

The various types of reciprocating and screw Starting sequence
compressors start in different ways. Some types When the compressor has received starting per-
have prelubrication whereas others start directly. mission, the oil full flow pump will start. Make sure
Under all circumstances certain alarms are sup- that the capacity slide is in minimum position. On
pressed at this stage as described in sections SAB 202 this is generally always the case as the
Alarms and warnings and Timers. slide is pushed down by a spring.
The oil is pumped into the compressor lubrication
SAB 202, SAB 163H/128H Mk3 with oil system, and when the oil flow switch is activated,
pump & VMY Mk3 with full flow pump the prelubrication period will start.
The pump is used for prelubrication and for main- When the time has expired the compressor is
taining of a minimum oil pressure level during op- started and the pump will now run for min. 60 sec.
eration. The pump is started and stopped in ac- The pump will stop when the differential pressure
cordance with the compressor differential pres- is above SET POINT 2 as described above.
sure during operation.
Alarm surveillance
The difference is set in the picture OIL I OIL During start the following alarms are delayed:
PRESSURE I PARAMETER whereupon SET
POINT 1 and SET POINT 2 appear. Low oil pressure 45 sec
SET POINT 1 is the pressure at which the pump High filter diff. pressure 300 sec
is to start, and SET POINT 2 is the pressure at Low superheat 300 sec
which the pump is to stop. Consequently, adjust High superheat 300 sec
SET POINT 1 to the lowest pressure level.
Low/high oil temperature 300 sec
Normal setting for SAB 202:
SET POINT 1 = 2.5 Bar
SAB 128HR and 163HR with oil pump
SET POINT 2 = 4 Bar
The compressors SAB 128 and SAB 163 HR are
Move the cursor to SET POINT 1 and press G
frequency regulated screw compressors, ie the
until the cursor moves to the right in the picture.
capacity slide is fixed in maximum position and
With K and J set the value. When the value has cannot be moved.
been set, press G once more.
The electric oil pump is used for prelubrication and
In the same way adjust SET POINT 2.
for maintenance of a minimum oil pressure during
If the compressor differential pressure (discharge operation.
pressure - suction pressure) is below SET POINT
The pump is started and stopped in accordance
1 during operation, the pump will start immediate-
with the compressor differential pressure during
ly. operation.
When the compressor differential pressure has The difference is set in the picture OIL I OIL
been higher than SET POINT 2 for 60 sec, the
PRESSURE I PARAMETER whereupon SET
pump will stop.
POINT 1 and SET POINT 2 will appear.
0178-511 - ENG 113/230

Rev. 2005.03
Normal setting for SAB 128/163 HR: ance with the compressor differential pressure
SET POINT 1 = 2.5 Bar during operation.
SET POINT 2 =4.0 Bar The difference is set in the picture OIL I OIL
Set points are adjusted as described in the previ- PRESSURE I PARAMETER whereupon SET
ous section. POINT 1 and SET POINT 2 will appear.
SET POINT 1 is the pressure at which the pump
Starting sequence
is to start, and SET POINT 2 is the pressure at
Once the compressor has received permission to
which the pump is to stop. Consequently, adjust
start, the oil pump will start and oil will be pumped
SET POINT 1 to the lowest pressure level.
into the compressor lubrication system.
Normal setting for SAB 250/330:
The oil flow switch must be activated within 600
seconds to avoid disconnection. SET POINT 1 = 2.5 Bar
SET POINT 2 = 4.0 Bar
When the oil flow switch is activated, the solenoid
valve (capacity slide down) will be open for 15 Move the cursor to SET POINT 1 and press G
seconds and the electric fan will start. The fre- until the cursor moves to the right of the picture.
quency converter will receive a signal to start. With K and J set the value. When the value has
been set, press G once more.
The speed is increased to 1000 rpm in 10 sec-
onds. In the same way adjust SET POINT 2.
The pump will operate for a minimum of 60 sec- If the compressor differential pressure (discharge
onds and stop if the differential pressure is higher pressure - suction pressure) is below SET POINT
than SET POINT 2 as described above. 1 during operation, the pump will start immediate-
ly.
Alarm surveillance
During start the following alarms are delayed: When the compressor differential pressure has
been higher than SET POINT 2 for 60 sec, the
See also section Timers.
pump will stop.
Starting sequence
Low oil pressure 45 sec When SAB 250/330 compressor stops, UNISAB II
High filter diff. pressure 300 sec will attempt to move the capacity slide below 5%
capacity. If this does not succeed, a CAPACITY
Low superheat 300 sec
ERROR alarm will be issued and the compressor
High superheat 300 sec will not start.
Low/high oil temperature 300 sec When the compressor has received starting per-
mission, the oil full flow pump will start.
SAB 283, SAB 330 and SAB 355 with oil The oil is pumped into the compressor lubrication
pump system, and when the oil flow switch is activated,
The pump is used for prelubrication and for main- the prelubrication period will start.
taining a minimum oil pressure level during oper- When the time has expired, the compressor will
ation. The pump is started and stopped in accord- start and the pump will now run for min. 60 sec.
114/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
The pump will stop when the differential pressure GSV/RWF with oil pump
is above SET POINT 2 as described above. The pump is used for prelubrication and for main-
Alarm surveillance taining a minimum oil pressure level during oper-
During start the following alarms are delayed: ation. The pump is started and stopped in accord-
ance with the compressor differential pressure
Low oil pressure 45 sec
during operation.
High filter diff. pressure 300 sec
The difference is set in the picture OIL I OIL
Low superheat 300 sec PRESSURE I PARAMETER whereupon SET
High superheat 300 sec POINT 1 and SET POINT 2 will appear.
Low/high oil temperature 300 sec SET POINT 1 is the pressure at which the pump
is to start whereas SET POINT 2 is the pressure
The delayed alarms are described in section Tim- at which the pump is to stop. Consequently, set
ers. SET POINT 1 for the lowest pressure level.
Normal setting for GSV/RWF:
SAB 80 with fitted (mechanical) oil SET POINT 1 = 2.5 bar.
pump SET POINT 2 = 4.0 bar.
Starting sequence Move the cursor to SET POINT 1 and press G
When the compressor has received starting per- until the cursor has moved to the right side of the
mission, it must be checked if the capacity slide is picture. Set the value by means of K and J .
in minimum position. Before starting the compres- When the value has been set, press G once
sor, the oil level switch in the oil separator must be more.
activated.
SET POINT 2 is set in the same way.
Start the compressor.
If the compressor differential pressure (discharge
After a delay of 60 seconds from compressor pressure - suction pressure) is below SET POINT
start, no signal from the level switch for more than 1 during operation, the pump will start immediate-
10 seconds will result in disconnection. ly.
Alarm surveillance When the compressor differential pressure has
During start the following alarms are delayed: been higher than SET POINT 2 for 60 seconds,
the pump will stop.
High filter diff. pressure 300 sec Starting sequence

When the compressor has received starting per-
mission, check whether the capacity slide is still in
High superheat 300 sec minimum position. In case of compressor stop,
Low/high oil temperature 300 sec make sure that the capacity slide and the volume
slide (if fitted with automatic Vi) are in minimum
See also section Timers position.
0178-511 - ENG 115/230

Rev. 2005.03
Before start-up the oil level switch in the oil sepa- Normal setting for SV24/26:
rator must be active. If this is not the case, an SET POINT 1 = 2.5 Bar
alarm for oil system error will be issued. SET POINT 2 = 4.0 Bar
No signal from the oil level switch will result in dis- Set points are adjusted as described in the previ-
connection after a delay of 60 seconds from com- ous section.
pressor start or during operation.
Starting sequence
If the oil level switch is active, the prelubrication
Once the compressor has received starting per-
period will begin and the oil will be pumped into
mission, check that the capacity slide is in mini-
the compressor lubrication system. When the time
mum position. The oil pump is started and oil will
period has expired, the compressor will start and
now be pumped into the compressor lubrication
the pump will run for min. 60 seconds. The pump
system. To avoid disconnection, the oil flow switch
will stop if the differential pressure is higher than
must be activated within 45 seconds.
SET POINT 1.
When the oil flow switch is activated, the compres-
Alarm surveillance
sor will start.
During start the following alarms are delayed:
The pump will operate for a minimum of 60 sec-
Low oil pressure 45 sec onds and stop if the differential pressure is higher
High filter diff. pressure 300 sec than SET POINT 2 as described above.
Low superheat 300 sec Alarm surveillance
High superheat 300 sec During start the following alarms are delayed:
Low/high oil temperature 300 sec Low oil pressure 45 sec

The delayed alarms are described in section Tim-
ers. Low superheat 300 sec
High superheat 300 sec

SV 24/26 with oil pump Low/high oil temperature 300 sec
The compressors SV 24 and SV 26 are small slide
regulated screw compressors. FV 24/26 with oil pump
The electrical oil pump is used for prelubrication The compressors FV 24 and FV 26 are small fre-
and maintenance of a minimum oil pressure dur- quency regulated screw compressors, ie the
ing operation. mounted slide is only used during start and stop.
The pump is started and stopped in accordance The electrical oil pump is used for prelubrication
with the compressor differential pressure during and for maintenance of a minimum oil pressure
operation. during operation.
The difference is set in the picture OIL I OIL The pump is started and stopped in accordance
PRESSURE I PARAMETER whereupon SET with the compressor differential pressure during
POINT 1 and SET POINT 2 will appear. operation.
116/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
The difference is set in the picture OIL I OIL FV 19 with oil pump
PRESSURE I PARAMETER whereupon SET The compressor FV 19 is a small frequency regu-
POINT 1 and SET POINT 2 will appear. lated screw compressor without the stage regulat-
Normal setting for FV 24/26: ed capacity control as featured in the SV 19.
SET POINT 1 = 2.5 Bar The electrical oil pump is used for prelubrication
SET POINT 2 = 4.0 Bar and for maintenance of a minimum oil pressure
Set points are adjusted as described in the previ- during operation.
ous section. The pump is started and stopped in accordance
with the compressor differential pressure during
Starting sequence
operation.
Once the compressor has received permission to
start, the oil pump will start and oil is pumped into The difference is set in the picture OIL I OIL
the compressor lubrication system. PRESSURE I PARAMETER whereupon SET
POINT 1 and SET POINT 2 will appear.
The oil flow switch must be activated within 45
seconds to avoid disconnection. Normal setting for FV 19:
When the oil flow switch is activated, the solenoid SET POINT 1 = 2.5 Bar
valve (capacity slide down) will be open for 15 SET POINT 2 = 4.0 Bar
seconds and the electrical fan will start. The fre- Set points are adjusted as described in the previ-
quency converter will then receive a signal to ous chapter.
start.
Starting sequence
The speed is increased to 1000 rpm in 10 sec- Once the compressor has received starting per-
onds. mission, the oil pump will start and oil will be
The pump will operate for a minimum of 60 sec- pumped into the compressor lubrication system.
onds and will stop if the differential pressure is The oil flow switch must be activated within 45
higher than SET POINT 2 as described above. seconds to avoid disconnection.
Alarm surveillance When the oil flow switch is activated, an oil
During start the following alarms are delayed: by-pass solenoid valve for unloading will open for
Low oil pressure 45 sec 15 seconds and the electrical fan will start.
High filter diff. pressure 300 sec Starting signal is transmitted to the frequency con-
verter.
The speed is increased to 1200 rpm in 10 sec-
onds.
The pump will operate for a minimum of 60 sec-
See also section Timers onds and stop if the differential pressure is higher
than SET POINT 2 as described above.
0178-511 - ENG 117/230

Rev. 2005.03
Alarm surveillance The pump will run for 60 sec and stop.
During start the following alarms are delayed: Alarm surveillance
Low oil pressure 45 sec During start the following alarms are delayed:
High filter diff. pressure 300 sec Low oil pressure 45 sec
Low superheat 300 sec High filter diff. pressure 300 sec
High superheat 300 sec Low superheat 300 sec
High/low oil temperature 300 sec High superheat 300 sec

VMY Mk 3
without full flow pump SAB 110/128/163 Mk 2
Once the compressor has received starting per- without oil pump
mission, the oil pump will start. Check that the ca-
pacity slide is in minimum position.
mission, make sure that the capacity slide is in
The oil is pumped into the compressor lubrication minimum position.
system. As soon as the oil flow switch has been
Start the compressor and wait for a signal from the
activated, the prelubrication period will start.
oil flow switch for max. 50+10 sec.
When the time period has expired, the compres-
If there is no signal from the oil flow switch for 10
sor will start and the pump will run for 60 sec.
sec during operation, the compressor will stop.
Alarm surveillance
Alarm surveillance

VMY Mk 2 and 2.5 with built-in oil pump SAB 128/163 Mk 2 Booster with oil
Once the compressor has received starting per- pump
mission, the pump will start. Make sure that the
capacity slide is in minimum position.
mission, the pump will start. The built-in spring en-
The compressor will start working. sures that the capacity slide is in minimum posi-
tion.
118/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
Start the compressor and wait for a signal from the Alarm surveillance
oil flow switch for max. 50+10 sec. During start the following alarms are delayed:
If there is no signal from the oil flow switch for 10 Low oil pressure 300 sec
sec during operation, the compressor will stop.
The oil pump runs continually during operation to
ensure sufficient pressure to move the capacity
slide. High superheat 300 sec

Alarm surveillance
High filter diff. pressure 300 sec Reciprocating compressors

Low superheat 300 sec No particular starting up sequence exists for recip-
rocating compressors. However, some alarms are
delayed at this stage.
Alarm surveillance
See also section Timers. During start the following alarms are delayed:
SAB 163 Mk 1 with oil pump High oil pressure 20 sec
Low suct.gas superheat 15 sec
mission, the pump will start. The built-in spring en-
sures that the capacity slide is in minimum posi- High suct.gas superheat 300 sec
tion. Low/high oil temperature 300 sec
The oil is pumped into the compressor lubrication Low disch. gas superheat 300 sec
system and when the oil flow switch is activated, Low/high intermediate discharge 300 sec
the prelubrication period will begin. temperature
When this period has expired, the compressor will

start, and the pump will work for 300 sec and then
stop. The following descriptions of the various functions
must be compared with the wiring diagrams in
In case of a booster compressor, the pump will
which the activating connections are included.
run continually during operation to ensure suffi-
cient pressure to move the capacity slide.
0178-511 - ENG 119/230

Rev. 2005.03
External starting permission - cursor back to START OIL PUMP. Press G until
immediate stop the cursor moves to the right, then select YES with
The input must be connected in order for the com- J or K .
pressor to run in MANUAL, AUTO or REMOTE. If The pump will now start and run for the time set.
this input is opened during operation, the com- For SAB 202, SAB Mk3 and VMY Mk3 compres-
pressor will stop immediately. sors a warning "Watch the oil pressure" will be is-
When the input is open, STOPPED will appear in sued while the oil pump is in manual operation for
the bottom line of the display. oil charging.
If the pump is to stop before time expiry, select NO
External starting permission - under START OIL PUMP.
normal stop Note: As from 2001 SAB 128/163 Mk3 and SAB
This input and IMMEDIATE STOP must be con- 202 are no longer as standard fitted with a valve
nected before the compressor is going to start in for external connection to the oil pump suction
AUTO or REMOTE. If the input has not been con- side. Thus it is not possible to charge oil with the
nected, the display will read STOPPED in the bot- unit oil pump.
tom line.
If the input is opened during operation, the com- Motor current measuring
pressor capacity will move to its minimum posi- UNISAB II can be supplied with a signal 0-1 Amp
tion, and the compressor will stop on its delay be- AC directly from a current transformer in the com-
fore the actual time to stop. pressor motor starter.
In case the input CAPACITY DOWN BLOCKED is The value for the voltage ratio of the current trans-
connected, the compressor will not reduce capac- former must be entered in the menu CONFIG I
ity once the input EXTERNAL STARTING PER- RANGE M. CURR to get a correct reading of the
MISSION NORMAL STOP is opened. current.
Next, select menu MOTOR I MOTOR CUR-
Oil charging, manual (screw RENT and the following picture will appear:
compressors)
ACTUAL SP XX A
Oil charging cannot take place with UNISAB II in SET POINT 1 XX A
"STOPPED". If the compressor is fitted with an oil SET POINT 2 XX A
pump for oil charging, it can be started in the fol-
lowing way: In SET POINT 1 enter the motor full load current
of the motor as read on the name plate. In SET
Select menu TIMERS I OIL CHARGING and the
POINT 2 a lower value may be entered if the ab-
following picture will appear:
sorbed current is to be limited in certain periods.
START OIL PUMP NO
TIMER 0 sec Set points are set by placing the cursor on SET
POINT 1 or SET POINT 2 respectively. Press G
Place the cursor on TIMER and press G until the until the cursor moves to the right. The correct
cursor moves to the right. Set the number of sec- number can now be set by using J or K.
onds the pump is to run. Press G and move the
120/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
It is possible to change between two set points by • Temperature of chilled liquid before evapo-
opening or closing a digital input. See wiring dia- rator.
grams. • Volume flow of cooling gas on pressure side
Open input = SET POINT 1. (m3/h).
See also Current limiters. • Motor power consumption in kW.
• Motor efficiency.
Motor power measuring The measuring of these values are set in the pic-
UNISAB II can be supplied with a 4-20 mA signal ture CONFIG I COP.
from a power transmitter of 0-xxxx KW. COP ACTIVE NO
Enter the power ratio of the power transmitter in FLOW FACTOR 0.20 l/pls
the menu CONFIG I RANGE M. CURR to get a LIQ. SUBCOOL 3.0
correct reading of the power output.

The COP function is connected and disconnected
In the menu CALIB I CALIBRATE COP, select in the menu SETTING I CONFIG I COP AC-
MOTOR SIGNAL for kW. TIVE, cf section Configuration.
Then select the menu MOTOR I MOTOR POW- The calculated COP values are shown in the pic-
ER, and the following picture will appear: ture SETTING I DIAGNOSIS I COP.
ACTUAL SP xxxx KW
A more comprehensive description of the COP
SET POINT 1 xxxx KW
function and its setting is included in the manual
SET POINT 2 xxxx KW
UNISAB II-COP.
In SET POINT 1 enter the motor top load power
read on the name plate. In SET POINT 2 a lower Thermistor connection
value can be entered for periods when less power If the motor is fitted with thermistors for protection
is required. of the motor temperature, these can be connected
Switch between the two set points by opening or directly to a digital input. See wiring diagrams.
closing a digital input, cf wiring diagrams. Should the motor temperature rise excessively,
Open input = SET POINT 1. the compressor will stop.
See also Current limiter
Aux. output
COP set-up In the menu CALIB I AUX. OUTPUT the follow-
UNISAB II can be set for measuring compressor ing picture will appear:
COP (Coefficient Of Performance), mechanical AUX. OUTPUT
ACTIVATED WHEN
efficiency as well as Carnot efficiency.
NOT USED
Together with suction and discharge pressure and
temperature, the following values form basis of The cursor is on AUX. OUTPUT. Press G and
the calculations: the cursor moves to NOT USED.
With J or K choose between:
0178-511 - ENG 121/230

Rev. 2005.03
• READY vated. The function works both in REMOTE

• AT MIN CAP. and AUTO.
• AT MAX CAP. 6) READY and me only: This function means

that the compressor is ready, that it has the
• RUNNING lowest start number and that it is the only
• READY-EXT. compressor in operation in this system. The
This function is connected to a digital output. See output must ensure constant water circula-
wiring diagrams. tion by the PT 100 sensor whenever a com-
pressor is ready to start.
1) READY: If selecting this function, the output
will be activated when the compressor is
ready for operation in REMOTE. This
Capacity down blocked
means that AUTO START has been config- When the compressor is in max capacity in AUTO
ured (and AUTO STOP), EXTERNAL or REMOTE, it is possible to lock the compressor
START NORMAL STOP has been set. in this state by closing a digital input. See wiring
There are no alarms - and the compressor diagrams. The input overrules EXTERNAL
can start. STARTING PERMISSION, NORMAL STOP.
2) AT MIN CAP: If selecting this function, the In case the compressor runs in limited operation,
output will be activated when the compres- it will, however, reduce its capacity. When the
sor is below LOW LIMIT, which is set in the state of operation is back to normal, the compres-
menu CALIB I CAP. LIMIT. The hysteresis sor will return to full load. See also Limitations.
is 1%. If the input is connected while the compressor is
3) AT MAX CAP: Select this function and the READY to start in AUTO or REMOTE, the com-
output is activated when the compressor is pressor will be started by force.
above HIGH LIMIT, which is set in the menu
CALIB I CAP. LIMIT. The hysteresis is Power management system (PMS)
1%.
This function works in MANUAL, AUTO or RE-
Please note that the line CAP.LIMITER is not in- MOTE operation. It is a kind of "an agreement to
cluded in the CALIBRATION menu until the auxil- start" system, consisting of one digital output
iary output has been selected as either AT MIN. "Compressor ready to start", which is set when the
CAP. or AT MAX. CAP. compressor is to start, as well as a digital input
4) RUNNING: If selecting this function, the out- "Permission to start OK". This input must be set
put will be activated whenever the compres- before the timer "PMS confirmation" expires in or-
sor is operating, ie when the start signal to der for the compressor to start.
the compressor has been set. The alarm "Power management system error" is
5) READY-EXT.: This function corresponds to activated if the input "Permission to start OK" has
the above READY function, but here it is not not been set before the timer "PMS confirmation"
required that EXTERNAL START NORMAL expires.
STOP must be set for the output to be acti- The signal can be removed during operation with-
out stopping the compressor.
122/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
Cold store function HP on TWO-STAGE

This function is connected to the regulators for ca- This function is used on two-stage plants to start
pacity regulation of the compressor. HP compressors by force.
Usually, the compressor is going to start in AUTO HP on TWO-STAGE must have been selected in
or REMOTE/MULTISAB if the measured value is the menu CONFIG. The function only works in
outside the neutral zone and a capacity require- REMOTE/MULTISAB.
ment exists. A compressor is started by force by closing the in-
If COLD STORE FUNCTION has been selected in put EXT START, NORMAL STOP. The first com-
the menu CONFIG, the compressor will not start pressor is now going to start within the period of
until the measured value is outside the P Band. time set in the timer START HPRESS.
After this, it will regulate normally in accordance After this, the compressors will regulate normally
with the set point. on the capacity regulator.
Fig. 8.1 Please note that the last compressor in operation
Example of cold store function in a MULTISAB system (usually the no 1 com-
pressor in the starting sequence) will not stop on
UNISAB II is set for suction
pressure regulation with the timer STOP DELAY. It can only be stopped by
Set point (Sp) = -40°C opening the input EXT START, NORMAL STOP,
Neutral zone (Nz) = 4 K
Proportional band (Pb) = 5 K
which makes the compressor stop for a moment.
NORMAL
Suct.press (°C/R) Oil return (reciprocating compressors)
-33
1 Pb = 5 K The solenoid valve for oil return from the oil sepa-
-38
-40 Nz = 4 K rator/oil reservoir to the compressor will be open
Pb = 5 K when the compressor starts and an ON signal is
issued from one digital input (or in the case of
1 Compressor start two-stage compressors two digital input).
(Just outside Nz)
COLD STORE FUNCTION In case of a one-stage compressor, only the digital
Suct.press (°C/R) input for high-pressure oil separator is used. Here,
1 the input must be ON before the digital output oil
-33
Pb = 5 K return is set.
-38
-40 Nz = 4 K In case of two-stage compressors where both the
Pb = 5 K
IP and HP part may have their own oil separator,
the digital inputs INTERMEDIATE PRESSURE
1 Compressor start OIL RETURN and HIGH PRESSURE OIL RE-
(Just outside Pb)
TURN are used. Here, both inputs must be ON
Note for screw compressors before setting the digital output for oil return.
It is not recommended to use the cold store From version 1.10 the opening of the solenoid
function on screw compressors! valve(s) for oil return can be combined with an ad-
justable time delay.
0178-511 - ENG 123/230

Rev. 2005.03
At compressor start the output(s) for oil return start on two cylinders and the other two are used
is/are not opened until the time set in the timer OIL to connect changes in capacity steps. See draw-
RETURN has expired. ing number 3448-236 on page 128-129.
The time delay function will be disconnected if the Please note that compressors with additional
timer OIL RETURN is set for 0 sec or when the steps do not start totally unloaded but on one
digital inputs for intermediate and high pressure and two cylinders respectively.
oil return are OFF.
The time delay OIL RETURN is set in the timer Oil heating
picture TIMER I TIMER SETUP. Oil heating is NOT a configuration point, but it has
various functions depending on whether the com-
Start unloading system for TCMO 28 pressor in question is configured as a reciprocat-
compressor ing or a screw compressor.
TCMO 28 reciprocating compressors have a Screw compressors
unique unloading system which ensures low start- A heating element will be connected while the
ing torque and a correct balance between high compressor is not in operation and there is no
and low pressure cylinders during part load. When temperature regulation.
the compressor is stopped, during start up and at
loading stages below or at 50% a hot gas bypass
The heating element outlet is activated by de-
valve “B” is activated to ensure this. See informa-
creasing oil temperature. This function is active
tion sheet for outputs on page 131 - reciprocating
both at compressor stand-still and when the com-
compressors 3448-236.
pressor is in operation.
Additional steps on SMC compressors The set point of this value is set in picture OIL
TEMP I PARAMETER, SET POINT 2. The set
From SMC 104 to SMC 108 the first capacity step
point has a fixed hysteresis of 5K.
is divided in two so that the compressor starts on
one cylinder. The other cylinder is used to connect Ex: Set point 2 = 35°C:
changes in capacity stages. SMC 112 and 116 Heating starts at 35°C and stops at (35+5) = 40°C.
124/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
Definition of refrigerant R000

If the refrigerant used cannot be found in the list of
-10 °C/R 00.00 BAR
refrigerants - see section Configuration - it is pos-
sible to select a user defined refrigerant designat- -5 °C/R 00.00 BAR
ed R000 (the R000 designation does not refer to

00 °C/R 00.00 BAR
any known refrigerant).
Before selecting R000 in SETUP I CONFIG en- 05 °C/R 00.00 BAR
ter the data for the substances (the refrigerant 10 °C/R 00.00 BAR
curve) contained in the refrigerant used.
15 °C/R 00.00 BAR
In the menu SETUP I CALIB I DEF. REFRIG-
ERANT R000, the following picture will appear: 20 °C/R 00.00 BAR
DEF. REFRIGERANT R000 25 °C/R 00.00 BAR
TEMP: PRESS (ABS): 30 °C/R 00.00 BAR
-90 °C/R 00.00 BAR 35 °C/R 00.00 BAR
-85 °C/R 00.00 BAR 40 °C/R 00.00 BAR
-80 °C/R 00.00 BAR 45 °C/R 00.00 BAR
-75 °C/R 00.00 BAR 50 °C/R 00.00 BAR
-70 °C/R 00.00 BAR 55 °C/R 00.00 BAR
-65 °C/R 00.00 BAR 60 °C/R 00.00 BAR
-60 °C/R 00.00 BAR 65 °C/R 00.00 BAR
-55 °C/R 00.00 BAR 70 °C/R 00.00 BAR
-50 °C/R 00.00 BAR 75 °C/R 00.00 BAR
-45 °C/R 00.00 BAR 80 °C/R 00.00 BAR
-40 °C/R 00.00 BAR For BAR/°C, enter the pressure as absolute pres-
sure in 1/100 BAR. For temperatures enter values
-35 °C/R 00.00 BAR
between -90°C and +80°C with intervals of 5°C.
-30 °C/R 00.00 BAR Each pressure value in the table must be given a
certain value.
-25 °C/R 00.00 BAR
The pressure can be entered in the range of 00.00
-20 °C/R 00.00 BAR and 99.99 BAR. The table has been initialized to
-15 °C/R 00.00 BAR
00.00 BAR.
0178-511 - ENG 125/230

Rev. 2005.03
126/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
9. Calibration
9. Calibration
Before initial compressor start-up and after Insufficient or incorrect setting of pressure
service1), adjustments of transducers and position transducers may lead to compressor break-
transmitters must be carried out. Their values down or personal injury.
have usually been preset by the factory, but a re- The temperature sensors must be calibrated as
check must be made before start-up. This is very they are connected electrically with four conduc-
important as failure to adjust may lead to malfunc- tors, which automatically makes up for line resist-
tion during operation. ance.
1) Eg in connection with replacement of CPU
prints, relay prints, pressure transducers or batter- Pressure transducers
ies. See also section Service.
Calibrate the pressure transducers at atmos-
pheric pressure in the compressor.
Use the following pressure transducers:
Table 10
Unit = BAR COMPRESSOR TYPE
Max.
MEAS.POINT SAB/VMY SMC TSMC/ HPC/HPO MAX. permissible
TCMO PRESS. deviation at
ATM.PRESS
SUCT.PRESS. 33 +/- 0.2

-1-+9 -1-+9 -1-+9 -1-+25
55 +/- 0.5
DISCH.PRESS 55 +/- 0.5

-1-+25 -1-+25 -1-+25 -1-+59
200 +/- 1.2
OIL PRESS -1-+25 -1-+25 -1-+25 -1-+25 55 +/- 0.5
DIFF PRESS -1-+25 55 +/- 0.5
INTERM.PRESS -1-+25 55 +/- 0.5
0178-511 - ENG 127/230

Rev. 2005.03
9. Calibration
Select the menu CALIBRATE, and the following Place the cursor on SUCT. ADJUST and use the
picture will be displayed: G key to change the value.
CALIBRATE Now change the value to the value SUCT. AD-
PRESS.TRANSDUCER
JUST is showing, ie 0.2 Bar with opposite sign.
BRINE TEMP
Note that the adjusting value is in 1/100.
CAPACITY
MOTOR FREQ Change SUCT. ADJUST to the value -.20.
Vi POSITION
Adjust the other pressure levels in the same way.
4 - 20 mA INPUT
However, note that DIFF. PRESS is relevant only
AUX. OUTPUT
for screw compressors and IMED. PRESS only for
CAP. LIMITS
DEF. REFRIGERANT R000
two-stage reciprocating compressors.
The following picture should now appear:
Note that some of the entries in the CALIBRATE
SUCT. PRESS .00 BAR
menu are described in other chapters of this man- SUCT. ADJUST -.20 BAR
ual. DISC. PRESS 0.0 BAR
With the cursor on PRESS.TRANSDUCER, press DISC. ADJUST .30 BAR
I and the following picture will appear: OIL PRESS 0.0 BAR
OIL ADJUST -.10 BAR
SUCT. PRESS .20 BAR
DIFF. PRESS 0.0 BAR
SUCT. ADJUST .00 BAR
DIFF. ADJUST ..10 BAR
DISC. PRESS -0.3 BAR
IMED. PRESS 0.0 BAR
DISC. ADJUST .00 BAR
IMED. ADJUST -.10 BAR
OIL PRESS 0.1 BAR
OIL ADJUST .00 BAR
The pressure transducer calibration has now
DIFF. PRESS -0.1 BAR
been carried out correctly.
DIFF. ADJUST .00 BAR
IMED. PRESS 0.1 BAR
IMED. ADJUST .00 BAR Brine temperature
Place the cursor on BRINE TEMP and press the
Note: The pressure values shown are examples
I key once. The following picture will appear:
only. At atmospheric pressure the value of the
BRINE TEMP 18.9°C
pressure transducer must be within the limits for
BRINE ADJUST 0.0°C
"Max. permissible deviation at atm.pressure" as
indicated in the above table. Is this not the case, The BRINE TEMP value is the immediate value
the value will be outside its tolerance and must be measured by the sensor. If a test measuring with
replaced. a precision thermometer shows eg 18.7°C at the
The pressure levels are measured in BAR (rela- sensor, adjustment can be made.
tive pressure) and at atmospheric pressure the Place the cursor on BRINE ADJUST and change
reading must show 0.0 Bar to be correct. the value to -0.2°C. BRINE TEMP will now be
As it appears from the above example, the meas- 18.7°C (18.9-0.2), and adjustment has taken
ured pressure levels are not 0.0 Bar. Consequent- place.
ly calibration must be carried out.
128/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
9. Calibration
Note that it is only possible to adjust BRINE TEMP CAP. ZERO AD XX.X %
- not the other temperature sensors. CAP. 100 ADJ XX.X %
0 % calibration is carried out with the capacity

Calibration of motor frequency signal slide in minimum position. If CAPACITY is not
When compressor capacity is regulated wholly or showing 0.0 %, but eg 1.5 %, position the cursor
partly by changes in the motor speed, the motor on CAP. ZERO AD and change the calibration val-
frequency signal from the frequency converter ue to -1.5 % with the G key.
can be calibrated in this menu field. 100 % calibration is carried out with the capacity
slide in maximum position.
Motor current If CAPACITY is not showing 100.0 %, but eg 95.8
The reading of motor current can be calibrated as %, position the cursor on CAP. 100 ADJ and
described in section Configuration, pos. 19. change the calibration value to 4.2 % with the G
key.
Hydraulic slide systems Software calibration of the Vi slide signal is carried

(certain screw compressors) out in the menu SET UP I CALIBRATE I Vi
POS.
The built-in capacity slide position transmitter as
well as the Vi slide position transmitter must be Transmitter adjustment
adjusted correctly to ensure safe and stable slide To ensure a safe and stable movement of the
control. This adjustment must always be carried slides, the built-in position transmitter must be ad-
out mechanically as described in section Trans- justed correctly in the mechanical minimum and
mitter adjustment. Additionally, the capacity signal maximum of the slide. Furthermore, the slide ve-
can be adjusted by software as described in sec- locity must be adjusted so that hunting is avoided.
tion Software adjustment. See also Adjusting slide velocity in section Com-
Software adjustment pressor regulation.
When the capacity position transmitter has been Position transmitter
adjusted (see section Transmitter adjustment) or For measuring of slide position, the compressor is
if it is not possible to calibrate the transmitter itself, fitted with a position transmitter, which yields 4 -
this function can be used to adjust/fine-tune the 20 mA to UNISAB II. There will always be fitted a
signal. transmitter at the capacity slide whereas there
Select SETUP I CALIBRATE I CAPACITY. may be fitted a transmitter at the volume ratio slide
CAPACITY XXX.X %
in case the compressor is made for automatic Vi
regulation.
0178-511 - ENG 129/230

Rev. 2005.03
9. Calibration
There are four types of position transmitters: Long-stroke capacity rod transmitter for SAB
Turning transmitter for SAB 110, SAB 128, SAB 283.
163 and SAB 202 (capacity and Vi). Fig. 9.3
Fig. 9.1
ALU-Tube
3
4.5 4. 2 1
3.5
3. 2
100%
2.5 3
SPAN + ZERO 1
2.
No. 3
Short-stroke transmitter for capacity for GST,
0%
GSV and RWF from Gram Refrigeration and short

stroke volume transmitter for GSV, RWF, SAB
283 and SAB 355.
Long-stroke capacity rod transmitter for SAB
110, SAB 128, SAB 163, SAB 202, SAB 81, SAB Fig. 9.4
83, SAB 85, SAB 87, SAB 89 and SAB 330
(capacity and Vi).
Fig. 9.2
ALU-Tube
3
2 1
130/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
9. Calibration
Adjusting capacity measuring system with turning transmitter

- for SAB 110, SAB 128, SAB 163 and SAB 202
(capacity and Vi).
The turning transmitter has two ways of adjust- In the following drawing(see Fig. 9.5) the zero and
ment. The cover must be removed before adjust- span adjusting screws of the position transmitter
ment. are shown.
Fig. 9.5
Slide position
4.5 4.
Volume ratio 3.5
1 = 4 - 20 mA
3. 2
2 = + 24 VDC
Approx. min pos 100%
3 = GND
0% 2.5 3
SPAN + ZERO 1
with distance ring
No. 3
2.
0%
T0177063_0
With the cap/Vi slide in minimum position, adjust Capacity slide adjustment, auto V i
zero until the display shows 0%. With the cap/Vi To adjust the movement of the capacity slide the
slide at maximum position, adjust span until the Vi slide must be in minimum position. The Vi slide
display shows 100%. is brought to minimum the following way: Start the
compressor in MANUAL, select SETUP I and
Capacity slide adjustment
then CAPACITY I.
Start the compressor in MANUAL and make sure
that the capacity slide is in minimum. Adjust the The following picture will appear:
zero screw of the transmitter until the display CAPACITY XX
shows 0%. CAP. POS XX
VI POSITION XX
Now bring the slide to its maximum position (eg
RUNNING XX
when the current consumption is no longer rising),
and adjust the span until the display shows 100%. Select the Vi POSITION and press I to get to the
Return the slide to minimum and check. following picture:
Capacity slide adjustment, manual Vi SETPOINT 1 0.0%

Follow the same procedure as above, but note
that the capacity transmitter must be adjusted
every time the Vi position is changed. 0.0% in this picture indicates that UNISAB II will
adjust the Vi slide automatically.
0178-511 - ENG 131/230

Rev. 2005.03
9. Calibration
Change SETPOINT 1 to -10% which will change In this picture 0.0% always means that the Vi slide
the Vi adjustment to manual and place the Vi slide will be adjusted automatically by UNISAB II.
in minimum position. Change SETPOINT 1 to -10%, which changes the
Adjust the capacity slide position as described Vi adjustment to manual and places the Vi slide in
above under Capacity slide adjustment. After- minimum position.
wards, remember to reset SET POINT 1 to 0.0%.
Return with H to the picture:
Capacity slide adjustment, auto zero point CAPACITY XX
For SAB 202 compressors with automatic zero CAP. POS XX
point setting, there are two applicable methods to VI POSITION XX
ensure that the automatic zero point setting does RUNNING XX
not influence the adjusting of the transmitter zero.

and adjust the zero screw of the Vi position trans-
1) Do not set the zero until the compressor has mitter until the reading out for the Vi-position is 0%
stopped and the slide is in mechanical zero. in the display.
2) Disconnect the automatic zero point setting Change SET POINT 1 to 110% and return to the
while setting the transmitter zero. This can be above picture where the Vi position is now going
done by setting MANUAL ZERO = 0.1 in the pic- to rise. Wait until it does not rise any further and
ture SETUP I CONFIG I. adjust the span screw of the transmitter until the
Remember to set MANUAL ZERO = 0.0 as display shows 100%.
soon as the capacity slide adjustment is ac- Change SET POINT 1 to -10% and check mini-
complished. It is important that the compres- mum.
sor only runs for a brief period of time when
Change SET POINT 1 to 0.0% for automatic Vi
the automatic zero point setting is disconnect-
control. Besides, UNISAB II will change to auto-
ed.
matic Vi control itself after the compressor has
Adjustment of volume ratio slide adjustment, been stopped.
auto Vi
See also Adjusting slide velocity in the Compres-
It is assumed that the capacity slide has been set
sor regulation section.
correctly.
Start the compressor in MANUAL and take the
Adjusting long-stroke capacity rod for
slide up to 20-30%.
SAB 110, SAB 128, SAB 163, SAB 202,
Select CAPACITY I VI POSITION I and the fol- SAB 81, SAB 83, SAB 85, SAB 87, SAB 89
lowing picture will appear: and SAB 330 (capacity and Vi)
As shown below, the capacity transmitter is fitted
SETPOINT 1 0.0%
with a single calibration button surrounded by a
green and red LED.
132/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
9. Calibration
Fig. 9.6 LED will change to normal flash rate, indi-

cating that the calibration has been complet-
Calibration push button
LED-Supply ed.
LED-Digital output
To make sure that the slide is in maximum
Plug Connection
physical position, (UNISAB II does not allow
the capacity button to be activated after
100% indication in the display has been
reached) it is recommended to set “CAP
100 ADJ” at -10% after 100% calibration of
Out 4-20mA
the transmitter has been completed and the
Supply +24V DC slide remains in maximum position. See the
Common-
Software Calibration section earlier in this
GND
section. The slide indication in the display
must now be 90%. If capacity can be in-
During normal operation the red LED is flashing creased further either automatically by UN-
rather slowly. The green LED is switched on con- ISAB II or by pressing the “UP” capacity but-
stantly when the transmitter is in 100% position ton, the slide has not yet been calibrated
whereas it flashes quickly when the transmitter is correctly.
in 0% position.
(Note that it may be necessary to check if
Calibration is carried out as follows: power consumption increases as it cannot
Note: be assumed that the transmitter can supply
Make sure that UNISAB II is not in alarm. more than 20 mA.)
1) Apply supply voltage for a minimum of five 5) If capacity could be increased, cf. above,
minutes before calibration. calibrate the slide again from point 1 but
keep -10% in “CAP 100 ADJ”.
2) Press the calibration button for approx. five
seconds to get the transmitter in calibration 6) Reset “CAP 100 ADJ” to what it was before
mode. The red LED will change from normal the calibration or adjust it until capacity
flash to OFF. shows 100%.
3) With stopped compressor or running in 7) The calibration will be remembered even in
manual mode at min. capacity, press the case of a power failure.
calibration button once. The red LED will To return to “Factory Set Point”, press the CAL.
switch ON immediately. After ten seconds Switch for 20-30 seconds. The green and red LED
the red LED will turn OFF again, indicating will give a short flash (one after the other). The 4-
that it is ready for 100% calibration. 20 mA signal from the transmitter is permanently
4) Start the compressor and increase capacity available. However, during calibration the signal is
to its maximum, and press the calibration based on the default calibration values, so it will
button twice. The red LED will start flashing not show 0% at minimum capacity nor 100% at
quickly. After approx. ten seconds the red maximum capacity!
0178-511 - ENG 133/230

Rev. 2005.03
9. Calibration
Capacity slide adjustment, manual Vi 2) Disconnect the automatic zero point setting
Follow the same procedure as above, but note while setting the transmitter minimum position.
that the capacity transmitter must be adjusted This can be done by setting MANUAL ZERO = 0.1
every time the Vi position is changed. in the picture SETUP I CONFIG.
Capacity slide adjustment, auto V i

Remember to set MANUAL ZERO = 0.0 as
To adjust the movement of the capacity slide the soon as the capacity slide adjustment is ac-
Vi slide must be in minimum position. The Vi slide complished. It is important that the compres-
is brought to minimum the following way: Start the sor only runs for a brief period of time when
compressor in MANUAL, select SETUP I and the automatic zero point setting is disconnect-
then CAPACITY I. ed.
The following picture will appear: Adjustment of volume ratio slide adjustment,
auto Vi
CAPACITY XX
CAP. POS XX It is assumed that the capacity slide has been set
VI POSITION XX correctly.
RUNNING XX Start the compressor in MANUAL and take the
slide up to 20-30%.
Select the Vi POSITION and press I to get to the
following picture: Select CAPACITY I VI POSITION I and the fol-
lowing picture will appear:
SETPOINT 1 0.0%
SETPOINT 1 0.0%
0.0% in this picture indicates that UNISAB II will

adjust the Vi slide automatically. In this picture 0.0% always means that the Vi slide
will be adjusted automatically by UNISAB II.
Change SETPOINT 1 to -10% which will change
the Vi adjustment to manual and place the Vi slide Change SETPOINT 1 to -10%, which changes the
in minimum position. Vi adjustment to manual and places the Vi slide in
minimum position.
Adjust the capacity slide position as described
above under Capacity slide adjustment. After- Return with H to the picture:
wards, remember to reset SET POINT 1 to 0.0%. CAPACITY XX
CAP. POS XX
Capacity slide adjustment, auto zero point VI POSITION XX
For SAB 202 compressors with automatic zero RUNNING XX
point setting, there are two applicable methods to
ensure that the automatic zero point setting does Wait until Vi does not decrease anymore and then
not affect the adjustment of the minimum position press the calibration button for approx. 5 seconds
of the transmitters. to get the transmitter into calibration mode. The
red LED switches from normal flashing to OFF.
1) Do not set the minimum position until the com-
pressor has stopped and the slide is in mechani- Press the calibration button once. The red LED
cal zero. will turn on immediately. After approx. 10 sec-
134/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
9. Calibration
onds the red LED turns off again which indicates See also Adjusting slide speed in section Com-
that it is ready for 100 % calibration. pressor regulation.
Change SET POINT 1 to 110 % and return to the
above picture where the Vi position is now in- Adjusting long-stroke capacity rod for
creasing. Wait until it stops increasing and then SAB 283
press the calibration button twice. (Note that the For type part no. 1373-038
indicated value may not be correct when the
Note: For long-stroke transmitters with part no.
transmitter is in calibration mode). The red LED
1373-057 calibration and terminal connection are
starts flashing quickly. After approx. 10 seconds
similar to that of SAB 110, SAB 128 etc. Please
the red LED switches to normal flashing which in-
see section above.
dicates that calibration is completed. Vi position
will now indicate 100 %. As shown below, the capacity transmitter is fitted
with a single calibration button surrounded by a
Change SET POINT 1 to -10 % and check mini-
green and red LED.
mum.
During normal operation the red LED is flashing
Change SET POINT 1 to 0.0 % for automatic Vi
rather slowly. The green LED is switched on con-
regulation. Besides, UNISAB II will change to au- stantly when the transmitter is in 100% position
tomatic Vi control itself after the compressor has whereas it flashes quickly when the transmitter is
been stopped. in 0% position.
Fig. 9.7
Long-Stroke SAB 283

Calibration‘s push button
Plug connection 1 = supply, +10 to 32V DC

LED-supply/operation
2 = common, 0V DC
3 = out, 4-20 mA LED-digital
3
output (option)
= GND
2 1
Dia
7mm
3
2 1
60mm
74mm
Calibration is carried out as follows: 2. With stopped compressor or running in

Note: manual mode at min. capacity, press the
Make sure that UNISAB II is not in alarm. calibration button once. The red LED will
switch ON. After ten seconds the red LED
1. Apply supply voltage for a minimum of five
minutes before calibration.
0178-511 - ENG 135/230

Rev. 2005.03
9. Calibration
will turn OFF to indicate readiness for 100% Capacity slide adjustment, manual Vi
calibration. Follow the same procedure as above, but note
3. Start the compressor and move the slide to that the capacity transmitter must be adjusted
100% position and press the calibration but- every time the Vi position is changed.
ton again. The red LED will start flashing Capacity slide adjustment, auto V i
quickly. After ten seconds the calibration will To adjust the movement of the capacity slide the
be completed and the red LED will flash nor- Vi slide must be in minimum position. The Vi slide
mally. is brought to minimum the following way: Start the
4) To make sure that the slide is in maximum compressor in MANUAL and select CAPACITY
physical position, (UNISAB II does not allow I.
the capacity button to be activated after The following picture will appear:
100% indication in the display has been
CAPACITY XX
reached) it is recommended to set “CAP
CAP. POS XX
100 ADJ” at -10% after 100% calibration of VI POSITION XX
the transmitter has been completed and the RUNNING XX
slide remains in maximum position. See the
Software Calibration section earlier in this Select the Vi POSITION and press I to get to the
section. The slide indication in the display following picture:
must now be 90%. If capacity can be in-
creased further either automatically by UN- SETPOINT 1 0.0%
ISAB II or by pressing the “UP” capacity but-

ton, the slide has not yet been calibrated 0.0% in this picture indicates that UNISAB II will
correctly. (Note that it may be necessary to adjust the Vi slide automatically.
check if power requirements increase as it
cannot be assumed that the transmitter can Change SETPOINT 1 to -10% which will change
supply more than 20 mA.) the Vi adjustment to manual and place the Vi slide
in minimum position.
5) If capacity could be increased, cf. above,
calibrate the slide again from point 1 but Adjust the capacity slide position as described
keep -10% in “CAP 100 ADJ”. above under Adjusting long stroke capacity trans-
mitter. Afterwards, remember to reset SET POINT
6) Reset “CAP 100 ADJ” at what it was before
1 to 0.0%.
the calibration or adjust until capacity shows
100%.
136/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
9. Calibration
Adjusting short-stroke capacity rod 2. With stopped compressor or running in

manual mode at min. capacity, press the
- for GST, GSV and RWF from Gram
Refrigeration and short-stroke volume calibration button once. The red LED will
transmitter for GSV, RWF and SAB 283 and switch ON. After approx. ten seconds the
SAB 355. red LED will turn OFF to indicate readiness
For part no. 1373-037 for 100% calibration.
Note: For short-stroke transmitters with part no. 3. Start the compressor and move the capacity
1373-061 calibration and terminal connection are slide to 100% position and press the calibra-
similar to that of SAB 100, SAB 128 etc. Please tion button again. The red LED will start
see section above. flashing quickly. After ten seconds the cali-
bration will be completed and the red LED
Fig. 9.8
will flash normally.
Short-Stroke Capacity slide adjustment, manual Vi
Follow the same procedure as above, but note
LED-Supply that the capacity transmitter must be adjusted
Calibration push button
every time the Vi position is changed.
LED-Digital output Capacity slide adjustment, auto V i
Plug Connection To adjust the movement of the capacity slide the

Vi slide must be in minimum position. The Vi slide
is brought to minimum the following way: Start the
compressor in MANUAL and select CAPACITY
I.
1 = Supply, 24V DC
2 = Common -, 0V DC The following picture will appear:
3 = Out, 4-20mA
= GND CAPACITY XX
CAP. POS XX
As shown above, the capacity transmitter is fitted VI POSITION XX
with a single calibration button surrounded by a RUNNING XX
green and red LED. During normal operation the
red LED is flashing rather slowly. The green LED Select the Vi POSITION and press I to get to the
is switched on constantly when the transmitter is following picture:
in 100% position whereas it flashes quickly when
SETPOINT 1 0.0%
the transmitter is in 0% position.
Capacity calibration is carried out as follows:
0.0% in this picture indicates that UNISAB II will
Note:
adjust the Vi slide automatically.
Make sure that UNISAB II is not in alarm.
Change SETPOINT 1 to -10% which will change
1. Apply supply voltage for minimum five min-
the Vi adjustment to manual and place the Vi slide
utes before calibration.
in minimum position.
0178-511 - ENG 137/230

Rev. 2005.03
9. Calibration
Adjust the capacity slide position as described Change SET POINT 1 to 0.0% for automatic Vi
above under Adjusting short-stroke capacity control. Besides, UNISAB II will change to auto-
transmitter. Afterwards, remember to reset SET matic Vi control itself after the compressor has
POINT 1 to 0.0%. been stopped.
Volume ratio slide adjustment, auto Vi See also Adjusting slide velocity in section Com-
It is assumed that the capacity slide has been set pressor regulation.
correctly.
Start the compressor in MANUAL and take the Electrical slide systems
slide up to 20-30%. (certain screw compressors)
Select CAPACITY I VI POSITION and the fol- The built-in capacity slide position transmitter
lowing picture will appear: must be adjusted correctly to ensure safe and sta-
ble slide control. This adjustment must always be
SETPOINT 1 0.0% carried out as described in section Transmitter ad-
justment.
Afterwards, the capacity signal must be
In this picture 0.0% will always mean that the Vi
adjusted by software as described in section
slide will be adjusted automatically by UNISAB II. Software adjustment.
Change SETPOINT 1 to -10%, which changes the
Manual slide positioning
Vi adjustment to manual and places the Vi slide in
Contrary to hydraulic slides, the electrical capacity
minimum position.
slide can be positioned manually for test. This is
Return with H to the picture: useful both when performing transmitter adjust-
CAPACITY XX ment and software adjustment.
CAP. POS XX
Select SETUP I CONTROL I COMPRESSOR-
VI POSITION XX
CONTROL = STOPPED and then SETUP I
RUNNING XX
CALIBRATE I CAPACITY. The picture shown in
Wait until Vi does not decrease any further and section Software adjustment will appear. While
push the calibration button once. The red LED is this picture is open (and still STOPPED mode), it
now constantly ON. After 10 sec. the red LED will is possible to move the capacity slide by means of
turn OFF to indicate that it is ready for 100% cali- the E and F buttons.
bration. Note that when reaching the end stop, the alarm
Change SET POINT 1 to 110% and return to the CAPACITY ERROR will be displayed after two
above picture where the Vi position will increase. seconds. Release the button at once and reset the
Wait until it does not increase any further and alarm.
push the calibration button once again. The red Transmitter adjustment
LED will flash quickly and after 10 sec. the calibra- The capacity transmitter is fitted with a single cal-
tion is completed and the red LED will flash nor- ibration button surrounded by a green and a red
mally. LED as shown in Fig. 9.9.
Change SET POINT 1 to -10% and check mini-
mum.
138/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
9. Calibration
Fig. 9.9
Calibration
push button LED-Working
LED-Position (red)
(green)
Normally
not visible.
For calibration
remove cover
During normal operation the red LED is flashing will start flashing quickly. After ten seconds
rather slowly. The green LED is switched on con- the red LED will change to normal flash rate,
stantly when the transmitter is in 100% position indicating that calibration has been complet-
whereas it flashes quickly when the transmitter is ed.
in 0% position. It is possible to ignore points 3 or 4 or both. Press-
Calibration is carried out as follows: ing the calibration button for five seconds in cali-
1. Apply supply voltage for a minimum of five bration mode will bring the transmitter back to nor-
minutes before calibration. mal operation mode.
2. Press the calibration button for five seconds The 4-20 mA signal from the transmitter is perma-
to get the transmitter in calibration mode. nently available. However, during calibration the
The red LED will change from normal flash signal is based on the default calibration values,
to OFF. so it will not show 0% at minimum capacity nor
100% at maximum capacity!
3. Decrease capacity to its minimum and press
the calibration button once. The red LED Note that it is possible to return to the default cal-
will turn ON. After ten seconds the red LED ibration values by keeping the CAL Switch
will turn OFF again, indicating that the posi- pressed for twenty seconds. However, it is the
tion transmitter is ready for 100% calibra- transmitter manufacturer's default values, which
tion. are reset. These values may differ very much from
the correct values for the compressor in question.
4. Increase capacity to its maximum and press Reset is indicated by the red and green LED flash-
the calibration button twice. The red LED ing briefly a couple of times.
0178-511 - ENG 139/230

Rev. 2005.03
9. Calibration
Software adjustment If a factory reset is carried out, the following

When the capacity position transmitter has been points will be affected:
adjusted (see section Transmitter adjustment), - Alarm and warning limits
the capacity must be further adjusted. It is recom-
- Timer setup
mended to introduce a calculation offset of 2% to
ensure that the slide does not collide with the end - Regulator settings
stops. Collisions will reduce slide motor service - State of control
life, etc.
The factory settings appear from the tables in sec-
Select SETUP I CALIBRATE I CAPACITY tions Alarms and warnings, Timers as well as
CAPACITY XXX.X % Compressor regulation.
CAP. ZERO AD XX.X %
Before carrying out factory reset, STOP the com-
CAP 100 ADJ XX.X %
pressor.
Decrease capacity to its minimum. Change CAP. Select CONFIG I FACTORY RESET and
ZERO AD so that a value of -2.0% is displayed for change from NO to YES.
CAPACITY.
Now press H and UNISAB II will display the fol-
If capacity is eg 0.3 %
lowing:
(when CAP. ZERO AD = 0.0%),
CONFIGURATION CHANGED
select CAP. ZERO AD = - 2.3%.
RESTARTS!
Increase capacity to its maximum. Change CAP PLEASE WAIT
100 ADJ so that a value of 102.0 % is displayed
for CAPACITY. Within a few seconds the operation will be com-
If capacity is eg 100.3% (when CAP 100ADJ = 0.0 pleted and UNISAB II can be adjusted to the actu-
%), select al operating conditions.
CAP 100ADJ = 1.7 %. REMEMBER to fill in the forms for actual settings.
These forms are included in the back of this man-
Factory setting ual.
During configuration it is possible to bring
UNISAB II back to its factory settings.
140/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
10. Trouble shooting

If irregularities occur in connection with the run- An interruption of the voltage to UNISAB II will not
ning of the compressor, it is possible to inspect cause any loss of information. Thus, the informa-
UNISAB II to determine the cause of these irregu- tion can be displayed again once the supply volt-
larities. age has been restored.
Please note that even though the voltage to
UNISAB II is disconnected, there may still be live Diagnosis pictures
wires containing unknown voltage. If the menu DIAGNOSIS is selected, the following
Before beginning the trouble-shooting, disconnect picture will appear:
the main supply to the compressor motor to pre- DIAGNOSIS
vent it from starting inadvertently. 1 INSPECT OLD ALARMS

2 MISC. FUNCTIONS
There are light diodes on the printed circuit board. 3 SOFTWARE VERSION
These diodes make it possible to state the condi- 4 DIGITAL INPUTS
tion of the in- and outputs. It is also possible to en- 5 DIGITAL OUTPUTS
ter different menu pictures and have various 6 ANALOG INPUTS
states displayed. 7 ANALOG OUTPUTS
8 NO OF ALARMS
Finally, UNISAB II includes a function, which in
9 SUPERUSER PASSWORD
case of an alarm will store the operating situation
10 SERIAL NUMBER
including time and date. This makes it possible 11 EXAMINE MEMORY
subsequently to inspect this information on the 12 NEW PASSWORD
display, which is particularly useful when search- 13 POWER ON
ing for the cause of a compressor shutdown. 14 ZERO CAPACITY POS.
15 COP
In this way UNISAB II can store up to 30 alarm sit-
16 PROFICOM
uations where the most recent alarm will replace
17 ROTATUNE PISTON
the oldest one.
0178-511 - ENG 141/230

Rev. 2005.03
1) Diagnosis I Insp. old alarms

With the cursor in this field and a pressure on I a SUCT.TEMP 20.3°C
SUCT.PRESS -10.4°C/R
picture with the most recent alarm will appear.
SUCT. SUPERH 30.7°C
Example: DISCH.TEMP 68.7°C
ALARM 940715-0740 DISCH.PRESS 44.7°C/R
HIGH DISCHARGE PRESSURE DISCH.SUPERH 24.0°C
BRINE TEMP 22.1°C
The picture shows that on 15 July 1994 at 07:40 OIL TEMP 39.1°C
hrs an alarm was activated due to high discharge OIL PRESS 3.9 BAR
pressure. DIFF.PRESS 0.0 BAR
INTERM.TEMP 22.1°C
To inspect old alarms, press K and the previous
INTERM.PRESS 0.0 BAR
alarm will appear. VI POSITION 62.0 %
When the alarm of interest is displayed, press I CAP POSITION 29.8 %
and the following picture will appear: EXT.INPUT 0.0 %

MOTOR CURR 113A
1 CTRL STATE
2 MEASURE VALUES
This picture shows all the measuring values con-
3 IMPUT STATE
nected to the above alarm. Note that not all values
4 OUTPUT STATE
are relevant for all compressor types.
Under this menu every piece of operating informa- If a different alarm situation is selected, a similar
tion which existed at the moment of the alarm is set of measuring values will appear.
stored.
Use H to get back to the menu, select INPUT
In the alarm situation HIGH DISCHARGE PRES- STATE and press I, and the following picture will
SURE, do as follows to inspect the situations 1-4. appear:
With the cursor on CTRL STATE and I the fol- D.INPUT 1 1
lowing picture will appear: D.INPUT 2 1
D.INPUT 3 1
CONTROL MANUAL
D.INPUT 4 1
DISCHARGE LIM
D.INPUT 5 0
START NO 1
D.INPUT 6 0
SYSTEM NO 1
D.INPUT 7 0
The compressor has been in MANUAL mode and D.INPUT 8 0

D.INPUT 9 1
has been limited due to high pressure. Further-
D.INPUT 10 0
more, it has been programmed to START NO 1
D.INPUT 11 0
and SYSTEM NO 1.
Use H to go back to the menu, select MEASURE Here the state of all digital inputs connected to the
VALUES and press I ,and the following picture selected alarm can be read.
will appear: 0 = The input has been open
1 = The input has been closed.
142/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
Use H to go back to the menu, select OUTPUT

STATE and press I , and the following picture will DIAGNOSIS
appear: 1 INSPECT OLD ALARMS
D.OUTPUT 1 0 2 MISC. FUNCTIONS
D.OUTPUT 2 0 3 SOFTWARE VERSION
D.OUTPUT 3 0 4 DIGITAL INPUTS
D.OUTPUT 4 0 5 DIGITAL OUTPUTS
D.OUTPUT 5 0 6 ANALOG INPUTS
D.OUTPUT 6 0 7 ANALOG OUTPUTS
D.OUTPUT 7 0 8 NO OF ALARMS
D.OUTPUT 8 0 9 SUPERUSER PASSWORD
D.OUTPUT 9 0 10 SERIAL NUMBER
D.OUTPUT 10 0 11 EXAMINE MEMORY
D.OUTPUT 11 0 12 NEW PASSWORD
D.OUTPUT 12 1 13 POWER ON
D.OUTPUT 13 1 14 ZERO CAPACITY POS.
D.OUTPUT 14 0 15 COP
D.OUTPUT 15 1 16 PROFICOM
D.OUTPUT 16 1 17 ROTATUNE PISTON
D.OUTPUT 17 0
D.OUTPUT 18 0
2) Diagnosis I Misc. functions
Here the state of all digital outputs connected to This picture includes four items:
the selected alarm can be read. SUCT. RAMP L X.X°C/R
SUCT. SUPERH XX.X°C
0 = The output has been open
CAPACITY XXX.X SEC
1 = The output has been activated.
BRAKE DLY X.X SEC
Tables 11 and 12 below show the numbering of
in-/outputs on screw and reciprocating compres- The first item SUCT. RAMP L. shows the state of
sors respectively. the suction ramp function. See section Limiting
functions, Suction ramp.
Return to the previous menu by pressing H:
The value shows the actual suction pressure limit,
which will be equal to the suction pressure set
point if the suction ramp is not active. When the
suction ramp is active, the value will decrease by
1°C every N seconds, where N is the selected val-
ue of the SUCT. RAMP timer.
The second item SUCT. SUPERH is the same as
the suction superheat set point 2, which is used by
the High Discharge Pipe Temperature Limiter.
See section Limiting functions, Special limiters.
0178-511 - ENG 143/230

Rev. 2005.03
The third and the fourth items are explained in 0 = Output open
section Compressor regulation, Electrical slide 1 = Output closed
control.
Table 11 below shows the numbering of the out-
puts.
3) Diagnosis I Software version
Here it can be checked which program version is
6) Diagnosis I Analog inputs
running in UNISAB II:
(Pressures, Temperatures, Current)
Example:
In this picture it is always possible to check the ac-
UNISAB II
tual state of the analog inputs both at compressor
2.00
standstill and during operation.
Sabroe Refrigeration
000119 13 : 46 The picture looks as follows:
PRESS INP 1 XXXX
PRESS INP 2 XXXX
4) Diagnosis I Digital inputs
PRESS INP 3 XXXX
In this picture it is always possible to check the ac- PRESS INP 4 XXXX
tual state of the digital inputs both at compressor PT 100 INP 1 XXXX
standstill and during operation. PT 100 INP 2 XXXX
PT 100 INP 3 XXXX
The inputs are numbered from 1 to 11 and their
PT 100 INP 4 XXXX
particular status is displayed.
CURR. XXXX
0 = Input open EXT. XXXX
CAP. XXXX
1 = Input closed
VI. XXXX
Table 11 below shows the numbering of the in-
puts. It is 12 bit A/D-converted raw values of the input
signal which are displayed.
5) Diagnosis I Digital outputs The displayed raw values are interpreted in the
In this picture it is always possible to check the ac- following way (see tables below):
tual state of the digital outputs both at compressor
standstill and during operation.
Pressure
Reading 7 752 7310 8191
Input from pres.transmit. (VDC) 0 0.5 4.5 5.0
Pt100
Reading -2000 -700 +1850 +2000
Temperature (°C) -200 -70 +185 +200
144/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
Ext, Cap, Vi
Reading 7 1606 4818 8030
Input (mA) 0 4 12 20
Curr.
Reading 7 5910
Input (Amp AC) 0 1.0
Table 12 shows the numbering of the analog in- 8) Diagnosis I No of alarms

puts. The total number of alarms in the working life of
the control system is shown here.
7) Diagnosis I Analog outputs Use K and J to inspect the list.
ANALOG OUTPUTS 0.0%
TEST MODE NO
9) Diagnosis I Superuser keyword
TEST VALUE 0.0%
In this picture any application of the superuser
In this menu picture it is possible to see which an- password including date and hour is registered.
alog output value (in percentage) UNISAB II is Use K and J to inspect the list.
transmitting to the equipment to which it is con-
nected. The signal is a 4-20 mA signal and is usu-
10) Diagnosis I Serial number
ally used for regulating the speed of a frequency
converter. When using analog regulation of the In this picture it is possible to read some of the in-
frequency converter, it is possible at the same formation related to the EEPROM
time to regulate the capacity and Vi slides digitally. SERIAL NO 123456
COMMISIONED 950101
This requires that UNISAB II be fitted with an add-
ERASE EEPROM NO
on printed circuit board (UNICOM IF) between re-
lay print and CPU print. The add-on board is addi- The compressor serial no can be read.
tional equipment. See section Configuration for
detailed information on the use of this board. The date of compressor start-up (date of initial
start-up) can be read.
As long as the above menu picture is shown in the
display, it is possible to select test mode = YES By using a special password it is possible to erase
and enter a test value between 0 and 100%. the EEPROM.
UNISAB II will thus transmit an mA signal corre-
sponding to the test value. 11) Diagnosis I Examine memory
Note: Do not let the compressor motor run when This picture is used for software debugging. A
using test mode as the motor revolutions will fol- section of 8 bytes from the RAM store is shown on
low the changes in the signal. However, test mode the display. The starting address of this section,
can be used to check whether the frequency con- which is the figure shown at the top to the left, can
verter receives the signal correctly by reading the be changed by means of H I and K J.
analog input signal in the menu system of the con- 0000 00 00 70 3A
verter. 0004 00 00 00 00
0178-511 - ENG 145/230

Rev. 2005.03
12) Diagnosis J New password The calculated COP values and a number of inter-
In this picture it is possible to change the pass- mediate calculations are shown in this picture:
word. See section Operating the UNISAB II con- COP XX.X
COP CARNOT X.XX
trol.
COP MECH. X.XX
COOLING OUTPUT XXXX KW
13) Diagnosis I Power on MASS FLOW XXXX kg/h
In this picture it can be checked how many times SHAFT POWER XXXX KW
the power supply for UNISAB II has be reconnect- ABSORBED POWER XXXX KW
MOT. EFFICIENCY XX.X %
ed. This menu is used for trouble shooting.
VOL. FLOW XXXX m3/h
POWER ON OVH.SPC.VOL XXXX l/kg
020606 22:53:31 SAT.SPC.VOL XXXX l/kg
+00000011 ENTALPI H1 XXXX kj/kg

ENTALPI H4 XXXX kj/kg
ENTALPI H2 XXXX kj/kg
14) Diagnosis I Zero capacity pos. LIQUID TEMP XX.X °C
The current calculated value of the zero point as

A more comprehensive description of the COP
well as any manual setting value of the zero point
function and the setting of this can be found in the
can be read in this picture:
manual UNISAB II-COP.
CALCULATED ZERO 22%
MANUAL ZERO 0.0% 16) Diagnosis I PROFICOM
CAP.POSITION 66.5% Only for internal use within Sabroe Refrigera-
CAPACITY 100.0% tion, Marine Group.
In this menu picture it can be checked how
(current reading 0-40%)
UNISAB II communicates with other equipment
(manual adjustment 0-40%)
using PROFIBUS communication. The use of
(immediate slide position, 4-20 mA)
PROFIBUS communication in UNISAB II has not
(corrected capacity - as read)
yet been completed. At the moment PROFIBUS
can therefore only be used for communication
15) Diagnosis I COP with Mitsubishi PLCs of the type FX2N.
UNISAB II can be set to measure the compressor INIT MESS 0
COP values (Coefficient Of Performance) as well
I/0 LENGTH ERR 0
as the mechanical efficiency and the Carnot effi-
MODE 0
ciency.
NEXT 0
17) Diagnosis I Rotatune piston

Only for internal use.
146/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
Table 11 - Numbering of digital inputs and outputs

Screw compressors 13. Warning
INPUTS: 14. Aux. output (Compressor ready to start at
1. Compressor motor starter feedback remote control, limit switch for capacity).
2. External starting permission - normal stop- 15. Starting request (PMS)
ping procedure 16. Compressor motor starting signal
3. External starting permission - stop immedi- 17. Prelubrication pump starting signal
ately
18. Full flow pump (cooling fan) starting signal
4. Starting request OK (PMS)
5. Regulator set point no 1 /set point no 2
INPUTS:
6. Motor current limit value no 1/limit value no
1. Compressor motor starter feedback
2
2. External starting permission - normal stop-
7. Oil pump motor starter feedback
ping procedure
8. Full flow pump (cooling fan) motor starter
3. External starting permission - stop immedi-
feedback
ately
9. Oil float switch
4. Starting request OK(PMS)
10. Capacity down blocked
5. Regulator set point no 1 /set point no 2
11. Thermistors in motor windings
6. Motor current limit value no 1/limit value no
OUTPUTS: 2
1. Capacity down 7. Thermostat for oil return control. Intermedi-
2. Capacity up ate pressure oil separator.
3. Volume down 8. Thermostat for oil return control. High pres-

sure oil separator
4. Volume up
9. Oil differential switch (Mk4)
5. Economizer - suction line
10. Capacity down blocked
6. Economizer - liquid line
11. Thermistors in motor windings
7. Oil cooling system (HLI/BLI cooling)
OUTPUTS:
8. Oil cooling system (not used in HLI/BLI cool-
ing) 1. Capacity stage no 1
9. Oil distribution pipe 2. Capacity stage no 2
10. Oil rectifier (Only MKD configuration; other- 3. Capacity stage no 3

wise not used) 4. Capacity stage no 4
11 Heating element 5. Capacity stage no 5
12. Alarm 6. Capacity stage no 6
0178-511 - ENG 147/230

Rev. 2005.03
7. Capacity stage no 7 / intermediate pressure 13. Warning

injection 14. Aux. output, (Compressor ready to start at
8. Oil cooling / thermo pump / thermo pump remote control, limit switch for capacity).
solenoid valve for ventilation 15. Starting request (PMS)
9. Oil return 16. Compressor motor starting signal
10. Water cooling 17. Oil rectifier
11. Heating element 18. Additional steps, valve B
12. Alarm
148/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
Table 12 - Numbering of analog inputs

Screw compressors TSMC,TCMO
Pressures: 1. Suct.press.-1/+9 bar r
1. Suction pressure-1/+9 bar r 2. Disch.press. -1/+25 bar r
2. Discharge pressure-1/+25 bar r 3. Oil press. -1/+25 bar r
3. Oil pressure-1/+25 bar r 4. Interm.press.-1/+25 bar r
4. Oil pressure before filter-1/+25 bar r HPC, HPO
Temperatures: 1. Suct.press.-1/+25 bar r
1. Suction temperature 2. Disch.press. -1/+59 bar r
2. Discharge temperature 3. Oil press. -1/+25 bar r
3. Oil temperature 4. Interm.press.Not used
4. Brine or water temperature
Current inputs: Temperatures:
1. Capacity slide position4-20 mA 1. Suction temperature
2. Volume slide position/ 2. Discharge temperature

outside temp.4-20 mA 3. Oil temperature
3. Motor current0-1 A AC 4. Brine or water temperature (Intermedi-
4. External set point / ate temp. on TSMC, TCMO)
ext. measuring signal4-20 mA
Reciprocating compressors Current inputs:
Pressures: 1. Not used
SMC, CMO 2. Outside temperature4-20 mA
1. Suct.press.-/+9 bar r 3. Motor current0-1 A AC
2. Disch.press. -1/+25 bar r 4. External set point /
3. Oil press. -1/+25 bar r ext. measuring signal4-20mA
4. Interm.press.Not used
0178-511 - ENG 149/230

Rev. 2005.03
Printed circuit board, light diodes Light in diode = output activated.

When opening the UNISAB II door, a number of COMMUNICATION DL12 (red), DL14 (yellow),
light diodes can be inspected on the printed circuit DL13 (green)
boards. In case UNISAB II communicates with other units,
The following signals have light diodes: the flashing of the diodes must be irregular.
DIGITAL INPUTS (Green,12 pcs) The red diode indicates that UNISAB II is trans-
DIGITAL OUTPUTS (Red, 18 pcs) mitting information whereas the green diode indi-
cates that information is being received.
COMMUNICATION (one red, one yellow, one
green) SUPPLY, RST1 (red)
SUPPLY (One red) This diode will flash briefly while voltage is con-
nected to UNISAB II. During normal operation the
CPU PRINT (One green, one red) light is off.
Positioning and identification of these light diodes In case the diode flashes repeatedly when voltage
can be seen from the following drawing. is connected, there may be an error in the voltage
DIGITAL INPUTS, DI1 to DI12 (Green) supply.
The light diodes are marked from DI1 to DI12 and CPU PRINT, ACT1 (green), RST1 (red)
the attached functions appear from the list of in- The green light diode must flash irregularly when-
puts. ever UNISAB II is electrified. A constant light or no
Light in diode = input activated. light is a sign of malfunction.
DIGITAL OUPUTS, DLR1 to DLR18 (Red) The red light diode must usually be off. It is only
The light diodes are marked from DLR1 to DLR18 on for brief moments in case the CPU tries to re-
and the attached functions appear from the list of start the program. This may only happen while
outputs. UNISAB II is switched on.
150/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
Fig. 10.1 Printed circuit board with light diodes
TERMINALS RED Communication
Transmitter EPROM
YELLOW
GREEN
Receiver
DIGITAL
OUTPUTS CPU PRINT
1) Capacity slide down

RE1 2) Capacity stage
1) Capacity slide up
RE2
2) Capacity stage 2
RE3 1) Volume slide down GREEN RED

2) Capacity stage 3
ACT1 RST1
RE4 1) Volume slide up
2) Capacity stage 4
1) Economizer suction line
RE5
2) Capacity stage 5
1) Economizer liquid line
RE6 2) Capacity stage 6
Battery
1) HLI/BLI cooling
RE1
RE7
2) Capacity stage 7/intermed. press. injection
1) Oil cooling
RE8
2) Oil cooling/thermo pump
DIGITAL
RE9 1) Oil distribution pipe
2) Oil return INPUTS
1) Oil rectifier DI1 Compressor operation
RE10
2) Water cooling
DI2 EXT. start, normal stop
RE11 1) Heating element
2) Heating element DI3 EXT. start, immediate stop
DI4 Starting request (PMS)
RE12 Alarm
DI5 Regulator Sp1/Sp2
RE13 Warning DI6 Motor currentSp1/Sp2
1) Oil pump operation
RE14 DI7
AUX. output 2) Oil return interm.press
DI8 1) Full flow pump operation
RE15 2) Oil return high pressure
Starting request DI9 1) Oil flow switch
2) Oil differential pressostat (mk4)
DI10
RE16 Compressor start Capacity down blocked
DI11 Thermistor (no light function)
RE17 1) Oil pump start
2) Oil rectifier DI12 Not used
RE18 1) Full flow pump

2) Additional steps, valve B
230 VAC 115 VAC 24 VAC

RED
1) Screw compressor
K22 RST1
2) Reciprocating compressor
0178-511 - ENG 151/230

Rev. 2005.03
152/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
11. Trouble shooting diagrams

Fig. 11.1 Error diagram no 1
Start of reciprocating/screw compressor in MANUAL operating mode
MANUAL
operation
Is there light No Select picture COMPRESSOR CTRL-

in yellow C MODE and adjust to MANUAL
on front?
Yes
Check that input EXT. START IMMED. STOP termi-

nals 45-46 is closed. Light in green diode no. 3 on
Display
=
No print. Can also be checked in picture DIAGNOSIS I
READY DIGITAL INPUT no 3=1.
Yes
Display
Yes =
READY
No
Recipr./screw Screw
Prelubrication
No Yes
Contact
Sabroe Ref.
1 2
0178-511 - ENG 153/230

Rev. 2005.03
Start of reciprocating/screw compressor in MANUAL mode, continued

1
Press A to start compressor.

3 Green light diode on front
flashes
Does Check emerg. stop and TÜV pres-

OK Yes No sure control, if any. There must be
compres-
sor start? connection between terminals
125-126 and 127-128.
Check that input STARTING REQUEST PMS

FEEDBACK terminals 47-48 is closed. Light Yes error mes-
in green diode no 4 on print. Can also be sage re-
checked in picture DIAGNOSIS I ceived
DIGITAL INPUT no 4 = 1.
No
Input Yes Is relay no 16

closed? Try again activated on No Contact
print when try- Sabroe Ref.
ing to start (red
light diode)?
No
Yes
Apply jumper, or check connec-
tions from terminals 116-117 to Check connection from terminals 118-
power management system. 119 to motor starter
Yes No Correct wiring

Connection connect.
OK?
Is there feed-
back on termi-
nals 41-42 from No Correct wiring
motor guard? connection
Green light di-
ode no 1 on
print.
Yes
Check pre-fuses and control volt-

age of motor guard.
154/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
Start of screw compressor/prelubrication in MANUAL mode, continued
Press A to start compressor.

Green light diode flashes on front.
Yes Oil pump

starts?
No
Error mes- No
sage in oil 3 Check that input STARTING REQUEST
system? FEEDBACK terminals 47-48 are closed.
PMS Light in green diode no. 4 on print. Can
error mes- Yes also be checked in picture DIAGNOSIS
Yes sage re- I DIGITAL INPUT no. 4=1.
ceived?
Check wiring connec-
tion to oil float. When No
float has been activat-
ed, green light diode no No Input Yes Try again
9 will flash on print. closed?
Apply jumper, or check con-

nections from terminals 116-
No 117 to power management
Connection Correct wiring
system.
OK? connect.
Relay no 17
Yes is activated No Check that CONFIG I
PRELUBRICATION = YES.
on print. Red
Check float
light diode
function
Yes
Check connection from terminals 120-

121 to pump motor starter
Connection No Correct wiring

OK? connection
Yes
Check if feedback is received on termi-
nals 53-54 (green light diode no 7 on
print) from pump motor guard
Check pre-fuses and control voltage of Yes No Correct wiring

Connection
pump motor guard. connect.
OK?
0178-511 - ENG 155/230

Rev. 2005.03
Start of reciprocating/screw compressor in AUTO mode
Prepare for AUTOMATIC opera-

tion
Select regulating form in picture

CONFIG I CONTROL ON
Set Set point, neutral zone and

P. Band for chosen regulator
Select picture CTRL MODE and

set to AUTO
With C it is possible to change

between MANUAL and AUTO by
one single pressure. Adjust to
MANUAL (= light in yellow diode)
In CONFIG check that

AUTO START = YES and
AUTO STOP = YES
Check setting of START DELAY

in picture TIMER SETUP
Check that input EXT. START IMMED. STOP

No terminals 45-46 is closed. Light in green diode
Display
no 3 on print. Can also be checked in picture
READY?
DIAGNOSIS I DIGITAL INPUT no 3=1.
Yes
Yes
Display
READY?
No
4 5
156/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
Start of reciprocating/screw compressor in AUTO mode, continued
4 5
Check that input EXT. START,

NORM. STOP terminals 43-44 is
closed. Light in green diode no 2
print. Can also be checked in pic-
ture DIAGNOSIS I DIGITAL IN-
PUT no 2=1.
Yes Display =
READY?
Press C so that light in No

diode goes out = AUTO
Contact
Sabroe Ref.
Compressor can now begin start-up

phase depending on setting of regu-
lator. REMEMBER that start is de-
layed by timer START DELAY.
Is cool-
ing/heat- No Change set point or wait for cool-
ing re- ing/heating requirement.
quired?
Yes
Recipr./screw Screw
Prelubrication
No Yes
7 6
0178-511 - ENG 157/230

Rev. 2005.03
Start of reciprocating/screw compressor in AUTO mode, continued
At compressor start-up
green light diode on front
will flash.
Check emerg. stop and TÜV pres-

sure control, if any. There must be
connection between terminals 125-
Does com- 126 and 127-128.
Yes No
OK pressor
start?
PMS
Yes error
message
received?
Check that input STARTING RE-
QUEST FEEDBACK terminals 47-48
is closed. Light in green diode no. 4 No
on print. Can also be checked in pic-
ture DIAGNOSIS I DIGITAL INPUT
no 4=1. Is relay no 16
activated on No
Contact
print when try-
Sabroe Ref.
ing to start (red
No Input Yes light diode)
closed? Try again
Yes
Apply jumper, or check con-
nections from terminals
116-117 to power manage- Check connection from terminals
ment system. 118-119 to motor starter
Yes No Correct wiring con-

Connection
OK? nection
Is there feedback
on terminals 41-42 No Correct wiring con-
from motor guard? nection
Green light diode
no 1 on print.
Yes
Check pre-fuses and control

fuses of motor guard.
158/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
Start of screw compressor/prelubrication in AUTO mode, continued
At compressor start green light

diode on front will flash.
Check that input STARTING REQUEST

FEEDBACK terminals 47-48 are closed.
Oil pump Light in green diode no. 4 on print. Can
Yes also be checked in picture DIAGNOSIS
starts?
I DIGITAL INPUT no. 4=1.
Error mes- No
No
sage in oil
system? No Input Yes
PMS Try again
Yes closed
7 error mes-
Yes sage
received?
shortly Apply jumper, or check connec-
tions from terminal 116-117 to
Check wiring connec- power management system.
tion to oil float. When No
float has been activat-
ed, green light diode
no 9 will flash on print. Relay no
17 is acti- No Check that CONFIG I
vated on PRELUBRICATION = YES
print. Red
light diode.
Yes
Connec- No Correct
tion OK? wiring connect. Check connection from terminals 120-121 to
the pump motor starter.
Yes
Check float function No Correct wiring

Connection
connection
OK?
Yes
Check if feedback is received on terminals 53-54 on

green light diode no 7 on print from motor guard.
Check pre-fuses and control fuses of Yes Connection No Correct wiring

motor guard. connection
OK?
0178-511 - ENG 159/230

Rev. 2005.03
General trouble shooting, UNISAB II
No light/text in display
Is diode on
No Is there light in Yes
CPU print
ACT1 flashing
any diodes on 8
relay card
green
Yes No
Check connection to Check supply on termi-

display. If necessary, nals L and N
pull out white plug and
refit.
Is
voltage No
correct?
9
Contact No Display
Sabroe Ref. Yes
OK?
Check that white code
Yes plug has been fitted.
Problem
solved
= 230 VAC
= 115 VAC
Display reads COPY
EEROM after power =24 VAC
cut
Probably defective bat- Is

tery Yes
plug
correct?
10
No
Replace battery. See Fit correct plug

section, Service, Bat-
tery
160/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
CPU print may have to be re-

8 placed
Check voltage supply of any

9 loose connections, burnt fuses
or the like
Check voltage on terminals 141-

10 142 = 24 VAC
Transformer thermally
Is this
activated. May have to
OK
be replaced.
Check fuse in black re-

tainer.
Is this Replace fuse.

OK? Max 3 Amp.
Are terminals
29-32-37 short- Correct error
circuited to
frame?
Are terminals
29-30-33 or 37- Correct error
38 short-
circuited?
Are there any er-

rors in external Correct error or replace
components to component
term. 29-30; 32-
33; 37-38
Contact
Sabroe Ref.
0178-511 - ENG 161/230

Rev. 2005.03
162/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
12. Service
12. Service
In case some of the main parts of UNISAB II are a. Door in which display and keyboard are fit-
defective, it is possible to replace them. ted.
It is recommended to contact b. Relay print with wiring connections.
Sabroe Refrigeration before changing any of c. CPU print fitted on relay print.
these parts.
d. Transformer.
The main parts comprise:
The parts are shown below in Fig. 12.1.
Fig. 12.1
Keyboard connection Display connection

EEPROM
PAL Battery
U17 EPROM U17 Cooling
plate Trans-
U18 EPROM U18 former
CPU print Fuse
Digital inputs
Empty socket!
NEVER use this
socket together
with sockets pos.
Digital outputs
U17 and U18
Terminals
All replacements must be carried out with Replacement of CPU print

UNISAB II in a state of no voltage. Remember that Dismantle the door completely to provide free ac-
outside control voltage may be connected. cess to the printed circuit board.
Disconnect the main supply to the motor to avoid Remove the screws with which the print is se-
risk of inadvertent start-up. cured. Get hold of the bottom of the print and pull
it out carefully. It may be fixed rather firmly as it is
Replacement of door positioned in two plugs with connection to the re-
Remove the blue and white plugs leading to the lay print. It is important to pull at the side of the
relay print (the two securing lugs must be bent a print in which the plugs are positioned to avoid
little backwards). Remove the two fuse straps as pulling it out askew, thus damaging the print.
well as the earth connections. Move both EPROMS and EEPROM from the old
Mount the new door in reverse order as opposed CPU print to the new one.
to the dismounting process. Important!
Connect supply voltage. See also Replacement of EPROMS.
0178-511 - ENG 163/230

Rev. 2005.03
12. Service
Mount a new CPU print and door in reverse order Enter the compressor serial no and press the H
as opposed to the dismounting process. key. All three light diodes on the front will flash
When the above has been completed and the shortly, and the display will show the picture CON-
control is switched on, the following picture will ap- FIG.
pear shortly in the display: It is also necessary to enter the original setup, all
COPY EEPROM YES alarm and warning limits as well as set points,
which must be different from the factory setting.
Remember also to calibrate the pressure trans-
Press the H key. UNISAB II will now be reconfig- ducers.
ured and the contents of the EEPROM, corre-
These values are included in the Starting-up Man-
sponding to the compressor setup, will now be
ual. Remember to set time and date. The lan-
copied into the CPU storage.
guage is now English. Select another language if
Important! It is possible to answer NO by means this is required.
of the password. In this case the contents of the
EEPROM and RAM store will be deleted, and
Replacement of relay print
UNISAB II must be reconfigured. See description
under Replacement of CPU print and EEPROM. Dismantle the door completely to provide free ac-
cess to the printed circuit board.
The setting is now the same as before the CPU
print was changed except for the calibration of All connected wires on the relay print must be dis-
the pressure transducers, possibly the brine tem- mounted, but first they must be marked so that
perature as well as the hour counter, which is now correct remounting is possible.
zero. The language is now English. Select anoth- Remove the screws that hold the print and tilt the
er language if this is required. Enter the values print out of the plastic holders at the terminal row
from the table in the Starting-up Manual, which is on the long side of the print.
supplied with the compressor. Remember to set
Pull the print off the guide opposite the terminal
time and date.
row and out of the cabinet.
Move the CPU print with the EPROM and Serial
Replacement of CPU print and
EPROM onto the new relay print.
EEPROM
Mount the new relay print in reverse order as op-
If - as an exception - it proves necessary to insert
posed to the dismounting procedure and connect
a new EEPROM in connection with the replace-
the marked wires in the correct order.
ment of a CPU print, the following procedure must
be observed. When the above has been completed and the
control is switched on, the following picture will ap-
Important!
pear shortly in the display:
See also Replacement of EPROM.
COPY EEPROM YES
Mount the new parts and switch on the control.
The following picture will appears in the display:
SERIAL NO 0 Press the H key. UNISAB II will now be reconfig-
164/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
12. Service
sponding to the compressor setup, will now be When replacing the EPROM or moving it from one
copied into the CPU storage. UNISAB II unit to another, do as follows:
Important! It is possible to answer NO by means • Note the value of the hour counter as well as
of the password. In this case the contents of the the calibration values for pressure transduc-
EEPROM and RAM store will be deleted, and ers and brine temperature.
UNISAB II must be reconfigured. See description • Switch off the power supply to UNISAB II.
under Replacement of CPU print and EEPROM.
• Switch off the compressor motor starter and
The setting is now the same as before the CPU observe all safety measures in accordance
print was changed except for the calibration of with the engineering manual, local rules and
the pressure transducers, possibly the brine tem- regulations.
perature as well as the hour counter, which is now
zero. The language is now English. Select anoth- • Place the door in service position as de-
er language if this is required. Enter the values scribed in Operating UNISAB II
from the table in the Starting-up Manual, which is • The EPROM modules are positioned in the
supplied with the compressor. Remember to set centre of the printed circuit board (see
time and date. Fig. 12.1).
• Each EPROM module is loosened from its
Replacement of EPROM (program) socket by an authorized EPROM puller.
UNISAB II Take care not to damage the pins on the
The EPROMs are programmable modules, EPROM module.
mounted in sockets in the microelectronic part of Fig. 12.2
UNISAB II. Please note that there are two
EPROMs, numbered 0 and 1, identified by white
labels. If replacement is necessary, always re- Notch
place both EPROMs as they belong together.
EPROM and electronics in general can be EPROM

damaged by static electricity. Therefore, make Mount the EPROMs manually while paying atten-
sure that static electricity is discharged without tion to the following:
current passing through the electronics, ie
• Make sure to position the EPROM labelled 0
touch the part on which the EPROM is posi-
in the upper socket, and the EPROM la-
tioned both before and while picking up the
belled 1 in the lower socket.
EPROM. Touch also the box of the device in
which EPROM is to be positioned both before • Position the EPROM so that the notch in the
and while fitting the EPROM. It is of course module is turning right (see Fig. 12.2).
necessary to use the same hand that holds (or • Take care that all pins are fitted in the socket
is going to hold) the EPROM. and carry out the mounting with great care.
• Refit the door.
0178-511 - ENG 165/230

Rev. 2005.03
12. Service
When the above has been completed and the See section Operating UNISAB II control, Factory
control is switched on, the following picture will ap- settings for information on factory reset.
pear shortly in the display: Once FACTORY RESET has been completed,
COPY EEPROM YES enter all the settings which are included in the ta-
ble UNISAB II settings, and which differ from the
UNISAB II factory values.
Press the H key. UNISAB II will now be reconfig-
sponding to the compressor setup, will now be Replacement of serial EEPROM
copied into the CPU storage. (diagnosis)
The setting is now the same as before EPROM This EEPROM includes information on:
was changed except for timers, which will have e. Compressor serial no.
factory value and the hour counter, which is now
f. Date of initial start-up.
zero. The language is English. Select a different
language if this is required. Enter the values from g. Compressor configuration.
the table in the Starting up manual, which is sup- h. Total number of alarm and warning limits and
plied with the compressor. Remember to set time all other setting values.
and date.
i. Status of up to 30 old alarms.
Important! It is possible to answer NO by means
j. Total number of alarms.
of the password. In this case the contents of the
EEPROM and RAM store will be deleted, and The EEPROM (positioned in a socket) can be re-
UNISAB II must be reconfigured. See description moved from UNISAB II in compliance with the
under Replacement of CPU print and EEPROM. same precautions as described under Replace-
ment of EPROM.
When changing the EPROM in connection with an
upgrade to an updated program version, it is rec- The EEPROM must usually remain in the control
ommended to carry out a FACTORY RESET. as the control cannot function without the EEP-
ROM. However, in case the contents of the EEP-
Before a FACTORY RESET is carried out, write
ROM is to be examined by Sabroe Refrigeration,
down all the UNISAB II settings in the table
Denmark, it can be removed for inspection. When
UNISAB II settings, especially the parameters
removing the EEPROM, switch off the control and
which are changed back to factory setting by a
have an empty EEPROM ready for insertion.
factory reset. This applies to the following param-
eters: Once the new EEPROM has been fitted, switch on
the control again. All information will now be cop-
– Alarm and warning limits, set points,
ied into the new EEPROM.
PID parameters
The control is now ready for operation with the
– Timers, P band factors
same setup as before the EEPROM was re-
– Capacity limits moved.
See the table UNISAB II settings for a complete
review.
166/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
12. Service
Replacement of battery Mount a new battery and switch on the control,

The battery is used primarily to ensure that the in- and the above picture will appear once more. An-
ternal clock runs accurately after a power failure. swer YES and press the H key.
Moreover, the so-called RAM store is supplied The compressor setup is now the same as before
during power failures. the power failure except for the calibration values
The battery has an expected service life of 10 for the pressure transducers and the brine tem-
years and is of the Lithium type. It is not reloaded perature as well as the hour counter, which is now
by the UNISAB II electronic circuit. zero. These values are included in the compres-
sor Starting-up Manual.
If the following picture appears in the display after
a power failure, the battery should be replaced: Remember to set time and date as well as lan-
guage. The compressor is now operational.
COPY EEPROM YES
In case no new battery is available, answer YES
to the above picture and follow the procedure for
If a new battery is available, switch off the control replacement of the EEPROM.
and change the battery. Dispose of the old battery
Please note that at the next power failure, the
in conformity with the environmental rules and
problem will be the same.
regulations in force.
0178-511 - ENG 167/230

Rev. 2005.03
12. Service
Installation of data communication cable

To obtain a correct function of the data communi- These instructions only apply to the installation of
cation between several Sabroe Refrigeration UNISAB II. For information on connection of
computers, the communication cable must be PROSAB II/ UNISAB II, see instr.no 0171-745 un-
connected according to the following instructions. der Supplementary material.
Fig. 12.3
UNISAB II/UNISAB II
IN CASE OF COMMUNICATION CONNECTIONS BETWEEN UNISAB II,

RESISTANCE JUMPERS MUST BE CONNECTED IN EACH MODULE
UNISAB II UNISAB II UNISAB II

- TX DL12 - TX DL12 - TX DL12
- RX DL13 - RX DL13 - RX DL13
63 64 65 66 63 64 65 66 63 64 65 66
termination block termination block
LED COLOURS
TX DL12 = RED
RX DL13 = GREEN
UNISAB II/PROSAB II
IN CASE OF CONNECTION BETWEEN MORE THAN TWO COMMUNICATION

MODULES, JUMPER(S) MUST BE CONNECTED IN BOTH END MODULES
PROSAB II PROSAB II
UNISAB II UNISAB-S/R/RT/RTH UNISAB-S/R/RT/RTH
- TX DL12 S1 S1 S1
COMMUNICATION COMMUNICATION
- RX DL13 MODULE MODULE
S2 S2 S2
63 64 65 66 + - + - + - + -
termination block
LED COLOURS
TX DL12 = RED
RX DL13 = GREEN
Important! connected correctly in the supplied screwed

The screen of the communication cable MUST be joints. See Fig. 12.4.
168/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
12. Service
The cable is connected in the terminals shown in other controls the resistance is removed and the
Fig. 12.3. The cable must be pulled in parallel terminals are used for passing on the communica-
from control to control. This applies both to the two tion cable.
conductors and the screen. The total length of the cable between the controls
In the first and last control the cable must be fin- must not exceed 1,000 m. Cables of this type are
ished correctly. The resistance of 120 ohm must available from Sabroe Refrigeration.
be fitted as indicated (mounted on delivery). On all
The cable must have the following data:
Impedance: From 135 to 165 Ω at a frequency > 100 kHz
Capacity: Normally < 60 pF per meter
Core: > 0.22 mm2
Type: Twisted pair cable 1x2 or 2x2
Signal attenuation:Max. 9 db over total length of line section/cluster
Shielding: cu shielding braid or shielding braid and shielding foil
Double shielding:Specified as shielding above. The two shields must be isolated from each other with an
isolation voltage of at least 100 VAC.
It is recommended to keep a suitable distance (30 Fig. 12.4
cm) between the communication cables and other
electric cables or motors to prevent electric distur- 1.
bances. Failure to comply with this may cause er-
rors in the running of the multisab sequence. 2.
3.
UNISAB II
4.
UNISAB II
5.
0178-511 - ENG 169/230

Rev. 2005.03
12. Service
Grounding
UNISAB II must always be grounded to the com- cause a large current surge through the cable
pressor frame. See drawing no. 3448-235/236 screen. The screen may melt, causing the voltage
page 25. equalisation to be broken and the communication
In case of a shut down, there can be large electri- to be hampered by noise.
cal potential on the compressor motor and thereby To avoid this situation, it is strongly recommended
on UNISAB II. to provide an extra equalising wire in parallel with
The data communication cable screen provides a the communication cable between all the units on
voltage equalisation between the UNISAB II units. the network, as indicated in the drawing no.
The above mentioned electrical potential may 3448-235/236 page 25.
170/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
13. MULTISAB regulation
Introduction MULTISAB is a distributed software module in-

MULTISAB is a distributed compressor control cluded in all UNISAB II, PROSAB II and
system, which can capacity regulate reciprocating UNISAB II units on delivery.
and/or screw compressors according to rules, MULTISAB connects up to 14 compressors in one
which are set up in detail as described in the fol- and the same communication system.
lowing, and in a sequence set by the user.
Fig. 13.1
1 2 3 14
UNISAB II UNISAB II UNISAB II UNISAB II
The MULTISAB system is based on some basic the optimization of the compressors, it may be
rules: necessary to regulate the compressors externally.
1. The system is controlled and optimized ac- The plant itself may also make special demands
cording to suction pressure, brine tempera- as to regulating speed and accuracy, which
ture, discharge pressure or external 4-20 makes a central external regulation necessary.
mA signal, depending on the chosen type of Such an alternative regulation can be carried out
regulation. in several ways:
2. The programmed starting sequence is al- • controlling the digital input External start
ways followed. permission, normal stop
3. Screw compressors in operation are run to • using the digital output Auxiliary output
as high a capacity as possible. • using the 4-20 mA input Auxiliary input
4. It is acceptable that reciprocating compres- • changing capacity set points from PC/PLC
sors operate at part load. via COMSAB II/PCCOMSAB II.
MULTISAB is a regulating system for general ap-
plication. Should special demands be made as to
0178-511 - ENG 171/230

Rev. 2005.03
Fig. 13.2
PC/PLC
possible modem
COMSAB II/PCCOMSAB II
1 2 3 14
UNISAB II UNISAB II UNISAB II UNISAB II
In case compressor capacity is controlled through See section Installation of data communication
COMSAB II or PCCOMSAB II from a central com- cable as well as Connecting diagrams to
puter, be aware of the time delay through the com- find information on the physical linking of
munication system. UNISAB II units.
It is possible to make an approximate calculation B: All units must be configured for intercommu-
of this time delay. See COMSAB II instruction no nication. See also section Configuration.
0171-400. In SETUP I CONFIG a compressor number,
If UNISAB II is to be connected to controls of the COMPR. NO, beginning with no 1 and up-
UNISAB S/R or PROSAB II type, see the following wards, corresponding to the number of com-
instructions if the control units are part of the plant pressors must be entered in each unit.
in question: It is recommended to mark the compressors with
1) 0171-761 / UNISAB S-Control this number.
2) 0171-772 / UNISAB R-Control Important!
3) 0178-175 / UNISAB RT-Control If two compressors have the same com-
pressor number entered in UNISAB II, there
4) 0178-181 / UNISAB RTH-Control will be no communication between the units.
5) 0171-729 / PROSAB II In SETUP I CONFIG the communication speed,
6) 0171-743 / the MULTISAB system for BAUD RATE, must be entered. In case the
PROSAB/UNISAB II system only consists of UNISAB II units,
usually choose the highest baud rate. In
System setup case the system consists of both UNISAB II
and PROSAB II or UNISAB II units, choose
To be able to use MULTISAB, a number of points
1200 baud. Note that it must be checked
must be completed. Please find the checklist for
that all units on the network are able to run
MULTISAB setup (see the following pages). The
at the selected rate.
points on the checklist can be explained as fol-
lows: C: All units, especially screw compressors,
must have a swept volume value entered.
A: All units that are to be included in the system
must be connected physically.
172/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
In SETUP I CONFIG enter SWEPT VOLUME, er or disconnected from the network, the
which can be read on the compressor name UNISAB II unit with the next START.NO will
plate. See section Configuration. be SYS. REGULATOR.
D: An entry must be made in all units whether The SYS.REGULATOR is master of the co-ordi-
the system contains a common evaporator nated capacity control, which also means
and a common condenser. that the controlled input sensor (point H be-
In SETUP I CONFIG enter the current combina- low) on this particular UNISAB II unit in use.
tion of common evaporator and common If only one compressor is required, it will
condenser in COMMON EVAP/COND. See usually be the compressor of the SYS.REG-
section Configuration. ULATOR which is in operation. However, if
COMPR# is selected, it may very well be
E: All units must be have a system no and a another compressor.
starting no.
Guidelines for selecting COMPR# or START#:
In SETUP I MULTISAB I MULTISAB STATE
enter START NO and a SYSTEM NO. See • COMPR# is easier and more safe if the con-
section MULTISAB. trolled input is not available to all UNISAB II
units.
F: All units in the same system must agree on
the way a regulating master (sys. regulator) • COMPR# must be selected if there are any
is chosen. PROSAB II or UNISAB I units on the sys-
tem.
In SETUP I CONFIG select the same PREF.
MASTER in all UNISAB II units, COMPR# • START# is easier and more safe if equaliz-
or START#. See section Configuration. ing running hours is important, especially if
all (or all but one) compressors must always
If selecting COMPR#, the UNISAB II with the low- be available.
est COMPR. NO (point B above) will always
be SYS.REGULATOR. The only exceptions • Always make sure that COMPR.NO is a
are if the UNISAB II is off power or discon- fixed value, ie never change it to equalize
nected from the network. In such case, the running hours! However, START.NO is
UNISAB II with the next COMPR.NO will be meant to be changed from time to time.
SYS.REGULATOR. Note that a defective G: All units must be adjusted to remote control.
controlled input sensor does not lead to an In SETUP I CONTROL COMPRESSOR.CTRL
automatic change of SYS.REGULATOR in MODE is on REMOTE. See section Com-
this case. pressor regulation.
If selecting START#, the UNISAB II with the low-
est START.NO (point F above) will be Regulation Setup
SYS.REGULATOR for as long as the com-
H: All units must be configured to the desired
pressor belonging to this UNISAB II unit is
regulating method.
running and ready. If the compressor is not
available, UNISAB II is not in REMOTE In SETUP I CONFIG adjust CONTROL ON to
mode, the controlled input sensor (point H the desired regulating method. See section
below) is defective, or UNISAB II is off pow- Configuration.
0178-511 - ENG 173/230

Rev. 2005.03
The following four regulators are available. The 2) Regulator neutral zone, NZ
last two have both a cooling and a warming 3) Regulator proportional band, PB
function:
See section Compressor regulation.
– Suction side
(regulation of suction pressure) Regulation of the entire system will usually take
place on the basis of the regulator in the cur-
– Discharge side rent regulating master (sys. regulator), ie
(regulation of discharge pressure) the compressor with the lowest compressor
– Brine / hot water or starting number.
(regulation of brine/water temperatures) Therefore it is particularly important that the pa-
– Ext. cooling / Ext. heating rameters of the configured regulator has
(regulation of a user defined measuring been set correctly.
value: temp./pressure/level). Always set the same set point on all other units in
– Note that all units that can become mas- the same system (ie with the same SYS-
ter must measure the same value to be TEM NO).
used for the capacity control. If eg Brine K: All units must have their timers adjusted.
/ Hotwater temperature control is select-
ed, a separate temperature sensor must In SETUP I TIMERS I TIMER SETUP the fol-
be available to all the relevant UNISAB II lowing timers are set:
units. Note that point F above describes 1) START DELAY, time delay before start.
how to select the master. 2) STOP DELAY, time delay before stop.
I: All units must (usually) be configured to both See section Timers, Timer setup.
automatic start and automatic stop. If this is
Both timers can be made to work proportionally (ie
not the case, the compressor will not start
depending on the size of Pb).
up automatically in case cooling is required
or stop automatically when cooling is not re- In SETUP I TIMERS I P BAND
quired and the temperature becomes too FACTOR a proportional factor can be set for
low. each of the timers.
In SETUP I CONFIG, choose: This means that if only a small difference exists
between the desired temperature (Sp) and
AUTO START= YES
the current one, the timer in the time delays
AUTO STOP= YES will count very slowly (up to
See section Configuration. 10 times slower than the time set, depend-
J: The chosen regulator must be set in all ing on the factor set).
units. If the difference between the desired temperature
In the picture for the parameter to be regulated, and the current one is considerable (outside
set the following: the P Band), the timer in the time delay will
count in seconds.
1) Regulator set point, SP1 and possibly SP2
See section Timers, P Band factor.
174/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
In case of reciprocating compressors, another two Transfer and the Take-over situations are
timers must be set. included.
3) DELAY UP, time delay during loading of As described below, several parameters are
stages. available to adjust the Transfer and the
4) DELAY DOWN, time delay during unloading Take-over function.
of stages. In SETUP ITIMERS I TRANSFER a pro-
Both of these timers can also be made to work portional factor FACTOR DOWN (1-10, de-
proportionally (ie depending on the size of fault 1) can be set for timer DELAY DOWN.
Pb). It is used when MULTISAB wants to let a re-
ciprocating compressor decrease its capac-
In SETUP I TIMERS I P BAND FACTOR a pro- ity in favour of a screw compressor at low
portional factor can be set for each of the capacity. A larger FACTOR DOWN makes
timers. MULTISAB wait longer before reducing the
L: In plants with a combination of screw and reciprocating compressor capacity another
reciprocating compressors a number of fac- stage.
tors may be set to optimize compressor op- In SETUP I TIMERS I TRANSFER the
eration so that the two types of compressors size of a transfer zone ZONE can be set, ie
are used in the best way possible. These the part of the proportional band (0-100%,
factors can only be set on reciprocating default 15%) where transfer may take place.
compressors and will be effective only in
case all reciprocating compressors have In SETUP I TIMERS I TAKE-OVER a
lower starting numbers than the screw com- proportional factor FACTOR UP (1-10, de-
pressors in the same system, and only if fault 1) can be set for timer DELAY UP. It is
TAKE OVER is set to YES in SETUP I used when MULTISAB wants to increase
CONFIG, See section Configuration. the capacity of the reciprocating compres-
sor to force the screw compressor down be-
The optimization is carried out by the Trans- low 5% capacity, making it stop. A larger
fer function and the Take-over function. FACTOR UP makes MULTISAB wait longer
It is not economical to run a screw compres- before increasing the reciprocating com-
sor at low capacity. The Transfer function pressor capacity another stage.
attempts to avoid this by reducing the ca-
pacity of the reciprocating compressor(s), ie In SETUP I TIMERS I TAKE-OVER a
by transferring load to the screw compres- proportional factor FACTOR START (1-10,
sor. The Take-over function increases the default 1) can be set for the START DELAY
capacity of the reciprocating compressor(s) timer. It is used when MULTISAB wants to
to make the screw compressor stop, ie by start a reciprocating compressor to take
taking over load from the screw compres- over the operation from a screw compressor
sor. which is running at low capacity.
In the section Example of regulation - a In SETUP I TIMERS I TAKE-OVER the

combination of screw and reciprocating size of a take-over zone ZONE can be set,
compressors illustrative examples of the ie the part of the proportional band (0-100%,
0178-511 - ENG 175/230

Rev. 2005.03
default 15%) where take-over may take tivated once TAKE-OVER DELAY
place. expires.
In SETUP I TIMERS I TIMER SETUP the 2) TAKE-OVER MAX, max duration of a
following timers are found. take-over attempt. When TAKE-OVER DE-
1) TAKE-OVER DELAY, time delay at LAY expires, the time delay TAKE-OVER
take-over, fixed at 300 seconds. When a re- MAX will also be activated to ensure that a
ciprocating compressor has calculated that reciprocating compressor will not use more
it is possible to take over a subsequent than the TAKE-OVER MAX time during a
screw compressor, it will pass into a take-over attempt. If the screw compressor
take-over mode and start TAKE-OVER DE- has not stopped before the TAKE-OVER
LAY. If the reciprocating compressor during MAX expires, the reciprocating compressor
the entire count down of take-over delay can will give up and stop. This delay function
continue to take over, thus staying in the can be cancelled by setting the delay for 0
take-over mode, START DELAY will be ac- (default).
176/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
14. Checklist
14. Checklist
Compressor No.
Checklist for MULTISAB setup
No. Item Description 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
A Cabling All co-operating UNISAB
units must be wired to-
gether on common net-
work.
B.1 CONFIG→ Unique ID for each com-
COMPR NO pressor on network
B.2 CONFIG → Identical for all units on
BAUD RATE network
C CONFIG → Must be entered correctly
SWEPT for each compressor, at
VOLUME least for screws
D CONFIG→ Identical for all compres-
COMMON sors within system
EVAP/COND
E.1 MULTISAB Unique priority within sys-
STATE → tem (SYSTEM NO)
START NO
E.2 MULTISAB System ID, identical for all
STATE → compressors on same
SYSTEM NO controlled input
CONFIG → Identical for all compres-
REFRIGERANT sors within system
F CONFIG → Identical for all compres-
PREF. MASTER sors within system
G CONTROL → Must be REMOTE unless
COMPR. the compressor is exclud-
CONTROL ed (temporarily) from
MULTISAB
H.1 CONFIG → Identical for all compres-
CONTROL ON sors within system - see
also item C
H.2 Controlled input The measurement must
sensor be available to all com-
pressors in the system
which can become mas-
ter
I.1 CONFIG → Should usually be YES. If
AUTO START not, the compressor must
be started manually
I.2 CONFIG → Should usually be YES. If
AUTO STOP not, the compressor must
be stopped manually
0178-511 - ENG 177/230

Rev. 2005.03
14. Checklist
Compressor No.
J.1 Set point Identical for all compres-
sors within system
J.2 Neutral zone Matching values for all
and compressors within sys-
tem
P Band
K.1 TIMER SETUP Matching values for all
→ START DE- compressors within sys-
LAY tem
K.1a P BAND FAC- Matching values for all
TOR → compressors within sys-
START DELAY tem
K.2 TIMER SETUP Matching values for all
→ STOP DE- compressors within sys-
LAY tem
K.2a P BAND FAC- Matching values for all
TOR → compressors within sys-
STOP DELAY tem
K.3 TIMER SETUP Matching values for all re-
→ DELAY UP ciprocating compressors
within system
K.3a P BAND FAC- Matching values for all re-
TOR → ciprocating compressors
DELAY UP within system
K.4 TIMER SETUP Matching values for all re-
→ DELAY ciprocating compressors
DOWN within system
K.4a P BAND FAC- Matching values for all re-
TOR → ciprocating compressors
DELAY DOWN within system
L.1 CONFIG → Only recipr. compr. Set
TAKE OVER for YES if compr. is to
take over from screw
L.2 TIMER SETUP Matching values for all re-
→ TK OVER ciprocating compressors
MAX within system (TK = Take)
L.3 TRANSFER → Matching values for all re-
FACTOR ciprocating compressors
DOWN within system
L.4 TRANSFER → Matching values for all re-
ZONE ciprocating compressors
within system
L.5 TAKE-OVER → Matching values for all re-
FACTOR UP ciprocating compressors
within system
178/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
14. Checklist
Compressor No.
FACTOR ciprocating compressors
START within system
ZONE ciprocating compressors
within system
0178-511 - ENG 179/230

Rev. 2005.03
14. Checklist
180/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
15. Start and system numbers
- pref. master = COMPR#.

Example A - plants with one temperature system and five compressors where pref. master = COMPR#.
System no 1 1 1 1 1
Starting no 1 2 3 4 5
Compressor no K1 K2 K3 K4 K5
Example B - plants with one temperature system and five compressors where pref. master = COMPR#.
System no 1 1 1 1 1
In examples A and B, K1 will be the regulator (system regulator) of the entire system.
Example C - plants with two temperature systems and five compressors (eg two-stage plants) where
pref. master = COMPR#.
System no 1 1 2 2 2
In example C, K1 will be system regulator of system no 1, and K3 will be system regulator of system no 2.
SETUP I MULTISAB I MULTISAB STATE A compressor will not be part of the MULTISAB
shows which unit has been chosen as SYS. REG- system if it is in either MANUAL, AUTO,
ULATOR. STOPPED or SHUTDOWN, or if the digital inputs
In case of two regulating systems or more, it is the EXTERNAL START-NORMAL STOP and EX-
compressor with the lowest number in the individ- TERNAL START-IMMEDIATE STOP have not
ual system that works as system regulator. been connected.
The regulating compressor (SYS. REGULATOR) Moreover, the compressor will not be part of the
will regulate the other compressors in the system MULTISAB system if it is in REMOTE/capacity re-
even if the compressor is in MANUAL, AUTO, mote control with either a 4-20 mA external signal
STOPPED or SHUTDOWN. or communication signal.
Only if the voltage supply or the communication is The way the system operates can be varied de-
disconnected, the system will automatically select pending on whether a reciprocating or a screw
a new system regulator, which will be the unit with compressor comes first in the sequence. Like-
the second lowest number. wise, the way the system operates can be varied
with screw compressors of different sizes, de-
0178-511 - ENG 181/230

Rev. 2005.03
pending on whether a small or large compressor In case of mixed systems, it is recommended that
comes first. all reciprocating compressors in a system is
If compressors of different sizes are mixed, unfor- placed one after the other, followed by the screw
tunate part load conditions may occur, depending compressors, or vice versa. The take-over and
on the sequence. transfer functions will only be effective in case all
of the reciprocating compressors have lower start-
Be aware that if a screw compressor has the lowing numbers than the screw compressors in the
est starting number, it may go down on low capac- same system.
ity even at small loads.
Start and system numbers - pref. master = START#

Example A - plant with one temperature system and five compressors where pref. master = START#.
System no 1 1 1 1 1
In example A, K1 will be the regulator (system regulator) of the entire system, but only if it is operating or
able to start.
If K1 is stopped because of an alarm or if one of the digital inputs EXTERNAL START - NORMAL STOP
or EXTERNAL START- IMMEDIATE STOP is disconnected - and a cooling requirement still exists, the
next compressor in the starting sequence will be the regulator of the entire system provided that it is op-
erating or able to start - and that it does start. In the above example K2 will become the regulator.
Example B - plant with one temperature system and five compressors where pref. master = START#.
System no 1 1 1 1 1
In example B, K5 will be the regulator (system regulator) of the entire system, but only if it is operating or
able to start.
If K5 is stopped - and a cooling requirement still exists, the next compressor in the starting sequence will
become the regulator of the entire system provided that it is operating or able to start - and that it does
start. In the above example K4 will become the regulator.
182/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
Example C - plant with two temperature systems and five compressors (eg two-stage plants)
System no 1 1 2 2 2
Start no 2 1 3 1 2
In example C, K2 will be the system regulator of system no 1, and K4 will be the system regulator of sys-
tem no 2 provided that K2 and K4 are operating or able to start.
SETUP I MULTISAB I MULTISAB STATE with screw compressors of different sizes, de-
shows which unit has been chosen as SYS. REG- pending on whether a small or large compressor
ULATOR. comes first.
In case of two regulating systems or more, it is the If compressors of different sizes are mixed, unfor-
compressor with the lowest number in the individ- tunate part load conditions may occur, depending
ual system that works as system regulator. on the sequence.
The regulating compressor (SYS. REGULATOR) Be aware that if a screw compressor has the low-
will regulate the other compressors in the system, est starting number, it may go down on low capac-
but only if the compressor is in REMOTE/MULTI- ity even at small loads.
SAB and at the same time operating or ready to In case of mixed systems it is recommended that
start. all reciprocating compressors in a system be
A compressor will not be part of the MULTISAB placed one after the other, followed by the screw
system if it is in either MANUAL, AUTO, compressors, or vice versa. The take-over and
STOPPED or SHUTDOWN, or if the digital inputs transfer functions will only be effective in case all
EXTERNAL START-NORMAL STOP and EX- of the reciprocating compressors have lower start-
TERNAL START-IMMEDIATE STOP have not ing numbers than the screw compressors in the
been connected. same system.
Moreover, the compressor will not be part of the Note:
MULTISAB system if it is in REMOTE/capacity re- The described example of possible configuration
mote control with either a 4-20 mA external signal where the pref.master = START# can only be
or communication signal. used for plants (systems) which are fitted solely
The way the system operates can be varied de- with UNISAB II units. The function cannot be used
pending on whether a reciprocating or a screw together with a PROSAB II, UNISAB S or UNISAB
compressor is comes first in the sequence. Like- R / RT/ RTH. In such cases set pref.master =
wise, the way the system operates can be varied COMPR# on UNISAB II.
0178-511 - ENG 183/230

Rev. 2005.03
Example of regulation - screw

compressors only
The working of MULTISAB will be described on
the basis of the below example and with the indi-
cated compressors.
Compressor K1. SAB163 Mk2 K2. SAB163 Mk2 K3. SAB202S K4. SAB202S
System no 1 1 1 1
Starting no 1 2 3 4
The following settings have been made in all units: Timers

The digital inputs EXTERNAL START - NORMAL START DELAY = 60 sec.
STOP and EXTERNAL START - IMMEDIATE STOP DELAY = 45 sec.
STOP have been connected.
During the running-in time, adjustment of the val-
ues will be required.
Configuration
If Nz is reduced, the plant will react to minor tem-
CONTROL ON = BRINE
perature variations in relation to the set point. This
AUTO START = YES will result in a frequent regulation of the compres-
AUTO STOP = YES sors. By increasing Nz the temperature can vary
within a larger area before a temperature regula-
COMPR.NO = xx
tion becomes necessary.
(the compressors are numbered from 1-4)
If Pb is reduced, the plant will react faster to
PREF. MASTER = COMPR#
changes in temperature to return to its set point.
(ie K1 is the system regulator)
This usually leads to temperature variations close
COMMON EVAP/COND =Y/Y ( to the set point, but with frequent loading/unload-
(common evaporator and common condenser) ing of compressor capacity.
SWEPT VOLUME = xxxx If Pb is increased the plant reaction will be slower,
(corresponding to compressor name plate) and this can prevent frequent oscillations around
BAUD RATE = 9600/19200/38400 the set point.
(all compressors are fitted with UNISAB II) START DELAY is meant to prevent inadvertent
start of a subsequent compressor. In case the
Regulating parameters (for BRINE compressor runs above 95% capacity and the
regulator) temperature is above the set point, START DE-
SP = -2°C LAY will be started on the next compressor in the
(chosen according to the operating conditions of sequence. Should the temperature reach the set
the plant) point, ie be within the neutral zone before START
DELAY expires, the following compressor will not
NZ = 1°C
start.
PB = 5°C
184/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
Should the temperature rise excessively before When the above has taken place, screw compres-
start of the next compressor, START DELAY must sor K1 {Lead compr.} will run slowly down from
be reduced. 100% while K2 will increase its capacity {Lag com-
In case of too frequent compressor starts/stops, pr.}. When the compressors meet, ie when their
START DELAY must be increased. slide position is the same, they will continue to
regulate in parallel (see Fig. 15.1).
STOP DELAY determines the time the compres-
sor runs at minimum capacity before stop. If quick How much screw compressor K1 decreases in ca-
stop is required, reduce STOP DELAY. If the com- pacity and how fast in order to meet K2 depends
pressor is to run for a longer period, increase completely on the strength of the "UP" regulating
STOP DELAY. signal.
The above is a general description of the various With screw compressors K1 and K2 at 100% and
setting potentials. The final settings will depend with a persistent cooling requirement, START DE-
completely on the plant in question. LAY will be started on screw compressor K3. After
a countdown to zero, K3 will start up. K1 will be
kept at 100% {Runs at max. capacity} and K2 and
Loading sequence K3 will regulate in parallel.
Compressor K1 is assumed to be in operation at
With a persistent cooling requirement and with K1,
eg 70 % {Runs by itself}, K2 {Not my turn}, K3 and
K2 and K3 at 100%, START DELAY will be started
K4 {Not my turn} are stopped.
on screw compressor K4. The timer will count
The MULTISAB status, shown in picture SETUP down to zero, and K4 will start up. K1 and K2 will
I MULTISAB I MULTISAB STATE, is marked be kept at 100% {Runs at max. capacity} and K3
with {--}. and K4 will regulate in parallel.
At increasing cooling requirements and conse- However, the actual capacity requirement must
quent capacity loading, compressor K1 will in- be considered. If there are four reciprocating and
crease capacity until 100% capacity is reached. two screw compressors in the plant, two of the re-
The loading speed depends on how far the imme- ciprocating compressors can be moved to the oth-
diate temperature is above the set point that has er side of the screw compressors during low load
been entered into the regulator. operation. This prevents a screw compressor
from running at too low load in the border area of
If a cooling requirement still exists, ie the immedi-
the take over/transfer function. When load in-
ate temperature is above the set point and the ca-
creases again the reciprocating compressors are
pacity of K1 is above 95%, the time delay (START
moved back in front of the screw compressors as
DELAY) will start up in UNISAB II on compressor
needed. The aim is to keep a constant need for
K2. The timer will count down from its set point to
the capacity of one or more screw compressors
zero, and compressor K2 will start. (Should the
and x number of reciprocating compressors.
temperature reach the set point, ie be within Nz
before START DELAY expires, K2 will not start).
0178-511 - ENG 185/230

Rev. 2005.03
Fig. 15.1
% Lead
100
Lead=lag
75
Increasing capacity 50
Lag
25
Start
5
0 5 10 15 20 25 min.
%
100
Lead
75
Decreasing capacity 50
Lag
25
Stop
5
0 5 10 15 20 25 min.
When two screw compressors regulate in parallel, At decreasing cooling requirement and a conse-
it means that they follow each other up and down quent capacity unloading, compressors K2 and
in capacity and that both units will try to keep the K3 will decrease their capacity until both are be-
same capacity +/- approx. 2%. low the value called parallel capacity. The parallel
If the two compressors that regulate in parallel capacity is automatically calculated by MULTI-
have equal capacities, the capacity change at any SAB. It depends on the size and types of the in-
given relocation of the capacity slide will be dou- volved compressors and the operating conditions.
bled compared to the regulation of a single com- The parallel capacity is the limit at which K2 is
pressor. able to take over for certain. If the two compres-
sors are of equal size, the parallel capacity will
MULTISAB compensates for this by reducing (by usually be about 55%.
half) the up and down regulating speed.
The percentage of PARALLEL CAPACITY can be
read in SETUP I MULTISAB I PARALLEL
Unloading sequence CONTROL.
Three of the four plant compressors are assumed
K3 will now ramp down towards 0% {Stop Ramp
to be in operation, K1 at 100% {Runs at max ca-
Down} with a speed of approx. 12%/min. When K3
pacity}, K2 {Lead compr.} and K3 {Lag compr.}
is below 5% {May stop} the STOP DELAY timer
both in parallel operation at eg 90%.
will start up. When STOP DELAY expires, K3 will
stop {Blocked}. K2 will, until K3 stops, ensure reg-
186/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
ulation all alone {Stop Ramp Up}, as K1 remains When K1 and K3 are above 95% the time delay
at 100% {Runs at max capacity}. (START DELAY) will start in UNISAB II
Screw compressor K1 {Lead compr.} and K2 {Lag on compressor K4. The timer will count down from
compr.} will join each other in parallel operation. its set point to zero, and compressor K4 will start
up.
If a cooling requirements still does not exist, K1
and K2 will decrease their capacity until both are K4 will regulate upwards and the plant will have
below parallel capacity. K2 will ramp down and the following operating mode: K1 at 100 % {Runs
stop as soon as the STOP DELAY timer expires. at max capacity}, K3 {Lead compr.} and K4 {Lag
compr.} both in parallel operation at approx. 65%
K1 will now ensure regulation all alone {Runs by (the parallel operation percentage is lower now
itself}. than during the output state as K4 is larger than
K2).
Operating sequence The alarm on K2 is confirmed (after the oil filter
Three of the four plant compressors are assumed has been replaced), and although K2 enters the
to be in operation, K1 at 100% {Runs at max. ca- READY status {Not my turn}, it will not start until a
pacity}, K2 {Lead compr.} and K3 {Lag compr.} requirement exists, as MULTISAB does not stop
both in parallel operation at eg 80%. K4 to make K2 resume its position in the se-
The cooling requirement is constant. quence.
Due to an alarm caused by high oil filter differen- Example of regulation -

tial pressure, K2 stops {Blocked}. This makes K1 reciprocating compressors only
{Lead compr.} and K3 {Lag compr.} change to par- The working of MULTISAB will be described on
allel operation, and K3 will increase its capacity to the basis of the below example and with the indi-
100%. cated compressors.
Compressor K1. SMC108L K2. SMC108L K3. SMC106S K4. SMC106S
System no 1 1 1 1
Starting no 1 2 3 4
The following settings have been made in all units: STOP and EXTERNAL START - IMMEDIATE
The digital inputs EXTERNAL START - NORMAL STOP have been connected.
0178-511 - ENG 187/230

Rev. 2005.03
Configuration can vary within a larger area before a regulation of

CONTROL ON = SUCTION the compressors becomes necessary.
AUTO START = YES If Pb is reduced, the plant will react faster to

changes in the suction pressure to return to its set
AUTO STOP = YES point. This usually leads to temperature variations
COMPR.NO = xx close to the set point, but frequent loading/unload-
(The compressors are numbered from 1-4) ing of compressor capacity.
PREF. MASTER = COMPR# If Pb is increased, the plant reaction will be slower,
(ie K1 is the system regulator) and this can prevent frequent oscillations around
COMMON EVAP/COND = Y/Y the set point.
(common evaporator and common condenser) START DELAY is meant to prevent inadvertent
SWEPT VOLUME = xxxx start of a subsequent compressor. In case the
(corresponding to the compressor name plate) compressor runs at 100% capacity and the tem-
perature is above the set point, START DELAY
BAUD RATE = 9600/19200/38400
will be started on the next compressor in the se-
(all compressors are fitted with UNISAB II)
quence. Should the temperature reach the set
point, ie be within the neutral zone before START
Regulating parameters (for SUCTION DELAY expires, the next compressor will not start.
PRESSURE regulator)
Should the temperature rise excessively before
SP = -10°C/R start of the next compressor, START DELAY must
(chosen according to the operating conditions of be reduced.
the plant)
In case of too frequent compressor starts/stops,
NZ = 3°C START DELAY must be increased.
PB = 5°C STOP DELAY determines the time the compres-
sor runs at minimum capacity before stop. If a
Timers quick stop is required, reduce STOP DELAY. If
START DELAY = 60 sec the compressor is to run for a longer period, in-
crease STOP DELAY.
STOP DELAY = 45 sec
If DELAY UP is increased, the reciprocating com-
DELAY UP = 30 sec
pressor will load capacity stages at a lower speed;
DELAY DOWN = 20 sec vice versa a lower value of DELAY UP will result
During the running-in time, adjustment of the val- in faster loading.
ues will be required. If DELAY DOWN is increased, the reciprocating
If Nz is reduced, the plant will react to minor suc- compressor will unload capacity stages at a lower
tion pressure variations in relation to the set point. speed; vice versa a lower value of DELAY DOWN
This will result in frequent regulation of the com- will result in faster unloading.
pressors. By increasing Nz the suction pressure In many cases it is advantageous if DELAY UP is
higher than DELAY DOWN.
188/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
The above is a general description of the various Loading sequence

setting. The final settings will depend completely Compressor K1 is assumed to be in operation at
on the plant in question. eg 75 % {Runs by itself}, K2 {Not my turn}, K3 and
K4 {Not my turn} have been stopped.
The MULTISAB status, as shown in picture SET-
UP I MULTISAB I MULTISAB STATE, is
marked with {--}.
Fig. 15.2
Capacity for
1 compressor
% Increasing requirement for capacity
Compressor 1 Compressors 1+2

100
Compressor 2
75
50
25
Time
Capacity for
1 compressor
%
Decreasing requirement for capacity
Compressors 1+2
100
Compressor 2 Compressors 1
75
50
25
0
Time
At increasing cooling requirement and conse- If a cooling requirement still exists, ie the immedi-
quent capacity loading, reciprocating compressor ate suction pressure is higher that the set point,
K1 will load stages at the DELAY UP time lag until the timer START DELAY is started on compressor
100% capacity has been reached. K2. The timer will count down from its set point to
It is possible to make the loading speed depend zero, and K2 will start. (In case the suction pres-
on how far the actual suction pressure is above sure reaches the neutral zone before START DE-
the set point by setting the proportional factor DE- LAY expires, K2 will not start).
LAY UP above 1 in the picture SETUP I TIMERS With compressor K2 at 100% and still capacity re-
I P BAND FACTOR. See section Regulating set- quirement, the timer START DELAY starts on
up.
0178-511 - ENG 189/230

Rev. 2005.03
compressor K3. It will count down before K3 starts K3 will now decrease its capacity to minimum, and
up. after K2 has unloaded one stage, K3 will stop on
When K3 is at 100% and a cooling requirement the timer STOP DELAY.
still exists, the timer START DELAY will start on Reciprocating compressor K2 will now start un-
K4. When timer has expired, K4 will start. loading stages with time delay DELAY DOWN,
until it reaches minimum capacity, ie 25%. One
Unloading sequence stage will be unloaded on compressor K1, and the
timer STOP DELAY will start on K2.
In an operating situation where the entire plant
runs at 100% and with a decreasing cooling re- The system will continue its unloading in stages
quirement, unloading will start on compressor K4 until K1 is stopped.
first. It is also possible that the plant stabilizes at part
K4 will decrease its capacity by unloading stages load, and if the cooling requirement increases, the
with the time delay DELAY DOWN between each situation will be the same as described under
change of stage until it reaches minimum capaci- Loading sequence.
ty, ie 33% (SMC 106S). One stage will now be un- Example of regulation - combination of screw
loaded on compressor K3, which will run at 67%, and reciprocating compressors
and the timer STOP DELAY will start on K4, (dur- The working of MULTISAB will be described on
ing unloading the reciprocating compressors will the basis of the below examples A and B and with
overlap, Fig. 15.2). the indicated compressors.
When time delay STOP DELAY expires on K4, K4
will stop.
A:
Compressor K1. Recip. K2. Recip. K3. Screw K4. Screw K5. Screw
System no 1 1 1 1 1
B:
Compressor K1. Screw K2. Screw K3. Screw K4. Recip. K5. Recip.
System no 1 1 1 1 1
The following settings have been made in all units: STOP and EXTERNAL START - IMMEDIATE
The digital inputs EXTERNAL START - NORMAL STOP have been connected.
190/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
Configuration pressors. By increasing Nz the suction pressure

CONTROL ON = SUCTION can vary within a larger area before a regulation of
the compressors becomes necessary.
AUTO START = YES
If Pb is reduced, the plant will react faster to
AUTO STOP = YES changes in the suction pressure to return to its set
COMPR.NO = xx point. This usually leads to temperature variations
(The compressors are numbered from 1-5) close to the set point, but frequent loading/unload-
PREF. MASTER = COMPR# ing of compressor capacity.
(ie K1 is the system regulator) If Pb is increased, the plant reaction will be slower,
COMMON EVAP/COND = Y/Y and this may prevent frequent oscillations around
(common evaporator and common condenser) the set point.
SWEPT VOLUME = xxxx The purpose of START DELAY is to try to prevent

(corresponding to the compressor name plate) inadvertent start-up of a subsequent compressor.
In case a compressor is at 100% capacity and the
BAUD RATE = 9600/19200/38400
suction pressure is still above the neutral zone,
(all compressors are fitted with UNISAB II)
START DELAY will be started on the next com-
pressor in the sequence. Should the suction pres-
Regulating parameters (for SUCTION sure reach the neutral zone before START DE-
PRESSURE regulator) LAY expires, the following compressor will not
SP = -20°C/R start.
(chosen according to the operating conditions of Should the temperature rise excessively before
the plant) start of the next compressor, START DELAY must
NZ = 1°C be reduced.
PB = 5°C In case of too frequent compressor starts/stops,

START DELAY must be increased.
Timers STOP DELAY determines the time the compres-
START DELAY = 60 sec sor runs at minimum capacity before stop. If a
quick stop is required, reduce STOP DELAY. If
STOP DELAY = 45 sec
the compressor is to run for a longer period, in-
DELAY UP = 30 sec crease STOP DELAY.
(only reciprocating compressors)
If DELAY UP is increased, the reciprocating com-
DELAY DOWN = 20 sec pressor will load capacity stages at a lower speed;
(only reciprocating compressors) vice versa a lower value of DELAY UP will result
During the running-in time, adjustment of the val- in faster loading.
ues will be required. If DELAY DOWN is increased, the reciprocating
If Nz is reduced, the plant will react to minor suc- compressor will unload capacity stages at a lower
tion pressure variations in relation to the set point. speed; vice versa a lower value of DELAY DOWN
This will result in frequent regulation of the com- will result in faster unloading.
0178-511 - ENG 191/230

Rev. 2005.03
In many cases it is advantageous if DELAY UP is With compressor K2 at 100% and a persistent ca-
higher than DELAY DOWN. pacity requirement, the timer START DELAY will
It is recommended to place all reciprocating com- start on K3. The timer will count down before K3
pressors in a system one after the other followed starts up.
by the screw compressors, or vice versa. When K3 is at 100% and a cooling requirement
The take-over and transfer functions described in still exists, the timer START DELAY will start on
the following will only be effective if all reciprocat- K4. When the timer has expired, K4 will start.
ing compressors have lower starting numbers When the above has taken place, screw compres-
than the screw compressors. sor K3 will go down from 100% while K4 will in-
The above is a general description of the various crease its capacity. When they meet, ie when their
settings. The final settings will depend completely slide positions are the same, they will continue to
on the plant in question. regulate in parallel (see Fig. 15.1).
Whether screw compressor K3 decreases its ca-
Loading sequence - sequence A
pacity and how fast to meet K4 depends com-
Compressor K1 is assumed to be in operation at
pletely on the strength of the "UP" regulating sig-
eg 50 % {Runs by itself}, K2 {Not my turn}, K3, K4
nal.
and K5 {Not my turn} have been stopped.
With screw compressors K3 and K4 at 100% and
The MULTISAB status, as shown in picture SET-
with a persistent cooling requirement, START DE-
UP I MULTISAB I MULTISAB STATE, is
LAY will be started on screw compressor K5. After
marked with {--}.
a countdown to zero, K5 will start up. K3 will now
At increasing cooling requirement and conse- be kept at 100% {Runs at max capacity}, and K4
quent capacity loading, reciprocating compressor {Lead compr.} and K5 {Lag compr.} will regulate in
K1 will load stages at the DELAY UP time lag until parallel.
100% capacity has been reached.
It is possible to make the loading speed depend State of transfer
on how far the actual suction pressure is above
In case of a minor cooling requirement, it is as-
the set point by setting the proportional factor DE-
sumed that the plant stabilizes in the following sit-
LAY UP above 1 in the picture SETUP I TIMERS
uation: reciprocating compressors K1 and K2 both
I P BAND FACTOR. See section Regulating set-
at 100% and screw compressor K3 in 40% slide
up.
position.
If a cooling requirement still exists, ie the actual
Reciprocating compressor K2 will now pass into
suction pressure is higher than the set point, the
the "transfer" state, ie it will start decreasing its ca-
timer START DELAY will start on compressor K2.
pacity to force the screw compressor capacity up-
The timer will count down from its set point to ze-
wards.
ro, and reciprocating compressor K2 will start. (In
case the suction pressure reaches the neutral However, this will only take place if the actual suc-
zone before START DELAY expires, K2 will not tion pressure is within the 'transfer zone', consist-
start). ing of the neutral zone (zone 1) plus the transfer
zone (zone 3), which is default 15% of the regula-
tor proportional band, (see Fig. 15.3).
192/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
When the reciprocating compressor unloads an- Provided that requirements stay the same, this
other stage, this will happen with a time delay that process will continue until the screw compressor
(in sec) is the setting of DELAY DOWN multiplied is above 85% slide position. Above this fixed limit
by the 'transfer factor' for DELAY DOWN. This it is assumed that the screw compressor is run-
factor, 1-10, has been entered to avoid hunting in ning fairly economically. Further reduction of the
the plant as far as possible as the regulating sys- reciprocating compressor capacity would result in
tem must have time to react to the rise in the suc- a high risk that the screw compressor is no longer
tion pressure when the reciprocating compressor able to take over, causing frequent loading and
is unloading. unloading of stages or start and stop of the recip-
If the suction pressure rises (zone 2), the recipro- rocating compressor.
cating compressor will stop the down regulation The result may be that the reciprocating compres-
while the screw compressor regulates upwards to sor K1 runs at 100%, K2 at 25% and screw com-
get the suction pressure in place. pressor K3 at 85%.
Once the plant has balanced, the reciprocating If the cooling requirement increases, screw com-
compressor will continue the unloading of stages pressor K3 will be loaded at 100%, whereupon re-
and the screw compressor will readjust. ciprocating compressor K2 will be loaded.
Fig. 15.3
+ regulator output signal (capacity UP)
6. outside PB
4. 85% PB
2. 15% PB
1. NZ Takeover zone = 1+2
SP
Transfer zone = 1+3
3. 15% PB
5. 85% PB
7. outside PB
- regulator output signal (capacity DOWN)
State of take-over 'take-over zones', consisting of the neutral zone

If the plant stabilizes after a transfer situation with (zone 1) plus the take-over zone (zone 2) which is
K1 at 100%, K2 stopped, screw compressor K3 at default 15% of the regulator proportional band,
40% capacity, and K2 able to take over this ca- (see Fig. 15.3).
pacity, K2 will start. However, this will only take When K2 starts up to take over the screw com-
place if the actual suction pressure is within the pressor capacity, this will take place with the load-
0178-511 - ENG 193/230

Rev. 2005.03
ing time DELAY UP multiplied by the 'take-over' are of equal size, the parallel capacity will usually
factor for DELAY UP. This factor, 1-10, has been be approx. 55%.
entered to avoid hunting. The percentage of PARALLEL CAPACITY can be
When reciprocating compressor K2 is loading read in SETUP I MULTISAB I PARALLEL
stages, the suction pressure will drop, but this is CONTROL.
compensated for by unloading on screw compres- K5 will now ramp down towards 0% {Stop Ramp
sor K3, until it reaches minimum and stops on Down} with a speed of approx. 12% /min. When
STOP DELAY. K5 is below 5% {May stop}, the timer STOP DE-
Be aware that during reloading periods it may LAY will start. When STOP DELAY expires, K5
happen that a screw compressor is running at low will stop {Blocked}. K4 will, until K5 stops, ensure
capacity. Furthermore, reloading will take a cer- regulation all alone {Stop Ramp Up} as K1, K2
tain amount of time, which prevents instability in and K3 remain at 100% {Runs at max capacity}.
the plant. Next, the screw compressors K3 {Lead compr.}
In plants with frequent load changes, it may take and K4 {Lag compr.} will work together until K4
longer before the reciprocating compressors take stops.
over/transfer capacity. K3 will now decrease its capacity to a minimum
If the plant is very unstable, the variations may be and stops on its time, STOP DELAY.
absorbed exclusively by the screw compressor. When this has happened reciprocating compres-
Consequently, the screw compressor will in some sor K2 will start unloading stages with the time de-
periods run at low capacity. This can be avoided lay DELAY DOWN until it is down to minimum ca-
by removing the starting permission from either pacity. Next, a stage is unloaded on compressor
the screw compressor or the reciprocating com- K1, and the STOP DELAY time will start on K2 (ie
pressor. during unloading the reciprocating compressors
Reciprocating compressors will only try to take will overlap, (see Fig. 15.2).
over/transfer capacity from/to screw compressors The system will continue unloading in stages until
that come later in the sequence. K1 stops.
Unloading sequence - sequence A The plant may also stabilize at part load, and in
In an operating situation where the entire plant case the cooling requirement is increasing, the sit-
runs at 100% and with a decreasing cooling re- uation will be the same as described under Load-
quirement, unloading will start on the screw com- ing sequence - sequence A.
pressors.
Loading sequence - sequence B
As illustrated in Fig. 15.1, K4 and K5 will reduce Compressor K1 is assumed to have stopped {May
their capacity in parallel until both are below the start}, K2, K3, K4 and K5 {Not my turn} are
value called the parallel capacity. The parallel ca- stopped.
pacity is automatically calculated by MULTISAB.
It depends on the size and types of the involved The MULTISAB status, as shown in picture SET-
compressors and the operating conditions. The UP I MULTISAB I MULTISAB STATE, is
parallel capacity is the limit at which it is certain marked with {--}.
that K4 is able to take over. If the two compressors
194/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
In case of a cooling requirement, K1 will start. Be aware that with the above sequence screw
When it has reached 100% capacity, START DE- compressor K1 may start and stabilize at eg 35%
LAY will start on screw compressor K2. The timer capacity corresponding to the actual cooling re-
will count down, and K2 will start up. When this quirement. In this situation a subsequent recipro-
has happened, screw compressor K1 will go down cating compressor will not try to take over be-
from 100%, while the capacity of K2 will go up. cause it comes later in the sequence.
When the compressors meet, ie when their slide
positions are the same, they will regulate in paral- Unloading sequence - sequence B
lel.
With the entire plant running at 100% and a de-
When K1 and K2 are in 100%, the time delay creasing cooling requirement, reciprocating com-
START DELAY will start on screw compressor K3. pressor K5 {Lag compr.} will be the first to unload
When the timer has expired, K3 will start up and stages with time delay DELAY DOWN until it has
K1 will be kept at 100%. reached minimum capacity. Next, one stage is un-
When this has happened, screw compressor K2 loaded on compressor K4, and STOP DELAY will
will go down from 100%, while the capacity of K3 now start on K5 (ie during unloading the recipro-
will go up. When the compressors meet, ie when cating compressors will overlap, (see Fig. 15.2)).
their slide positions are the same, they will regu- When STOP DELAY has expired, compressor K5
late in parallel. will stop, and K4 will now continue the unloading.
Whether K2 reduces its capacity and at which When K4 has unloaded to minimum capacity, it
speed to meet K3 depends completely on the will start up its STOP DELAY time and when this
strength of the "UP" regulating signal. has expired, K4 will stop.
With K2 and K3 at 100% and a persistent cooling Screw compressors K2 and K3 are now going to
requirement, ie the actual suction pressure is decrease their capacity in parallel operation, until
higher than the set point, the time delay START they are below the parallel capacity (usually 55%
DELAY will start on reciprocating compressor K4. if they are of equal size). K3 will be run down to
The timer will count down to zero and reciprocat- minimum capacity and stops on its STOP DELAY
ing compressor K4 will start up. Should the actual time. At the same time K2 will take over.
suction pressure reach the neutral zone before Screw compressors K1 and K2 will adjust in par-
START DELAY expires, K4 will not start. allel to the same slide position and start decreas-
K4 will now load and unload stages according to ing their capacity in parallel operation until they
the cooling requirements, while the screw com- are below the parallel capacity. K2 will be run
pressors K1, K2, K3 are kept at 100% capacity down to minimum capacity and stop on its STOP
{Runs at max capacity}. DELAY time. At the same time K1 will take over.
This will continue until all the compressors are at Depending on the capacity requirement, K1 will
100% capacity. reduce its capacity and possibly stop completely.
0178-511 - ENG 195/230

Rev. 2005.03
Practical example 1
Fig. 15.4
% SMC 8-100 Start # 2

100
80
60
40
20
0
SMC 12-100 Start # 1
100
80
60
40
20
0
VMY 325-3 Start # 5
100
80
60
40
20
0
VMY 325-2 Start # 3
100
80
60
40
20
0
VMY 347-1 Start # 4
100
80
60
40
20
0
-4 -3 -2 -1 Immediate Time
A B C D E F G H I K
0177150_0
Fig. 15.4 shows that the VMY 347 screw com- drops, and K2 will unload and stop. The two recip-
pressor has number 1, the two VMY 325 compres- rocating compressors K4 and K5 will now cover
sors have numbers 2 and 3. Further, SMC 12-100 the cooling requirements.
has number 4 and SMC 8-100 number 5. The se- In interval "E" there is a brief increase in the cool-
quence starting number is seen after "Start #". ing requirement. This increase is covered by K2.
The curve, taken from an existing plant, describes After some time K2 will stop as the cooling re-
a regulating course over a period of approx. 3 quirement has dropped again. However, the plant
hours, divided into intervals from A to K. does not have time to stabilize.
In interval "A" compressors 1 and 2 run at part In interval "F" the cooling requirement rises again
load, until they are both a little below 50% slide and K2 will restart and go up to approx. 60% slide
position, interval "B". Here, the system decides position. Here, the plant stabilizes at a constant
that K1 can be unloaded and K2 will take over. compressor capacity in interval "G".
K2 will now increase its capacity with a simultane- In the period until interval "H" the reciprocating
ous increase in the cooling requirement, which compressor transfers capacity to the screw com-
means that K4 will start up and adjust its capacity, pressor as the screw compressor is below 85%
interval "C". In interval "D" the cooling requirement slide position. K5 stops completely, and K4 will
196/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
start transferring capacity. In interval "I" K2 has

risen to 70%. Until interval "K" K4 will unload fur-
ther and K2 will now be at 100% capacity.
Practical example 2
Fig. 15.5
%
SMC 8-100 Start # 2
100
80
60
40
20
0
SMC 12-100 Start # 1
100
80
60
40
20
0
VMY 325-3 Start # 5
100
80
60
40
20
0
VMY 325-2 Start # 3
100
80
60
40
20
0
VMY 347-1 Start # 4
100
80
60
40
20
0
-4 -3 -2 -1 Immediate
Time
A B C D E F G H I K
0177150_0
Fig. 15.5 shows that the VMY 347 screw com- make K1 start up. At this point K1 and K2 will start
pressor has number 1, the two VMY 325 compres- dividing the capacity. This can be seen in interval
sors have numbers 2 and 3. Furthermore, SMC "D", where K2 has decreased a little, while K1 is
12-100 has number 4 and SMC 8-100 number 5. on its way up.
The sequence starting number is seen after "Start In interval "E" K1 and K2 have the same slide po-
#". sition (approx. 70%) and they regulate in parallel.
The curve, taken from an existing plant, describes In interval "F" K5 may transfer capacity and this
a regulating course over a period of approx. 3 may continue with K4 transferring until interval
hours, divided into intervals from A to K. "G", where the screw compressors have reached
In interval "A" compressors K2 and K4 are running approx. 80%.
at 100% until interval "B". Here, there is a rise in In interval "H" K1 and K2 are above 85% and K4
the cooling requirement, and K5 will start loading. will stay passive until interval "I", where K1 and K2
Until interval "C" these three compressors are run- have regulated down due to decreasing cooling
ning at 100%. A rise in the cooling requirement will requirement. Once they are below 85%, K4 will
0178-511 - ENG 197/230

Rev. 2005.03
transfer its remaining capacity. The screw com- Thus, it can be difficult to achieve an optimum
pressors have now taken over the entire load. compressor operation in every situation. Howev-
Please note that in case the sequence is changed er, it is possible to select compressors by using
during operation, do not expect any immediate re- the signal input external start - normal stop as a
action. If the plant is balanced at this particular supplement to the MULTISAB system facilities as
time, it will continue to operate with the "old" se- described above. By removing the external start -
quence, until a movement has taken place in the normal start signal the compressors can be re-
regulation and it has adapted to the new se- moved from the sequence. MULTISAB will now
quence. The chosen compressor sequence will load compressors with rising sequence numbers -
depend on the operating mode of the plant as well despite the "holes" in the starting sequence.
as the size of the compressors compared to each
other.
198/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
Trouble shooting
The plant cannot start
1) Are all UNISAB II units set on REMOTE? – Check communication cable and
2) Have the signals external start - normal stop connection.
and external start - immediate stop been ac- – Do two or more UNISAB II units have
tivated? See UNISAB II drawings Digital in- the same compressor number (COMPR.
puts. NO)? Check the numbers in picture
3) Do the units communicate? - check this by SETUP I CONFIG I COMMUNICA-
means of the picture SETUP I MULTISAB TIONS. They must all be unique.
I ALL COMPRESSORS. Check communi- 2) Do all units that are supposed to run in se-
cation cable. quence have identical SYSTEM NO, which
4) Is the actual suction pressure higher than they must. Check the picture SETUP I
the set point +1/2 neutral zone? MULTISAB I MULTISAB STATE.
5) Are any of the limiting functions active? 3) Check whether all units in the same system
agree upon the same SYS.REGULATOR,
6) Have AUTO START and AUTO STOP been see picture SETUP I MULTISAB I MUL-
configured? TISAB STATE. If this is not the case, do all
7) Has the COLD STORE FUNC. been config- units agree on how to decide the mas-
ured? ter/system regulator? See the PREF.MAS-
TER field in SETUP I CONFIG.
The plant does not run in sequence 4) If PREF. MASTER = START#, has the
1) Do the units communicate? In case of no same START NO been entered in two or
communication, each UNISAB II will run more units? See picture SETUP I MULTI-
with its own regulator. It may be useful to en- SAB I MULTISAB STATE. They must all
ter the picture SETUP I MULTISAB I ALL be unique!
COMPRESSORS and go through the com- 5) Is START NO = 0 in one or more UNISAB II
pressor numbers (use J and K ). There will units? MULTISAB requires that all START
be a question mark (?) in the lower left cor- NO are higher than 0 and that not two are
ner of the display if there is no communica- identical. Note that though it is not possible
tion to the UNISAB II with the selected to select 0 as START NO., the START NO.
number. may still become 0 for several reasons.
0178-511 - ENG 199/230

Rev. 2005.03
200/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
16. List of versions

This engineering manual applies to the UNISAB II version stated on page 1.
As an exception, the manual can be used for an earlier version of the UNISAB II program. In such cases
it is necessary to consult the list of versions below to identify the points where the manual cannot be relied
upon.
Version no. Description

1.01 On the HPO compressor an incorrect scaling of the discharge pressure has been cor-
rected. 15 languages have been entered.
1.02 No changes in the user's operation.
1.03 The timers Start Delay and Stop Delay will be working, also when capacity is regulated
on the external 4-20 mA analog signal.
The digital output AUX = "ready" is only active when the compressor is able to start, ie
the digital input "external start permission - normal stop" must also be active.
1.04 The hour counter counts in single hours and no longer in intervals of 10 hours.
An error in press./temp. conversion for R23 refrigerant at approx. -70°C has been cor-
rected.
An error in the MULTISAB system resulting in blocking of plants with three or more re-
ciprocating compressors in sequence has been corrected. (The compressor starting
as no 1 remained at 100% capacity at load reduction, preventing no. 2 from unloading
the last stage).
1.05 This version does not exist.
1.06 Refrigerant R508 has changed its name to R410A.
A new refrigerant, R407C, has been entered.
Two new screw compressor types have been introduced: SAB 128H Mk3 and SAB
163H Mk3.
Automatic zero position (capacity slide) setting has been introduced for SAB 202 with
automatic Vi slide as well as manual zero position setting for other screw compressor
types.
1.07 Automatic zero position setting has been introduced for SAB 202 with manual Vi slide.
The regulating speed (max speed) has been increased. The regulation is now faster
(longer pulses - particularly at low oil pressure levels) than in previous versions.
TSMC/TCMO compressors had no setpoint 2 (SP2) for discharge pipe temperature for
regulating the "intermediate press. injection". This has now been introduced.
1.08 General remarks:
During a sequence running with two or more screw compressors, it could happen that
all compressors stayed at low capacity without regulating upwards although a capacity
requirement existed. This error has been corrected in MULTISAB.
If the suction pressure ramp limiting function prevents the compressor from increasing
its capacity to more than 5%, the timer "delay before stop" will not be activated as was
the case previously. The compressor will remain in operation.
The configuration point "COMMON CONDENSER" has been extended to include
"common evaporator" and is now called "COMMON EVAP/COND N/N".
0178-511 - ENG 201/230

Rev. 2005.03

Screw compressors:
For screw compressors two warnings have been introduced: "LIMITING SUCTION
PRESSURE" and "LIMITING DISCHARGE PRESSURE". These will occur whenever
the UNISAB II is in position "READY" but unable to start because the suction or dis-
charge pressure is within the neutral zone of the limiter in question.
For VMY compressors, the solenoid valve for "capacity down" opens whenever the
compressor is prelubricated.
A limiting function has been introduced for "high suction pressure limitation". The com-
pressor capacity is limited, during operation, to an adjustable max. value when the suc-
tion pressure is above the high warning limit for the suction pressure.
Reciprocating compressors:
A function controlling the by-pass valve ("cap.stage 1") has now been entered for the
TCMO 28 compressor.
The timers "DELAY UP" and "DELAY DOWN" that operate in connection with the load-
ing and unloading of capacity stages are now active both during capacity regulation
with external "4-20 mA input" signals or if capacity regulation takes place via data com-
munication.
In the TIMERS menu picture the TIMER SETUP picture has been displaced so that the
picture obtains a position on the part of the timer menu that is immediately visible when
you select the menu.
In the CALIB/AUX.OUTPUT picture the AUX output can now be activated by: RUN-
NING and READY-EXT.
At auto alarm reset, e.g. at a low suction pressure, the alarm relay will also be auto
reset.
Special warnings: Limiter suction pressure, Limiter discharge pressure, Limiter brine
and Limiter hot water can now be read via the Danbuss communication.
Motor currents SP1 and SP2 can now be changed right up to 2500 Amp.
Due to an error in the A/D converter software, we have received reports of a false
alarm for "Low brine temp" at "Power up" in some plants. This has now been corrected.
Via the communication it is now possible to read whether UII is in REMOTE/capacity
regulating mode. To be read as "Cap.mode".
An HP compressor started up by means of the "HP at two-stages" function + the "Ext.
start normal stop" signal, is now not going to stop on the "Stop delay" timer anymore,
even though capacity is below 5%.
Screw compressors:
A Multisab error has been rectified which could occur as follows:
At suction pressure limitation, both compressors regulated down to 0% and the Lead
compressor stopped. Before the Lag compressor stopped, however, the capacity re-
quirements change. The Lag compressor then continued to run at 0% without regulat-
ing upwards, although capacity was needed. This situation could be altered by chang-
ing the Lead compressor from Remote to Manual after which the regulation worked
correctly when switching back again to Remote.
202/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03

The position regulator parameters (SP, NZ and PB) are now accessible in a new pa-
rameter picture for MOTOR/CAPACITY. It is also possible to change NZ and PB via
the communication.
Further, the neutral zone (+/-1%) at capacity regulation has been removed.
A false alarm for "capacity error" that might occur (in some special cases), often at
100% capacity and with regulation in the neutral zone, has now been removed.
If a VMY compressor happened to fall out at "Capacity error" during operation, while
the slide was above 5%, the slide was not run down when the alarm was confirmed,
because the oil pump did not start. This has now been corrected.
The VMY compressor would stop the slide run down (the oil pump was stopped) when-
ever the capacity was below 5%. An extended hysteresis has now been introduced so
that the oil pump does not stop until 10 sec. have passed and capacity is below 4.5%.
The MULTISAB transfer- and take-over mode for linking of reciprocating and screw
compressors has now been implemented with the same functionality as that of Unis-
ab-RT.
The texts in the TIMERS, TRANSFER and TAKE-OVER pictures have been changed.
The new E-type for SMC/TSMC compressors has been introduced in CONFIG.
HPO/HPC. The setpoint for the suction pressure regulator can now be set to 25 Bar -
the discharge pressure regulator right up to 40 Bar. The warning limit for High Differ-
ential Pressure is 25 Bar.
1.10 Please note that this program version no. 1.10 is tied up with instruction
manual version 1.10A.
General remarks:
All SMC and TSMC compressors are going to be configured as either type S/L or E.
An HP compressor started with the "HP at two-stage" function + "Ext. start normal" sig-
nal, is not going to stop on the "Stop delay" timer if the compressor has been selected
for REMOTE/Multisab and no other compressors are operating in this system. Can
only be stopped by opening the input: "Ext. start normal".
The AUX output READY-EXT is now also applicable in AUTO
It is now possible to use a user-configurable refrigerant R000.
It is now possible to use a user-defined password.
UNISAB II can now be reconfigured to UNISAB / Evolution.
Screw compressors:
The secondary oil pump on VMY compressors was able to make a brief start on "power
up". This has been corrected.
Prosab II and UNISAB II did not regulate correctly in LEAD-LAG.
This has been corrected.
The minimum limits for low oil pressure has been raised for Mk3 compressors.
The heating rod was not connected at compressor stop if the compressor:
1) stopped on alarm within 60 sec after start or
2) the alarm "capacity error" appeared at a stop.
This has now been rectified.
0178-511 - ENG 203/230

Rev. 2005.03

An adjustable time delay has been built in on the oil return.
The time delay for low oil pressure is now also active during operation.
It is now possible to set up a delayed closing of the solenoid valves for oil cooling or
water cooling at compressor stop.
A limiting function has been introduced for high discharge temperatures.
The limiting function for "high suction pressure limitation" has now also been intro-
duced for reciprocating compressors.
The capacity of the reciprocating compressor is stored in DIAGNOSIS I OLD
ALARMS in case the alarm should fall out.
1.11 This version does not exist.
COP calculation and display on the UNISAB II is now possible. Select the function in
configuration. The calculated COP, the cooling output and the efficiency are shown in
the picture COP.
The position transmitter signal for the capacity slide can be calibrated at 0 % and 100
%.
A test version containing the SAB 330 screw compressor is installed. The programme
can only be used for internal Sabroe test.
It is now possible to select the unit kPa in the UNISAB II.
A larger EEPROM type with a capacity of 4 kByte has been introduced. Up to now the
capacity has only been 2 kByte.
Screw compressors:
Screw compressor type SV 80 is now supported.
The UNISAB Evolution II data are now automatically updated in the Evolution menu
structure.
An error whereby the heating element was not activated after switching the power
on/off has been rectified.
A conversion error in the display of oil filter difference pressure has now been rectified.
The error only occurred during PSI conversion.
It is now possible to disconnect the MULTISAB "transfer/take-over" function.
A MULTISAB error which occurred in a certain combination of plants with both screw
compressors and reciprocating compressors has now been rectified.
EEPROM, calibration settings and hour counter are saved.
Screw compressors:
In version 1.12 the VMY compressors started the prelubrication pumps shortly after
power up. This has now been rectified.
When the UNISAB II has been configured so that it is regulated using the brine tem-
perature, and this is in the lower P-Band, and a limiting function at the same time is
active, the UNISAB II will - when the lowest step has been reached - count down in
"delay down" instead of "stop timer". This has now been rectified.
204/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03

1.13 Version 1.13 - which is marked with the date 990831 - differs from the original 1.13
(990831) mainly on the following points:
It is found in three varieties: 1.13-A, 1.13-B and 1.13-C. The three varieties contain the
same program but in three different sets of languages:
-1.13-A: English, Danish, Finnish, Italian, Norwegian and Swedish.
-1.13-B: English, German, French, Hungarian, Dutch and Russian.
-1.13-C: English, Czech, Spanish, Greek, Portuguese and Polish.
When UNISAB II is switched on for the first time or when a program
RESET is performed, the set language is English.
Low oil pressure alarm is delayed extra 10 seconds at compressor start to avoid unin-
tended alarm.
A number of alarms and warnings has been added.
The alarm #83 "Vi position" appears if the shown capacity is 100% while the measured
capacity position is < 20%.
1.13 A number of errors have been corrected compared to earlier versions.
(000224) Additionally,
it is now possible in the MULTISAB→ PARALLEL CONTR picture to type in an OFF-
SET to the parallel capacity;
changes regarding "Evolution" have been carried out.
The following compressor types have been added:
-SAB 128 HR
-SAB 163 HR
-SAB 250 S/L/E
-SAB 330 S/L/E
The following refrigerant type has been added: R744 (CO2).
Communication with Quantum compressor controller now possible.
The AUX OUTPUT can now additionally be configured to "READY AND ME ONLY"
which can be used to ensure water circulation at the PT100 sensor even if no com-
pressor is running.
The manual has been thoroughly updated.
0178-511 - ENG 205/230

Rev. 2005.03

Screw compressors:
The capacity control is now being carried out by standard PID controllers.
Minimum capacity increase/decrease pulse 0.3 sec.
At compressor stop, capacity down signal until capacity < 5%.
A low pass filter has been attached to the suction superheat to avoid low superheat
alarm when unloading stages. The timer "Low superheat" is now adjustable 15 - 600
sec.
2.01 Further remarks:
Compressor types SAB 283 L/E, SAB 355 L as well as the GSV/RWF series (see con-
figuration).
Two new refrigerants: R1270 (Propylene), R 290 (Propane).
One new timer has been introduced for screw compressors:
Timer 33 Lubricating pressure.
One new timer for reciprocating and screw compressors have been introduced:
Timer 32 Low suction pressure.
Turkish has been added.
Timer for oil filter differential pressure has been raised to 300 seconds.
Screw compressor, type SAB 80. Max values for oil filter differential pressure have
been changed to: Alarm = 2.5 bar and warning = 2.2 bar.
Contrast can now be adjusted from any menu picture by means of the RESET button
and the arrow up/down keys.
Low alarm and low warning for brine temperature have been changed from -60°C to
100°C.
Screw compressor: Start delay and stop delay factors affecting the countdown of the
timer have been changed to start and stop delay “zones” in [%] of the P-band. When
regulated value is outside a “zone”, the timer will start. Set value 0-100 [%]. Setting of
0 [%] results in the “zone” passing over to the other side of Nz, ie. a stop delay zone =
0 % means that the stop delay timer will start when regulated value is inside or below
Nz.
2.01 (020221) EEPROM. When switching to the use of two EPROMS at the same time (from version
2.0x) a timing problem occurred which had the effect that writing to and reading from
the EEPROM was not always carried out correctly. This has now been rectified.
206/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03

2.01 ROTA This version has never been officially released but has primarily been used for rotatune
units and as spare part for correction of errors.
General remarks:
If the compressor capacity was controlled by a 4-20 mA signal, the compressor would
not start even though the signal exceeded 4.8 mA (5% capacity). This has now been
rectified.
At the initial start-up of UNISAB II, the start number and system number were set at a
fixed value of “0”. This had the effect that the compressor could not start and operate
in auto and remote control. This has now been rectified.
Multisab sequence was not optimized to support correct operation between frequency
controlled and conventional compressors. This has now been rectified.
The menu lines CAPACITY and VOLUME have been moved from the MOTOR picture
in the main menu to a new picture called CAPACITY. This picture is found below the
SET UP menu. See menu tree in the beginning of your manual.
There is a new menu line below the MOTOR picture which is called MOTOR FRE-
QUENCY. It indicates motor revolutions per minute when the compressor capacity is
regulated by a frequency converter.
The COP picture has been moved from the CALIBRATION menu to the CONFIGURA-
TION menu.
Configuration. In the measuring unit picture, there is a new menu line, MOTOR INPUT.
See the configuration section in your manual for installation.
Screw compressors:
When operating in 100% capacity for a longer period of time, sometimes the compres-
sor would simply stop for no reason with the alarm for capacity error on. This has now
been rectified.
The following compressor type has been added: Gram GST screw compressor with
stepless capacity slide control and control of the volume slide in three steps by means
of two solenoid valves. Volume ratios: 2.2-3.5-5.
The volume transmitter can now be calibrated by means of software calibration. See
the calibration section in your manual.
The “feedback” signal from a frequency converter can now be calibrated by means of
software calibration. See the calibration section in your manual.
Configuration. In the measuring unit picture, there is a new menu line, CAP/FREQ.
See the configuration section in your manual for installation.
A new timer has been introduced in connection with GST compressors: Timer 34 Vi-
pause.
HPO/HPC. High warning is increased from 25.0 bar to 25.2 bar. Thus, the limiter zone
is now 25.0-25.2 bar.
0178-511 - ENG 207/230

Rev. 2005.03

2.02.1 This version replaces all prior versions.
General remarks:
4-20 mA initialization error during UNISAB II restart. The display was flashing during
reconnection of power supply to UNISAB II. The error first occurred in version 2.01. It
has now been rectified.
The ROTA concept has now been extended to include reciprocating compressors with
frequency converters and screw compressors controlled by a combination of frequen-
cy, capacity slide and volume slide.
The multisab system now handles both frequency controlled screw and reciprocating
compressors which operate in sequence with either reciprocating and/or screw com-
pressors.
The “copy EEPROM” function, when changing parts in UNISAB II or at low battery volt-
age and a simultaneous reconnection of power supply, has now been changed. Thus
it is no longer necessary to enter password to reply YES, simply press “arrow left” to
restart. See service section in the manual for further details.
UNISAB evolution plant. When simultaneously using the function EVOLUTION and
CHILLER = YES in the configuration, the following error might occur: During operation,
the green diode on the front cover would start to flash for about one minute and then,
for no apparent reason, the compressor would stop. This has now been rectified.
UNISAB evolution plant. When simultaneously using the function EVOLUTION and
CHILLER = YES in the configuration, the following error might occur: In case of a
pause before compressor start-up, the compressor would not start. The start delay tim-
er kept counting in negative seconds instead of stopping at 0 and starting the compres-
sor. This has now been rectified.
Configuration. There are two new menu lines in the picture MOTOR below the CON-
FIG menu, namely, MINIMUM frequency and MAXIMUM frequency. See the configu-
ration section.
Multisab error in connection with direct capacity control: When disrupting the 4-20 mA
remote control signal for several UNISAB II compressors at the same time, not all of
the compressors will start when the signal returns. This has now been rectified. The
error might also occur in EPROM version 1.13 and earlier.
In the Instruction Manual of version 2.02 and in later manuals, there are charts of “UN-
ISAB II Settings” and “UNISAB II diagnosis” in the back of this book. These used to be
in the Starting-up Manual.
All new menus and parameters of this version are primarily shown in English only,
even if a language other than English has been chosen. However, the following five
languages are fully translated: Danish, Swedish, Dutch, French and Italian. The re-
maining languages will be updated in later versions as they are being translated.
Screw compressors:
When regulating the discharge pressure, the regulator would be out of order and thus
capacity could either be 0% or 100% but could not settle at medium capacity. This has
now been rectified.
Timer values concerning the prelubrication function for screw compressors was not in-
itialized correctly after factory reset - only if followed by a power reset. This has now
been rectified.
208/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
Version Description
There was an error in the regulator, which would only occur when a limiter was in passive
mode and when, at the same time, more capacity was required. This error caused the ca-
pacity to decrease very slowly as long as the limiter was in passive mode. This has now
been rectified.
The following compressor type has been added: SAB110SR/LR.
The PID-regulator function has been thoroughly explained in this version of the manual and
it contains practical examples of general usage of this function.
Known errors of this version:
General remarks:
Multisab. Sequential control of several rotatune compressors in the same system as con-
ventional compressors (rotatune master/slave operation) has not yet been implemented. It
is expected to be implemented in version 2.02.2.
The following concerns compressors which control frequency on the frequency converter
by means of a 4-20 mA output signal from the UNISAB II and only in MANUAL OPERA-
TION MODE:
In MANUAL MODE, the compressor capacity will be regulated back to the capacity it had
before the limiter went into active MODE, as soon as the limiter is no longer in function.
Therefore, if capacity is manually regulated up to e.g. 80% and the limiter is activated and
forces capacity down to e.g. 30%, capacity will then automatically be regulated back to 80%
as soon as the limiter is no longer in function. This regulation takes place without activating
the capacity keys.
UNISAB II Evolution: When changing baudrate for port 1 (when using Evolution PLC), a
factory reset must be carried out or UNISAB II must be turned off and on. If this is not car-
ried out, the new communication speed will not be initialized and communication to the PLC
cannot be effected.
Screw compressors:
SAB110SR/LR. During operation for a long period of time in remote or auto control, it might
be quite some time before capacity is decreased even though the regulator requires less
capacity.
Motor frequency control in connection with two-stage reciprocating compressors has not
yet been fully implemented.
0178-511 - ENG 209/230

Rev. 2005.03
Version Description
2.02.2 General remarks:

Multisab sequence with several rotatune compressors running in the same system is now
implemented but has not yet been tested. It is expected to be released in the next version.
UNISAB II evolution; when changing communication speed on port 1 for use with Evolution
PLC, the new speed is now initialised automatically.
Superuser password has been changed.
Textual errors have been corrected in the Swedish instruction manual.
When installing eprom version 2.02.2 instead of an earlier version and at the same time
maintaining battery voltage on UNISAB II, the contrast now initialises at a value between
20 and 80 when pressing the “R” key. Afterwards, the contrast can be adjusted by simulta-
neously activating the “Reset” key and the “arrow up” or “arrow down” key.
Screw compressors:
Screw compressor SAB110SR/LR. When operating at 100% capacity for a long period of
time in either remote or auto control, the length of period until capacity was reduced was
disproportionately long even though the regulator had required less capacity. This has now
been rectified.
Due to an error in the outer PID-regulator, a screw compressor about to stop would keep
running at minimum capacity because the “delay before stop” timer was reset and started
recounting before the compressor stopped. The problem only appeared when e.g. the suc-
tion pressure value passed the limit between NZ and the lower P-band. This problem ap-
plies to all regulating modes. Furthermore, the compressor would run up capacity a little
every time this limit was passed. This has now been rectified.
Known errors:
When using the “copy eeprom” function, all timer values are reset at default values.
210/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
Version Description

Mode of operation has been changed for timer no. 32 "Low suction pressure". Now the
alarm for low suction pressure can be suppressed for up to 60 seconds during both start-
up and operation.
Rotatune multisab function; the taking over function has been corrected. Now a master
compressor includes subsequent stopped rotatune compressors (slaves) in the taking over
calculation when attempting to take over a subsequent screw compressor. Earlier, it only
included its own 60% free capacity in the taking over calculation. See Rota appendix.
A false warning for low suction pressure when the compressor is in stopped control mode
has been corrected. Before, the warning disappeared when control mode was changed
from stopped but it generated false warnings which communicated with the UNISAB net-
work either via the Sabcom II driver or the Comsab II module. The warning typically ap-
peared when the suction pressure lay between the low alarm default value and the low
warning default value.
Rotatune multisab. An error regarding several systems in the same network has been cor-
rected. When a rotatune compressor was operating with several systems in the network
(e.g. low and high pressure systems) the multisab system would fail. A slave which was
starting up would immediately stop after only a few seconds.
Rotatune multisab. When a master compressor was stopped due to an alarm, the slave did
not automatically adopt the role of master regulator. This has now been rectified.
Screw compressors:
Timer no. 7 "Prelubrication" has been changed for screw compressors of the SABxxxHR
type. Prelubrication has been changed from a default value of 10 seconds to 0 seconds.
The compressor will still be prelubricated but the compressor motor must start up immedi-
ately when the signal of the oil flow switch is present.
An error has been corrected in rotatune multisab between two rota screw compressors.
When two rotatune compressors were running in parallel, the master ran with a fixed ca-
pacity of e.g. 60% and the slave hunted up and down with a variation of 5-10% around the
the master’s 60%=50-70% when it should be running with the same capacity as the master.
To compensate for this, the default values for the internal regulator on the UNISAB II on the
slave compressor must be changed. P-band should be changed from 200 to 400%, T.int.
from 30 to 90 seconds and minimum pulse should be changed to 0.3 seconds.
Reciprocating compressor Mk4. A new timer no. 11 is introduced, "Filter diff. High". On Mk4
reciprocating compressors, the oil filter differential pressure is monitored by an electrical
switch. Digital input 9 is usually open. If the differential pressure exceeds the set value, the
switch gives an input signal. If this signal is active for more than 300 seconds, the warning
"high oil differential pressure" is given. There is no operating limiting function in this warn-
ing. See wiring diagrams for installation of this switch.
The auxiliary output function has been corrected. When using the auxiliary output function
for maximum and minimum capacity respectively, this did not function correctly for rotatune
machines in earlier eprom versions.
Rotatune reciprocating compressors. An error has been corrected in the outer regulator.
The neutral zone value was doubled so that it applied both above and below the set point.
Now, the neutral zone is divided in equal parts above and below the set point. See also the
section about regulation in this manual.
0178-511 - ENG 211/230

Rev. 2005.03
Version Description
Known errors:
When using the "copy eeprom" function, all timer values are reset at default values.
When using the 4-20 mA analog output function from UNISAB II to a frequency converter
to control the speed of the compressor motor the following problem is found:
When running in auto or remote control mode, it is still possible to change the speed of the
compressor motor with the operating keys capacity up or capacity down. This should only
be possible in manual control mode.
212/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
Version Description

Relay output for low suction pressure alarm can now be deactivated. The advantage for su-
perior systems is that they do not receive an alarm signal at low suction pressure as UNIS-
AB II automatically resets this alarm.
The PID regulator need not be used. The regulator is thus exclusively an I regulator as used
in eprom 1.13 and earlier versions.
Corrected errors in profibus communication.
Corrected errors in multisab sequential regulation. Due to this correction PREF.MASTER
=START # must be selected on all compressors in a system including machines configured
as ROTATUNE=YES.
Correction regarding PLCx chillers with connection to Evolution PLC. The system now ac-
knowledges an interruption of the start permission after the timer has started counting be-
fore the compressor starts.
Formerly, when compressor start up was prevented by deactivating the start permission,
the start delay timer would count down to 0 seconds. When start permission was reactivat-
ed it would start counting again without starting up the compressor.
Errors corrected regarding communication with IP300 RCM marine plants.
When using Psi/°F units the standard values for P bands have been changed. P bands in
outer regulator are changed from 10°F to 20°F. This is due to the fact that the value 10°F
causes hunting on screw compressors when using the PID regulator.
Rotatune compressors running as slaves are now counting down on the stop delay timer
before they stop. In 2.03.1 and earlier versions the slaves stopped immediately without de-
lay.
Screw compressors:
Errors corrected in capacity slide control.
Screw compressor SAB 80
Timer 10: NO OIL FLOW has been changed from 10 to 120 seconds. The timer cannot be
adjusted.
Multisab, screw compressors
Errors corrected regarding sequential control. If a compressor showed negative capacity in
the display it was mistaken for high positive capacity by the other compressors. The com-
pressor would therefore not stop as it was supposed to when the stop timer had counted
down to 0 seconds.
Multisab, screw compressors
Errors corrected regarding sequential control. An error would occur during capacity regula-
tion when deviation from the set point was very small i.e. < 0.5% from set point. Regulation
was normal when the deviation from set point was more than 0.5% i.e. the com-pressor ca-
pacity was regulated towards the setpoint whereas the compressor capacity was regulated
away from the set point when the deviation was less than 0.5%. In practice this meant that
the capacity set point was locked.
0178-511 - ENG 213/230

Rev. 2005.03
Version Description
Direct capacity control by means of 4-20 mA

Errors in connection with this type of control have been detected in earlier versions. The re-
ception of start number 0 via the communication has now been prevented. Similarly, the
au-tomatic shift from REMOTE CONTROL MODE to AUTO CONTROL MODE when start
number is 0 has been prevented.
In systems with both rotatune machines and reciprocating compressors, the start timer on
a reciprocating compressor would sometimes count down while a rotatune compressor was
about to start. However, if the timer value on the reciprocating compressor was higher than
the rotatune compressor value, the reciprocating compressor would not start.
Known errors:
When using the “copy eeprom” function, all timer values are reset at default values.
When using the 4-20 mA analog output function from UNISAB II to a frequency converter
to control the speed of the compressor motor, the following problem is found: When running
in auto or remote control mode, it is still possible to change the speed of the compressor
motor with the operating keys capacity up or capacity down. This should only be possible
in manual control mode.
“Total unloading” is not functioning when the compressor is configured as rotatune.
214/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
Version Description

Errors in connection with operation of several frequency converter regulated compressors
in the same control system have been corrected. The errors related to the limiting function
in UNISAB II and emerged when, for example, a Rotatune compressor was operating as
master and simultanously was running in limited operation. In this case, the slave would
hunt up and down between 100% and 0% without stopping, and the master would run con-
stantly at 100%.
The function common evaporator/condenser has been improved in connection with MUL-
TISAB compared to earlier versions. When the configuration Common evaporator/con-
denser = NO is chosen and a compressor with a lower start number is in limitation, the sub-
sequent compressor will start. When the compressor is stopped and in limitation, it will be
in status PAUSE. In earlier versions, the compressor with the lowest start number would be
in status READY even when in limitation, and the subsequent compressor would not start.
The parameter T.int has been removed from all regulator displays when selecting PID = NO
in the CONFIGURATION menu > Control.
In connection with MULTISAB, a ramp function has been implemented between the Rota-
tune master and slave. The code has been changed; thus it now takes the slave compres-
sor 3 times longer than the master compressor to reach the same capacity as the master
compressor. In earlier versions, a slave compressor accelerated quickly to a higher capac-
ity only limited by the frequency converter acceleration speed.
Profibus with extended protocol.
Communication via profibus has now been extended to DPV0 with support for parameter
channel. This means that all available values from UNISAB II, incl. EEPROM logged values
and counting timers can be transferred. All values via parameter channel must be called as
the values will not appear automatically in the protocol. Test version 2.03.3 only supported
”Tiny profibus DP”.
An error in the auxiliary output function “READY AND ME ONLY” has been corrected. The
system fails in earlier versions if reciprocating compressors have a higher start number
than the following compressors: Screw compressors, Rotatune screw compressors or Ro-
tatune reciprocating compressors. When reciprocating compressors have a lower start
number than these compressors, the error does not occur.
An error in the display of compressor mode has been corrected. If the compressor is run-
ning and an alarm occurs, the compressor stops and the display in UNISAB II shifts be-
tween compressor mode 11(”stopped”) and 4 (”shutdown”). This causes problems for Sab-
visual and other PC/PLC systems as the compressor animation shifts between the two dif-
ferent status displays.
0178-511 - ENG 215/230

Rev. 2005.03
Version Description
Screw compressors:
Rotatune SAB110SR/LR compressors
The parameters in the oil pressure display have been changed. Consequently, the values
correspond to the values in SAB110L/F (0.0 bar).
An error in the code for Rotatune reciprocating compressors has been corrected. Some-
times the alarm: ”Low lube pressure alarm” was activated even though this alarm is intend-
ed for screw compressors only.
2 x Reciptune: The slave compressor does not stop when it reaches minimum capacity.
This error only occurs in version 2.03.2.
An error in the regulator has been corrected. When in AUTO control mode, the compressor
regulation was 5 times slower than in REMOTE control mode.
The SMC/HPC/CMO/HPO reciprocating compressors
Now UNISAB II supports reciprocating compressors with extended capacity unloading.
This applies to operation with as well as without frequency converter. The SMC 180 and
TSMC/TCMO series, however, are NOT supported.
The timer for oil return has been changed from default 0 seconds to default 600 seconds in
order to ensure that the oil from the oil separator does not contain any refrigerant when led
back into the compressor.
The following error has been corrected: Cap. is displayed as 0% at compressor start-up
even though total unloading has not been configured. The error occurs if the compressor
runs in limited operation before UNISAB II receives motor feedback signal from the motor
starter. The timer DELAY UP counts twice before exit 1 becomes active and the correct ca-
pacity is displayed.
When a reciprocating compressor stops because of a limitation, the stop timer now counts
down after reaching the final capacity stage. Earlier, the stop timer was not activated; the
compressor stopped when the DELAY DOWN timer had finished counting down after un-
loading the final capacity stage.
216/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
17. Spare parts for UNISAB II

Item Part number
Normal spare parts set 3084-394
Set of accessories - UNISAB II 1572-018
EPROM tongs 1613-002
EEPROM tongs 1613-003
EEPROM (2kB-serial) - To be used in version Eprom 1.10 and earlier versions. 1571-015
EEPROM (4kB-serial) - To be used in version Eprom 1.12 and later versions. 1571-018
Certificate set 3084-383
Normal spare parts set 3084-394
Front cover with sheet and display, Sabroe Refrigeration logo 1573-008
Front cover with sheet and display, Sabroe logo 1573-007
CPU print (rev. C) 1572-026
Relay print (rev. G) 1574-016
Pressure transducer dia.10 AKS32R-1-9 bar 1) 1373-249
Pressure transducer dia.10 AKS2050-1-25 bar 1373-271
Pressure transducer dia.10 AKS32R-1-59 bar 2) 1373-251
Pt100 sensor 4-conductor (1/2" thread) 3) 1373-245
Position transmitter 6) 3448-004
Position transmitter 7) 3448-___
Notes: SAB 163B, SAB 163H (not HR) and SAB

1) Not used for HPO/HPC compressors 202 compressors.
2) Only used for HPO/HPC compressors 7) Only for SAB 250 and SAB 330 compres-
3) Units supplied before November 1995 sors.
4) Units supplied after 1 November 1995 8) Only for SAB 80 compressors.
5) Units supplied after 1 January 1997 9) Only for SV 10/20 compressors (not Ro-
6) Only for SAB 110, SAB 128H (not HR), tatune)
0178-511 - ENG 217/230

Rev. 2005.03
218/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
18. Supplementary material

"Quick Reference"Leaflet Data sheet for Pt100 sensor - Temp./resistance
Installing a data communications cable0171-745 table0178-411
Data sheet for AKS 32R -(-1/+9 bar)0178-410 Capacity and Vi pos. transmitters0178-412
Data sheet for AKS 2050 - (-1/+25 bar)0178-414
Electrical wiring diagrams for:
• Mounting of ground log and emergency stop • Screw compressors(page 1-4, 10-14,
(page AC038_13) 16-22, 25-32, 35-36, 39-40)
2347-002 3448-235
• Voltage equalization (page AC040_10) • Reciprocating compressors (page 1-40)
2347-002 3448-236
0178-511 - ENG 219/230

Rev. 2005.03
220/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
Index
A Adjusting slide velocity ........................................................................................ 100

Alarm
alarm from Chiller ............................................................................................. 58
auxiliary input signal ......................................................................................... 55
capacity .......................................................................................................... 105
capacity error
screw compr. .............................................................................................. 55
Cooling fan error .............................................................................................. 57
Error in diagnosis- EEPROM ........................................................................... 57
Evolution
no communication to PLC .......................................................................... 58
full flow pump error
screw compr. .............................................................................................. 57
high motor temperature .................................................................................... 56
identification numbers Alarms-warnings .......................................................... 60
Limiting brine temperature ............................................................................... 57
Limiting discharge pressure ............................................................................. 57
Limiting discharge temperature ........................................................................ 57
Limiting hot water ............................................................................................. 57
Limiting suction pressure ................................................................................. 57
low lubricating pressure monitoring ................................................................. 58
motor error ....................................................................................................... 56
motor overload ................................................................................................. 56
no communication to Chiller ............................................................................. 57
no starting permission ...................................................................................... 56
oil pump error
SAB 80 ....................................................................................................... 56
screw compr. .............................................................................................. 56
oil rectifier error ................................................................................................ 57
oil system error
screw compr. .............................................................................................. 55
overload discharge pressure ............................................................................ 56
suction gas superheat ...................................................................................... 55
Vi-position error ................................................................................................ 58
Wrong starting number in sequence ................................................................ 57
Analog inputs
numbering ...................................................................................................... 149
Auto
Start ................................................................................................................. 34
stop .................................................................................................................. 34
Automatic setting of a new zero point
(SAB 202) ...................................................................................................... 102
Aux.
output ............................................................................................................. 121
0178-511 - ENG 221/230

Rev. 2005.03
B Baud rate
port 1 ................................................................................................................42
port 2 ................................................................................................................42
selecting ...........................................................................................................39
Booster
menu description ..............................................................................................35
Brine
temperature ......................................................................................................33
Brine temperature
Calibration ......................................................................................................128
C Cabinet
open the cabinet ..............................................................................................14
Calculated Vi position ..........................................................................................104
Calibration ...........................................................................................................127
Capacity
corrected capacity ..........................................................................................101
Capacity measuring system
Long-Stroke Capacity-Rod
Calibration ................................................................................................132
Turning Transmitter
Calibration ................................................................................................131
Change to full load ...............................................................................................105
Change to part load .............................................................................................105
Checklist ..............................................................................................................177
Chiller
Circuit board with light diodes ..............................................................................151
Clima control
Climate control
description ........................................................................................................97
code plug ...............................................................................................................13
Cold store
funktion ..........................................................................................................123
Compressor
adjusting slide velocity ...................................................................................100
slide data ....................................................................................... 42, 43, 44, 45
Configuration
menus ..............................................................................................................27
Control and surveillance ......................................................................................113
Aux. output .....................................................................................................121
Capacity down blocked ..................................................................................122
Cold store function .........................................................................................123
COP setting ....................................................................................................121
External start permission- immediate stop .....................................................120
External start permission- normal stop ...........................................................120
222/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
FV 19 with oil pump ....................................................................................... 117

FV 24/26 with oil pump .................................................................................. 116
GSV/RWF with oil pump ................................................................................ 115
Motor current measuring ................................................................................ 120
motor power measuring ................................................................................. 121
Power management system .......................................................................... 122
Reciprocating compressors ........................................................................... 119
SAB 110/128/163 Mk 2 without oil pump ....................................................... 118
SAB 128/163 Mk 2 Booster with oil pump ...................................................... 118
SAB 163 Mk 1 with oil pump .......................................................................... 119
SAB 202/ 163 & 128H MK3 with oil pump ..................................................... 113
SAB 283/ 330 and 355 with oil pump ............................................................. 114
SAB 80 with fitted (mechanical) oil pump ...................................................... 115
SAB128/163 HR with oil pump ....................................................................... 113
Thermistor connection ................................................................................... 121
VMY Mk 2 and 2.5 with built-in oil pump ........................................................ 118
VMY Mk 3 without full flow pump ................................................................... 118
VMY Mk3 with full flow pump ......................................................................... 113
Control mode ......................................................................................................... 83
COP
active ................................................................................................................ 41
Diagnosis ....................................................................................................... 146
setting ............................................................................................................ 121
D Danbuss
menu description .............................................................................................. 41
Data communication cable
installing the data communication cable ........................................................ 168
Define refrigerant R000 ....................................................................................... 125
Diagnosis
Analog inputs ................................................................................................. 144
COP ............................................................................................................... 146
Digital inputs .................................................................................................. 144
Digital outputs ................................................................................................ 144
Examine memory ........................................................................................... 145
Insp. old alarms .............................................................................................. 142
Misc. functions ............................................................................................... 143
New password ............................................................................................... 146
No. of alarms .................................................................................................. 145
pictures .......................................................................................................... 141
serial number ................................................................................................. 145
Software version ............................................................................................ 144
Zero capacity pos. .......................................................................................... 146
Digital inputs
Diagnosis ....................................................................................................... 144
Digital inputs and outputs
Numbering ..................................................................................................... 147
Digital outputs
0178-511 - ENG 223/230

Rev. 2005.03
Diagnosis .......................................................................................................144
Discharge pressure
overload ...........................................................................................................56
Display
contrast ............................................................................................................25
description ........................................................................................................14
in Bar or °C/R ...................................................................................................20
Display indications
various limiters ...............................................................................................110
E Economizer
high suction pressure .......................................................................................35
low capacity .....................................................................................................35
Electrical slide control
SAB 250 and SAB 330 ...................................................................................104
Evolution
no communication to PLC ................................................................................58
warning from PLC ............................................................................................58
Examine memory
Diagnosis .......................................................................................................145
EXT.COOL
EXT.HEAT
External input
universal regulators ..........................................................................................94
F Factory setting
restore setting ..................................................................................................41
Factory settings
return to ... ........................................................................................................24
Flow factor
Front panel
control/recording section ..................................................................................14
green lamp .......................................................................................................14
Red lamp ..........................................................................................................14
Yellow lamp ......................................................................................................14
Function
changing a function ..........................................................................................23
G Green .....................................................................................................................14
Grounding ............................................................................................................170
224/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
H High difference pressure Limiter .......................................................................... 109

HP
on two stage ..................................................................................................... 36
HP on TWO-STAGE ............................................................................................ 123
Hydraulic slide systems
Calibration ...................................................................................................... 129
I Input signal
Auxiliary input signal
screw compressors .................................................................................... 49
auxiliary input signal
HPO-HPC ................................................................................................... 52
recip.compr. ................................................................................................ 51
L Languages
list of languages ............................................................................................... 25
Limiting functions
Standard limiters ............................................................................................ 107
Liquid subcool
List of Versions .................................................................................................... 201
Loading sequence ............................................................................................... 185
Long-Stroke Capacity-Rod
Adjusting ........................................................................................................ 135
M Manual setting of a new zero point ...................................................................... 102

Manual zero ........................................................................................................... 40
Mecanical zero ...................................................................................................... 40
Menu Tree
One-stage Reciprocating Compressor ............................................................. 17
Screw Compressor .......................................................................................... 16
Two-stage reciprocating compressor ............................................................... 18
Motor
alarm for cooling fan error ................................................................................ 57
alarm for high motor temperature .................................................................... 56
alarm motor overload ....................................................................................... 56
current
calibration ................................................................................................. 129
limiter ........................................................................................................ 108
measuring ................................................................................................. 120
range .......................................................................................................... 38
motor error alarm ............................................................................................. 56
motor overload alarm ....................................................................................... 56
power measuring ........................................................................................... 121
signal ................................................................................................................ 42
size ................................................................................................................... 41
0178-511 - ENG 225/230

Rev. 2005.03
Multisab
compressor. no. 1 to 14 ...................................................................................35
description ..................................................................................................76, 77
parallel control ..................................................................................................80
preferred master ..............................................................................................35
regulating Setup .............................................................................................173
regulation .......................................................................................................171
special timers
recip.compr. ................................................................................................76
state .................................................................................................................78
system setup ..................................................................................................172
take over ..........................................................................................................41
N New password
Diagnosis .......................................................................................................146
No. of alarms
Diagnosis .......................................................................................................145
Node no
port 1 ................................................................................................................42
port 2 ................................................................................................................42
O Oil cooling
selecting ...........................................................................................................38
setting ..............................................................................................................37
Oil heating ...........................................................................................................124
Oil pump
full flow
screw compr. ..............................................................................................34
Oil rectifier
selecting ...........................................................................................................40
Oil return
reciprocating compressors .............................................................................123
Operating sequence ............................................................................................187
P Part load and Full load .........................................................................................104

Password
Applying the password .....................................................................................22
Changing the password ...................................................................................22
description ........................................................................................................21
Resetting the password ...................................................................................22
P-band
factor ................................................................................................................74
start delay ........................................................................................................74
stop delay .........................................................................................................74
PBF ........................................................................................................................75
PID
226/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
setting the regulator ......................................................................................... 86

Port 1
Port 2
Position indications .............................................................................................. 105
Pref. master = START
Starting- and system numbers ....................................................................... 182
Prelubrication
Press
Pressure
measured/calculated pressure levels
recip.compressors ...................................................................................... 50
screw compr. .............................................................................................. 48
measured/calculated pressures/temperatures
HPO-HPC ................................................................................................... 52
Pressure transducers
Calibration ...................................................................................................... 127
Printed circuit board, light diodes ........................................................................ 150
R Regulators ............................................................................................................. 83
Replacing
CPU print and EEPROM ................................................................................ 164
the battery ...................................................................................................... 167
the CPU print ................................................................................................. 163
the door .......................................................................................................... 163
the EPROM (program) UNISAB II .................................................................. 165
the relay print ................................................................................................. 164
the serial EEPROM (diagnosis) ..................................................................... 166
Rotatune
menu description ..................................................................................42, 43, 44
S Sequence
The plant does not run in sequence ............................................................... 199
Serial number
Diagnosis ....................................................................................................... 145
Service ................................................................................................................. 163
Set points
control with current input .................................................................................. 94
on regulators .................................................................................................... 93
Settings
regulating parameters
reciprocating compressors ......................................................................... 90
SAB 330 ..................................................................................................... 93
screw compressors .................................................................................... 91
0178-511 - ENG 227/230

Rev. 2005.03
Short-Stroke Capacity-Rod
Adjusting ........................................................................................................137
Slide brake control ...............................................................................................105
Spacer block
built-in space block ........................................................................................102
Spare parts for UNISAB II ...................................................................................217
Special Limiters ...................................................................................................109
State of take-over ................................................................................................193
State of transfer ...................................................................................................192
Suction Pressure
Superuser keyword
Diagnosis .......................................................................................................145
Swept volumen
System numbers ..................................................................................................181
T Temperature
screw compressors .....................................................................................51
measured and calculated temperatures
screw compressors .....................................................................................49
measured/calculated pressures/temperatures
HPO-HPC ...................................................................................................52
Timer description
reciprocating compressors ...............................................................................72
screw compressors ..........................................................................................68
Timers
menu ................................................................................................................63
reciprocating compressor values .....................................................................67
screw compressor values ................................................................................65
Trouble shooting ..................................................................................................141
Trouble-shooting
The plant cannot start ....................................................................................199
Trouble-shooting diagrams
General trouble-shooting, UNISAB II .............................................................160
Start compressor
in AUTO, continued ..........................................................................157, 158
in MANUAL, continued .............................................................................154
Start of compressor
in AUTO mode ..........................................................................................156
in MANUAL mode .....................................................................................153
Start Screw comp,
Prelub. in MANUAL, continued .................................................................155
Start Screw comp.
Prelub. in AUTO mode, continued ............................................................159
228/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03
U Universal regulator
ext.input ........................................................................................................... 94
Unload
reciprocating compr. ........................................................................................ 39
Unloading sequence ....................................................................................186, 190
V Value
changing a value .............................................................................................. 23
Variable Zero position .......................................................................................... 101
Vi
mode ................................................................................................................ 41
Volume ratio
auto .................................................................................................................. 34
Volume ratio slide ................................................................................................ 100
W Warning
Evolution
warning from PLC ....................................................................................... 58
high oil differential pressure SMC Mk4 ............................................................ 58
identification numbers alarms / warnings ......................................................... 60
watch the oil pressure ...................................................................................... 58
Water
cooling
recip. compr. ............................................................................................... 36
Y Yellow .................................................................................................................... 14
Z Zero capacity pos.

Diagnosis ....................................................................................................... 146
Zero point
automatic setting ............................................................................................ 102
configuration .................................................................................................. 103
manual setting of a new zero point ................................................................ 102
Zero pos.
menu .............................................................................................................. 104
0178-511 - ENG 229/230

Rev. 2005.03
230/230 0178-511 - ENG

Rev. 2005.03

Unisab II Ver 202.04 - Engineering Manual - 0178-511 - ENG

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Unisab II Ver 202.04 - Engineering Manual - 0178-511 - ENG

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Engineering manual - UNISAB II - 2.

Compressor type: Refrigerant:

0178-511 - ENG 1/230

2/230 0178-511 - ENG

Power supply: Nominal VAC Tolerance Hz

0178-511 - ENG 3/230

4/230 0178-511 - ENG

Description of UNISAB II control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Alarms and Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

0178-511 - ENG 5/230

6/230 0178-511 - ENG

Limiting functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Compressor control and surveillance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

0178-511 - ENG 7/230

SV 24/26 with oil pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Trouble shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

8/230 0178-511 - ENG

2) Diagnosis I Misc. functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Trouble shooting diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

MULTISAB regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Start and system numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

0178-511 - ENG 9/230

Loading sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

List of versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Spare parts for UNISAB II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Supplementary material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

10/230 0178-511 - ENG

1. Description of UNISAB II control

0178-511 - ENG 11/230

Fig. 1.1 UNISAB II front panel

12/230 0178-511 - ENG

from the local installations. The electric wiring UNISAB II

b. that the code plug for the supply voltage must

DISCH.PRES 0,0 BAR

UNISAB II MOTOR CURR 0A

UNISAB II has been programmed with values for

UNISAB II is operated exclusively by means of the

0178-511 - ENG 13/230

Display Pos. 5 A Compressor start at manual

14/230 0178-511 - ENG

is not possible to change to automat- As to the encoding of a password,

0178-511 - ENG 15/230

Warnings Multisab Date-time

16/230 0178-511 - ENG

Main picture Main menu

0178-511 - ENG 17/230

18/230 0178-511 - ENG

In the menu tree the selection of pictures is carried Press I

cursor from line to line. SETPOINT 2 XX

On delivery UNISAB II will display the following T.DIFF. XX

Press K until the cursor is at TIMERS.

0178-511 - ENG 19/230

TIMERS 30 CAP. NEGATIVE XX

TIMERS 31 START UNLOAD XX

TIMERS SETUP 32 LOW SUCT. PRESS. XX

SERVICE TIMERS 33 LUBR.PRESS. XX

Press K until the cursor is at TIMERS SETUP.

20/230 0178-511 - ENG

DIFF.PRESS XX OIL PRESS XX

OIL TEMP XX SUCT.PRESS XX

Press and keep G until the cursor covers the

0178-511 - ENG 21/230

Application of password chosen. The password can be set anywhere be-

1 TYPE 1) Reciprocating and 2) Screw

2 REFRIGERANT 1)2) R717; R22; R502; R23; R404a;

10 COMPR.NO. 1)2) 1 to 14

24 BAUD RATE 1)2) 1200 Baud to 19200 Baud

26 PRESS/TEMP 1)2) BAR / °C; PSI / ° F; KPA /°C

29 PORT 1 1) 2) NONE; EVOLUTION A1S; EVOLUTION FX2N

33 FACTORY RESET 1)2) Yes; No